You are on page 1of 272

T.O.

1B-52H-1-13

Electronic Warfare Officer’s Manual


USAF SERIES B-52H AIRCRAFT
THE BOEING COMPANY
F33657-79-C-0416
F34601-03-D-0066

This manual contains unverified procedures. Refer to the validation/verification status


page(s) prior to performing any operation or maintenance procedure.

THIS PUBLICATION IS INCOMPLETE WITHOUT T.O. 1B-52H-1 AND T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 AND IS USED WITH T.O. 1B-52H-1-12.
SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED TO SUPPLY OPERATIONAL COVERAGE IN NONSTANDARD CONFIGURATIONS.
SEE T.O. 0-1-CD-1 FOR NUMERICAL INDEX OF BOMBER TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS.

SEE T.O. 0-1-CD-1 FOR CURRENT STATUS OF FLIGHT MANUALS, SAFETY SUPPLEMENTS, OPERATIONAL SUPPLEMENTS, AND
FLIGHT CREW CHECKLISTS.

COMMANDERS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR BRINGING THIS PUBLICATION TO THE ATTENTION OF ALL AIR FORCE PERSONNEL
CLEARED FOR OPERATION OF SUBJECT AIRCRAFT.

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT E – Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense Components only, due to Direct Military Support, 29
October 1996. Other requests shall be referred to 327 BMSG/EN, Tinker AFB, OK 73145-3021.

WARNING –This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act (Title 22, U.S.C., Sec 2751, et seq.)
or the Export Administration Act of 1979, as amended, Title 50, U.S.C., App. 2401 et seq. Violations of these export laws are subject to severe
criminal penalties. Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DoD Directive 5230.25.

HANDLING AND DESTRUCTION NOTICE – Comply with distribution statement and destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of
contents or reconstruction of the document. Demil code D.

PUBLISHED UNDER AUTHORITY OF THE SECRETARY OF THE AIR FORCE

31 AUGUST 1996
CHANGE 14 – 1 JUNE 2006
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Technical orders are normally distributed promptly after printing. Date(s) shown on the title page (lower right corner) are for identification only. These
are not distribution dates. Processing time sometimes causes distribution to only appear to have been delayed.

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.


LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES NOTE: The portion of the text affected by the changes is indicated by a
vertical line in the outer margins of the page. Changes to illustrations
are indicated by miniature pointing hands. Changes to wiring
diagrams are indicated by shaded areas.

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:

Original 0 31 Aug 96 Change 4 1 Mar 00 Change 8 1 Mar 02 Change 12 1 Dec 04


Change 1 30 Dec 98 Change 5 30 Dec 00 Change 9 1 Sep 02 Change 13 1 Jul 05
Change 2 1 May 99 Change 6 30 Jun 01 Change 10 1 Apr 03 Change 14 1 Jun 06
Change 3 30 Jun 99 Change 7 1 Oct 01 Change 11 1 Apr 04

TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 272 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:

Page Change Page Change Page Change Page Change


No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No.

* Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1-27 – 1-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1-106 – 1-107 . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2-35 – 2-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12


* A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1-108 – 1-111 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Flyleaf-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1-34 – 1-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1-112 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-38 – 2-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Flyleaf-2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-42A – 1-42H Added . . . . . 7 1-113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
V/VS-1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1-42J – 1-42L Added . . . . . 7 1-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
V/VS-2 Blank Added . . . . . 13 1-42M Blank Added . . . . . . 7 1-115 – 1-116 . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2-42 – 2-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
i – ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1-43 – 1-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1-117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
iii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-45 – 1-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-118 – 1-119 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-45 – 2-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
iv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1-120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
v ....................... 4 1-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
vi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-49 – 1-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2-2 – 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
vii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3-2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
viii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2-5 – 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1-54 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-55 – 1-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
* 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 * 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3-6 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3-7 – 3-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-59 – 1-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 3-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1-62 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1-6A – 1-6B Added . . . . . . . 9 1-63 – 1-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2-13 – 2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1-66A Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3-14 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-8 – 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1-66B Blank Added . . . . . . . 9 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-10 – 1-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-67 – 1-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2-17 – 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3-16 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-12 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-72A – 1-72H Added . . . . . 9 2-19 – 2-20 Deleted . . . . . . . 9 3-17 – 3-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1-72J – 1-72N Added . . . . . 9 2-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3-20A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1-14 – 1-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-72P – 1-72V Added . . . . . 9 2-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3-20B – 3-20F Added . . . . . 9
1-16A Added . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-73 – 1-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3-21 – 3-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-16B Blank Added . . . . . . . 2 1-74A – 1-74D Added . . . . . 9 2-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 3-26 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-75 – 1-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-25 – 2-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2-26A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1-19 – 1-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1-78 – 1-91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-26B Blank Added . . . . . . . 5 Glossary-1 Added . . . . . . . 10
1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1-92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-27 – 2-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Glossary-2 Blank Added . . 10
1-23 – 1-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-93 – 1-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-31 – 2-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Index-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1-26A – 1-26D Added . . . . . 2 1-102 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Index-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1-26E – 1-26H . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1-103 – 1-105 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Index-3 – Index-4 . . . . . . . . . 9

CURRENT FLIGHT CREW CHECKLIST


Electronic Warfare Officer’s Abbreviated Checklist T.O. 1B-52H-1-13CL-1 31 Aug 96 Change 11 - 1 Jun 06

Upon receipt of the second and subsequent changes to this technical order, personnel responsible for maintaining this publication in current
status will ascertain that all previous changes have been received and incorporated. Action should be taken promptly if the publication is
incomplete.
*The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

ADDITIONAL COPIES OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE OBTAINED BY USAF ACTIVITIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH T.O. 00-5-1.

A Change 14 USAF
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

STATUS OF SAFETY AND OPERATIONAL SUPPLEMENTS


This supplement status page is based on information available to the manual editor as of the date of
this publication. The information may not be current as it must be updated by any subsequent supple-
ment status pages and by reference to T.O. 0-1-1-2.

SUPPLEMENTS IN THIS CHANGE

Number Date Short Title Section Affected

S-4 30 Dec 00 Installation Of DUAL MODEM Rescinded


AFSATCOM

OUTSTANDING SUPPLEMENTS

Number Date Short Title Section Affected

Change 9 Flyleaf-1/(Flyleaf-2 blank)


BLA
WARNING

This manual contains unverified procedures. Unverified procedures shall only be performed during verification, in accor-
dance with TOs 00-5-1 and 00-5-3. Performance of unverified procedures may result in injury to personnel or damage to
equipment.

TECHNICAL ORDER VALIDATION/VERIFICATION STATUS PAGE

T.O. NO. BASIC DATE CHANGE NO. – DATE PTO CHANGE NO. – DATE

T.O 1B-52H-1-13 31 AUG 1996 13 – 1 JUL 2005 AMI

VERIFICATION
VALIDATION
METHOD

METHOD
DATA ELEMENT DATE DATE REMARKS
VALIDATED VERIFIED

(A) (B) (B)

TCTO Listings
(P, PG vii) 7/15/02 A
ALQ-172 Fault Status
(P: PG 3-20A) 7/10/02 A

LEGEND:

(A) DATA ELEMENT: (S) = SECTION, (PG) = PAGE, (P) = PARAGRAPH, (F) = FIGURE, (T) = TABLE

(B) VALIDATION OR VERIFICATION METHOD: (P) = PERFORMANCE, (S) = SIMULATION, (A) = ANALYSIS (TABLE-TOP)

V/VS-1/(V/VS-2 blank)
BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Table of Contents

PAGE

SECTION I Systems Description and Operation 1-1*

SECTION II Normal Procedures 2-1

SECTION III Defensive Systems Abnormal Operations


and Malfunction Analysis 3-1

SECTION IV Crew Duties **

SECTION V Operating Limitations **

SECTION VI Flight Characteristics **

SECTION VII All Weather Operation **

Glossary Glossary 1

Alphabetical Index Index 1

* Classified Defensive Systems Information is contained in T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1

** Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1.


LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Titles included in alphabetical index

Change 10 i
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Before operating the B-52 aircraft


read the following pages carefully!
SCOPE. This manual provides the electronic warfare officer with a general knowl-
edge of the defensive systems on the B-52H aircraft, their characteristics, and specif-
ic normal procedures, systems abnormal operating procedures and systems malfunc-
tion analysis. This manual, when used with T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1, provides detailed
operating procedures and technical description of the defensive systems. Instruc-
tions in this manual are for a crew inexperienced in the operation of this aircraft.
This manual provides the best possible operating instructions under most circum-
stances, but it is a poor substitute for sound judgment.

COMPLEMENTARY MANUALS. This manual must be used with one or more of the fol-
lowing manuals to obtain all the information necessary for safe and efficient
operation of the B-52H aircraft. These manuals have been separated from this man-
ual for your convenience in handling information which may be classified, applicable
only to certain aircraft configurations, or used only by certain crewmembers.
T.O. 1B-52H-1 B-52H Flight Manual
T.O. 1B-52H-1-12 B-52H Radar Navigator’s/Navigator’s Manual
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 B-52H Electronic Warfare Officer’s Manual Classified
Supplement (SECRET) (Title Unclassified)

PERMISSIBLE OPERATIONS. The Flight Manual takes a ‘‘positive approach’’ and


normally states only what you can do. Unusual operations or configurations are
prohibited unless specifically covered herein. Clearance from the using command
must be obtained before any questionable operation, which is not specifically per-
mitted in this manual, is attempted. Before granting the clearance, the using com-
mand may request coordination or engineering assistance/approval from Oklahoma
City ALC. Request should be made through the Flight Manual Manager.

HOW TO BE ASSURED OF HAVING LATEST DATA. Refer to T.O. 0-1-1-2 for a listing of
all current flight manuals, safety, or operational supplements, and checklists. Also,
check the flight manual cover page, the title block of each safety and operational
supplement and all status pages attached to formal safety and operational supple-
ments. Clear up all discrepancies before flight.

ii Change 10
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ARRANGEMENT. The manual is divided into seven fairly independent sections to sim-
plify reading it straight through or using it as a reference manual.

SAFETY SUPPLEMENTS. Information involving safety will be promptly forwarded to


you in a safety supplement. Urgent information is published in interim safety sup-
plements and transmitted by teletype. Formal supplements are mailed. The supple-
ment title block and status page (published with formal supplement only) should be
checked to determine the supplement’s effect on the manual and other outstanding
supplements.

OPERATIONAL SUPPLEMENTS. Information involving changes to operating proce-


dures will be forwarded to you by operational supplements. The procedure for han-
dling operational supplements is the same as for safety supplements.

CHECKLISTS. The flight manual contains itemized procedures with necessary ampli-
fications. The checklist contains itemized procedures without the amplification. Pri-
mary line items in the flight manual and checklist are identical. If a formal safety or
operational supplement affects your checklist, the affected checklist page will be at-
tached to the supplement. Cut it out and insert it over the affected page but never
discard the checklist page in case the supplement is rescinded and the page is need-
ed.

FLIGHT MANUAL BINDERS. Looseleaf binders and sectionalized tabs are available for
use with your manual. They are obtained through local purchase procedures and are
listed in the Federal Supply Schedule (FSC Group 75, Office Supplies, Part 1).
Check with your supply personnel for assistance in procuring these items.

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES. The following definitions apply to ‘‘Warnings,’’


‘‘Cautions,’’ and ‘‘Notes’’ found throughout the manual.

Operating procedures, techniques, etc, which could result in personal


injury or loss of life if not carefully followed.

Operating procedures, techniques, etc, which could result in damage to


equipment if not carefully followed.

NOTE

An operating procedure, technique, etc, which is considered essential to


emphasize.

SHALL, WILL, SHOULD, and MAY. The following definitions apply to the words:

SHALL or WILL The instructions or procedures prefaced by ‘‘shall’’ or ‘‘will’’


are mandatory.

SHOULD Normally used to indicate a preferred but nonmandatory


method of accomplishment.

MAY An acceptable or suggested means of accomplishment.

iii
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CHANGE SYMBOLS. Changes to existing material and addition of new material are
indicated by one of three types of symbols determined by the nature of the material
affected. Text material utilizes a vertical line in the margin adjacent to the affected
area. New illustrations (figures) utilize a vertical line in the outer margin of the
page. Photographs and line drawings use a miniature pointing hand to highlight the
affected area. Diagrams and schematics utilize a grey tone (screening) to highlight
the affected area. Change symbols are not used for blank space resulting from dele-
tions, indexes, and tabular data where changes cannot be identified, relocation of
material, or correction of minor inaccuracies unless such correction changes the
meaning.

YOUR RESPONSIBILITY – TO LET US KNOW. Every effort is made to keep the Flight
Manual current. Review conferences with operating personnel and a constant review
of accident and flight test reports assure inclusion of the latest data in the manual.
However, we cannot correct an error unless we know of its existence. In this regard,
it is essential that you do your part. Comments, corrections, and questions regarding
this manual, supplementary manuals, checklists, or any phase of the Flight Manual
program are welcomed. These should be forwarded to your local standardization/eva-
luation unit and routed as directed by AFI 11-215 to the Flight Manual Manager,
327 BMSG/EN, Tinker AFB, Oklahoma 73145-3021.

iv Change 13
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Aircraft Coding

The information contained in this manual covers all B-52H aircraft. USAF Serial numbers
are used to distinguish information related to one aircraft or group of aircraft from that
which is applicable to the other aircraft. When serial numbers appear by a paragraph or
illustration, the information applies only to the aircraft represented by the serial numbers.
Where no serial numbers appear on a paragraph or illustration, the information is applicable
to all B-52H aircraft.
• Symbol means ‘‘thru’’ or ‘‘on.’’ Example:
60-001 60-015 – Identifies B-52H AF60-001 thru AF60-015
61-016 – Identifies B-52H AF61-016 and on
• AIRCRAFT NO LONGER IN SERVICE
• CS Aircraft modified by TCTO 1B-52H-756 (Integrated Conventional Stores
Management System)
• # Aircraft not CSRL capable

USAF B-52H Serial No.

60-001 CS 60-022 CS 60-043 CS 61-001 61-021 CS


60-002 # 60-023 CS 60-044 CS 61-002 CS 61-022 CS
60-003 CS 60-024 # 60-045 CS 61-003 CS 61-023 CS
60-004 CS 60-025 CS 60-046 CS 61-004 CS 61-024 CS
60-005 # 60-026 CS 60-047 61-005 # 61-025 #
60-006 60-027 60-048 # 61-006 CS 61-026
60-007 CS 60-028 60-049 CS 61-007 CS 61-027 CS
60-008 60-029 CS 60-050 CS 61-008 CS 61-028
60-009 CS 60-030 60-051 CS 61-009 CS 61-029 CS
60-010 CS 60-031 CS 60-052 CS 61-010 CS 61-030
60-011 CS 60-032 CS 60-053 61-011 CS 61-031 CS
60-012 # 60-033 CS 60-054 61-012 # 61-032 CS
60-013 CS 60-034 CS 60-055 61-013 CS 61-033
60-014 CS 60-035 CS 60-056 61-014 # 61-034 #
60-015 CS 60-036 60-057 CS 61-015 # 61-035 #
60-016 CS 60-037 CS 60-058 CS 61-016 CS 61-036
60-017 CS 60-038 CS 60-059 CS 61-017 CS 61-037
60-018 CS 60-039 60-060 CS 61-018 # 61-038 CS
60-019 CS 60-040 60-061 CS 61-019 CS 61-039 CS
60-020 CS 60-041 CS 60-062 CS 61-020 CS 61-040
60-021 # 60-042

Change 4 v
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Personnel Coding

Where necessary to distinguish (P) Pilot (IP) Instructor Pilot


crewmembers, the following (CP) Copilot (IN) Instructor Navigator
code letters will be used (N) Navigator (DI) Defense Instructor
(G) Gunner (GC) Ground Crew
(RN) Radar Navigator (10th) Tenth Crewmember
(EW) EW Officer

The amplified checklist describes in detail the steps to be completed. Each major
part of multi-crewmember checklists has been assigned to a crewmember to be read
by that crewmember, and to be accomplished by others in the crew. When necessary
to show which crewmember will accomplish certain steps, the normal crew coding is
used and the code letters will appear after the response to each step. Where a dash
(-) is used in crew coding, such as P-CP, P-CP-RN, or any combination of crewmem-
bers, each crewmember will accomplish the step. Where a slash (/) is used, such as
P/CP, either crewmember will accomplish the step. A verbal response will be given
by the crewmember(s) performing the action. There are exceptions to the verbal re-
sponse as some of the checklists are to be accomplished silently. When a single crew-
member is responsible for a checklist and accomplishment of all items, no crew cod-
ing will appear. All duties and responsibilities of the aerial gunner are deleted. Any
crew member occupying the gunner’s ejection seat will continue to be referred to as
“Gunner”.

vi
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Retrofit Coding

The following code symbols along with the word ‘‘Less’’ are used to distinguish information
related to aircraft that have the described retrofit change incorporated from that which is
applicable to aircraft not yet retrofitted. This list contains only TCTO’s currently active.
Those known to be completed are not included.
CODING EXAMPLE: DR T.O. 1B-52H-792, Installation of IU/TACAN Replacement on
B-52H aircraft. Information applicable to aircraft until they are modified in accordance with
T.O. 1B-52H-792 will be coded Less DR . Information applicable to aircraft modified in accor-
dance with T.O. 1B-52H-792 will be coded DR .

SYMBOL T.O. NO. TITLE

⎧1B-52H-753 Installation of Global Positioning System (GPS) on B-52H Aircraft (ECP 0109).
CS ⎨
⎩1B-52H-756 Installation of Integrated Conventional Stores Management System (ICSMS) on
B-52H Aircraft (ECP 0109).
CH
DJ 1B-52H-749 Installation of AN/ARC-210(V) V/UHF Radio on B-52H Aircraft.
CH
DS None Replacement of ALR-20 Indicator (IP-1168) with ALR-20 Indicator (IP-1168B) on
B-52H Aircraft.

CH
DT 1B-52H-798 Installation of Electronic Countermeasures Improvement on all B-52H Aircraft.

CH
DZ 1B-52H-796 Removal of CM-442 Signal Processor, Part Number 327370-6 and Replacement
with CM-479 Signal Processor, Part Number 9284225-2 on all B-52H Aircraft.
[AMI] 1B-52H-830 Replacement of Ballistics Computer Set AN/AYQ-10 and Inertial Navigation System
AN/ASN-136 on B-52H Aircraft. Baseline for [AMI] includes DJ .

Change 13 vii
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

The B-52H Stratofortress

viii
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Defensive Systems
Operation and Procedures section I

table of contents page

THE AIRCRAFT 1-3

RECEIVER SYSTEMS 1-13

AN/ALR-20A SEARCH RECEIVER 1-13

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER 1-27

SENSOR INTEGRATION SYSTEM 1-43

BLANKING SYSTEM 1-55

TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS 1-57

AN/ALT-16A 1-57

AN/ALT-28(V) JAMMING TRANSMITTER 1-57

AN/ALT-32A JAMMING TRANSMITTER 1-57

RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS 1-63

AN/ALQ-172 COUNTERMEASURES SET 1-63

AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEM 1-75

AN/ALQ-153(V) TAIL WARNING SYSTEM 1-83

AN/ALQ-155(V) POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 1-92

EXPENDABLE COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEMS 1-103

AN/ALE-24 DISPENSER SET 1-103

AN/ALE-20 FLARE EJECTOR SET 1-113

Change 7 1-1/(1-2 blank)


BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

THE AIRCRAFT
DESCRIPTION tors. Hydraulic pressure is supplied by six engine-
driven hydraulic pumps and two electric motor-
The Boeing B-52 ‘‘Stratofortress’’ aircraft is of the driven hydraulic pumps. Primary pitch and yaw
land based heavy bombardment class designed for control is maintained by hydraulically actuated
long range flight at high speed and altitude. The rudder and elevators. Lateral control is maintained
tactical mission is the destruction of surface objec- by operation of hydraulically actuated spoilers. By
tives by bombs and missiles. The aircraft has provi- varying the method of control, these same spoilers
sions for ten crewmembers: a basic crew of five, serve as airbrakes. The entire horizontal stabilizer
three instructors and two additional crewmembers. is moved by a hydraulic mechanism to provide pitch
The basic crew consists of pilot, copilot, radar navi- trim. A steering and crosswind crab system pro-
gator, navigator and electronic warfare officer. The vides steering of the forward main landing gear and
instructor crew includes an instructor pilot, instruc- also properly positions both forward and rear main
tor navigator and instructor electronic warfare offi- landing gear for crosswind landings. A hydraulical-
cer. Finally, the gunner and tenth man positions are ly driven revolver-type launcher installation in the
also available for additional seating. A highly vari- aft bomb bay provides umbilical and ejector rack
able weapons load may be carried on external py- connections for the weapons which may be
lons in combination with internal cluster, multiple launched/released automatically or manually by the
carriage clip-in or CSRL mounted weapons loads. navigators. The weapon/missile equipment inter-
faces with the AN/ASQ-176 offensive avionics sys-
NOTE tem, AN/APN-224 radar altimeter, and the aircraft
AGM-86C/D missiles will not be carried in electrical, bleed air, and body hydraulic systems.
mixed loads with AGM-86B or AGM-129. Weapon selective jettison capability is available to
the navigator and radar navigator. Either the
The CSRL can carry up to eight AGM-86B/86C/D, Weapons Control Panel (WCP) or backup MFD dis-
B-61, or B-83 weapons internally. These weapon play and the keyboard may be used for computer
loads cannot be mixed on the CSRL. controlled safe jettison of individual or multiple
weapons. The pilot is provided with an ejector un-
The aircraft can suspend a variety of gravity weap- lock consent switch and a prearm consent switch
ons internally on either clip-in (two MHU-20 racks, (cooperative with the WCP on the navigators’ front
up to eight weapons total) or cluster rack assem- panel), a launcher hydraulic system selector switch,
blies (three cluster rack assemblies, up to 27 weap- and a bomb bay and missile jettison control which
ons total). Externally, the B-52 can suspend weap- will jettison all weapons from the aircraft. The pilot
ons using an AGM-28 pylon under each wing with is also provided with pylon jettison switches and
standard rack adapter beams attached to each py- pylon jettison consent switches. The Radar Naviga-
lon and two sets of multiple ejector racks (MER) tor is provided with a bomb bay and missile jettison
giving a total external carriage capability of 24 switch, which will jettison only conventional gravity
weapons. The heavy stores adapter beam (HSAB) weapons. This switch is inoperative for all CSRL
can be attached to a stub pylon and up to nine gravity weapons and all nuclear and conventional
MAU-12 bomb racks can be attached to each HSAB missiles.
for a total external carriage capability on the HSAB
of up to 18 weapons. For additional information with missiles installed
refer to T.O. 1B-52H-30-1 for AGM-129 missiles;
SPECIAL FEATURES T.O. 1B-52H-30-4 for AGM-86B missiles; and T.O.
1B-52H-34-2-9 for AGM-86C/D missiles.
The aircraft is characterized by swept wings and
empennage, four underslung nacelles housing eight An electro-optical viewing system (EVS) is installed
turbofan engines, a quadricycle main landing gear, to provide pilots and navigators with a visual pre-
and a tip gear near each outboard engine nacelle. sentation of the area ahead of the aircraft during
Engine bleed air provides the air supply for air con- both day and night missions.
ditioning and anti-icing. Cartridge starters are in-
stalled to provide for engine starts without assis- A GPS Navigation System which provides position
tance from an auxiliary air cart or auxiliary electri- updates and emulated TACAN data to the crew and
cal power cart. Primary electrical power is 205-volt a moving map display to the pilots has been added.
ac and is provided by four engine-driven genera-

Change 14 1-3
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

An Air Force Satellite Communications System AN/ALE-20 Flare Ejector Set


(AFSATCOM) terminal is installed and is a half-du-
plex UHF terminal providing communications in The following B-52H aircraft systems which may be
both line-of-sight (LOS) and satellite modes. A dual applicable to the EW Officer are contained in T.O.
modem capability DL has been added to the 1B-52H-1.
AFSATCOM. The Airborne Miniature Receive Ter-
minal (MRT) AN/ARR-85(V) is installed to provide
• DOORS AND WINDOWS
reliable VLF/LF reception and printout of secure • OXYGEN SYSTEM
and nonsecure messages at extended ranges in nu- • EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
clear and/or jamming environments. • ESCAPE SYSTEMS
DIMENSIONS
• ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS
• LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Wing Span 185 feet • PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS (Air Conditioning and
Fuselage Length 159 feet 4 inches Pressurization)
Height
To top of fin 40 feet 8 inches
• INSTRUMENTS
Fin folded 21 feet 6 inches • NAVIGATION RADIOS
Tread • COMMUNICATION AND ASSOCIATED
Centerline outboard ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
main tires 11 feet 4 inches • MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.
Centerline tip gear
to tip gear 148 feet 5 inches For classified information on B-52H defensive sys-
tems refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1.
For aircraft turning radius and minimum ground
clearance, refer to Section II of T.O. 1B-52H-1. GROUND COOLING
DEFENSIVE SYSTEMS The critical cooling requirements of the ECM equip-
ment demand some precautions during ground
The following B-52H defensive systems are covered operation. Ground cooling must be supplied to the
in this manual: applicable ram air inlet or aircraft compartment
• RECEIVER SYSTEMS when extended ground operation of ECM equip-
ment is conducted. For ECM equipment time and
AN/ALR-20A Search Receiver temperature limitations without ground cooling
Radar Warning Receiver (RWR) equipment, see Section II, ECM EQUIPMENT
Sensor Integration System OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
• BLANKING SYSTEM
• TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT PROTECTION
SYSTEM DATA FLOW DIAGRAMS
AND
AN/ALT-16A
AN/ALT-28(V) Jamming Transmitter The description section of each piece of defensive
AN/ALT-32A Jamming Transmitter equipment contains basic system power require-
• RECEIVER TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS ments and the location of inflight accessible circuit
breakers. Defensive systems circuit breakers and
AN/ALQ-172 Countermeasures Set their locations are listed in Section III of this manu-
AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A Countermeasures al. For more detailed information on power require-
System ments and system data flow diagrams, refer to
AN/ALQ-153(V) Tail Warning System T.O.’s 1B-52H-1-13-1, 1B52G-2-20 and -20-1. For
AN/ALQ-155(V) Power Management System locations of all circuit breakers accessible in flight
• EXPENDABLE COUNTERMEASURES
and additional circuit protection information, refer
to the applicable subsection in Section I of T.O.
SYSTEMS 1B-52H-1.
AN/ALE-24 Dispenser Set

1-4 Change 11
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT AND OPERATIONAL CHECKS antennas. Those transmitter antennas completely


enclosed in shrouds and/or with no distinctive
ECM equipment preflight, operational checks, shape have not been pictured. Due to loading stabil-
safety checks, and the dispensing of expendables ity and enclosed locations, individual receiver
will be in accordance with the EW officer’s check- antennas have not been included.
lists contained in Section II and procedures out-
lined in other governing directives. ANTENNA PATTERNS

AIRCREW EMERGENCY PROCEDURES The antenna patterns contained in T.O.


1B-52H-1-13-1 are antenna gain patterns illus-
Section III of T.O. 1B-52H-1 contains the aircrew trated in terms of isotropic gain (maximum sensi-
emergency procedures for all crewmembers. tivity of the antenna in all directions). The antenna
patterns are typical and their limitations must be
recognized if they are to be used effectively. The iso-
ABNORMAL OPERATION AND
tropic gain of unity for each antenna is established
MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS by determining the maximum omnidirectional sen-
sitivity of the antenna. The complete three dimen-
For abnormal operation and malfunction analysis of sional pattern coverage determines this value for
B-52H defensive systems see Section III. For clas- each pattern. The basis for this measurement
sified information on B-52H defensive systems refer therefore is relative only to one antenna. Compari-
to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1. son of one antenna pattern with another to estab-
lish relative merit is not possible since the isotropic
EW OFFICER’S STATION value for each antenna will differ. It should be
emphasized that these patterns indicate only the
Figure 1-1 illustrates the layout of a typical EW of- degree of efficiency of a particular antenna installa-
ficers station. tion in different elevations and azimuths. The dis-
tance values on the patterns are merely distanced
ECM ANTENNAS to the ground for a particular elevation angle when
flying at 50,000 feet altitude and do not necessarily
The antennas illustrated in figure 1-2 reflect stan- indicate the receiving capability of a particular set.
dard loading for B-52H aircraft. Actual aircraft con- While antenna gain has a direct bearing on receiv-
figuration may vary with antenna availability, for ing capabilities of the aircraft, other parameters
ECM systems configuration, and special mission such as threat radar transmitted power, sensitivity
requirements. For more detailed information of of receiver aboard the aircraft, losses involved in
ECM jamming antennas and antenna radiation transmission lines, frequency, etc, must be known
patterns, refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1. to obtain actual receiving capabilities. For example,
a threat radar with a very strong signal might be
TRANSMITTER ANTENNA TYPES effectively received by an antenna with one-half iso-
tropic gain at the threat distance and direction
Figure 1-3 antenna drawings are provided to famil- while a threat radar with a very weak signal might
iarize the EW officer with the physical shape and not be detected by an antenna with twice isotropic
orientation of the externally mounted transmitter gain at the threat distance and direction.

1-5
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

EW Officer’s Station (Typical)


DT

Figure 1-1 (Sheet 1 of 4)

1-6 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

1 LIGHT CONTROL PANEL 28 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER


2 SPOTLIGHT (SYSTEMS 1 & 2)
3 ALT-32L CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 20) 29 MAIN REFUEL VALVE EMERGENCY CONTROL
4 ALE-24 SELECTOR CONTROL PANEL LEVER
5 ALE-20 FLARE PROGRAMMING CONTROL 30 SPECIAL WEAPONS MANUAL LOCK HANDLE
PANEL STOWAGE BRACKET
6 ALT-16A CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 21) 31 SPECIAL WEAPONS MANUAL LOCK HANDLE
7 ESCAPE HATCH 32 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
8 OXYGEN REGULATOR (SYSTEMS 3 & 5)
9 ALQ-122 CONTROL MONITOR 33 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
10 ALR-20A CONTROL PANEL (SYSTEMS 4 & 8)
11 SIDE PANEL FLOOD LIGHTS 34 INTERPHONE FOOT SWITCH
12 DT ALQ-172 AUXILIARY PANEL 35 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
13 DT ALQ-172 CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU) (SYSTEMS 6 & 13)
14 UPPER AISLE AND ENTRY LIGHT 36 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
15 UPPER AIR OUTLET (SYSTEMS 7 & 14)
16 ALR-20A INDICATOR 37 ALT-16A CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 9)
17 ECM CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 38 INTERPHONE CONTROL PANELS (2)
18 ALQ-172 LOW PRESSURE WARNING AND 39 ALE-24 PROGRAMMER CONTROL PANEL
BLANKING PANEL 40 AERP BLOWER ELECTRICAL CONNECTER
19 RWR CONTROL INDICATOR 41 AERP BLOWER MOUNTING BRACKET
20 EMERGENCY ALARM LIGHT 42 ASHTRAY
21 ALQ-153 CONTROL INDICATOR PANEL 43 ALT-32H CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 11)
22 SI MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY 44 ALT-32H CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 12)
23 TEMPERATURE CONTROL PANEL 45 MAIN CONSOLE LIGHT CONTROL PANEL
24 SI CONTROL PANEL 46 OXYGEN BOTTLE RECHARGER
25 MASTER EXPENDABLES CONTROL PANEL 47 PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE
26 ALR-20A LOOK THRU PANEL 48 GROUND EMERGENCY EGRESS HANDLE
27 ALT-28 ANTENNA SELECTOR PANEL 49 ESCAPE ROPE CONTAINER

Figure 1-1 (Sheet 2 of 4)

Change 9 1-6A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

EW Officer’s Station (Typical) (Cont)


Less DT

Figure 1-1 (Sheet 3 of 4)

1-6B Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

1 LIGHT CONTROL PANEL 28 ALT-28 ANTENNA SELECTOR PANEL


2 SPOTLIGHT 29 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
3 ALQ-122 CONTROL MONITOR (SYSTEMS 1 & 2)
4 OXYGEN REGULATOR 30 MAIN REFUEL VALVE EMERGENCY CONTROL
5 ALT-32H CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 12) LEVER
6 ALT-32L CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 20) 31 SPECIAL WEAPONS MANUAL LOCK HANDLE
7 ALE-20 FLARE PROGRAMMING CONTROL STOWAGE BRACKET
PANEL 32 SPECIAL WEAPONS MANUAL LOCK HANDLE
8 ESCAPE HATCH 33 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
9 RWR CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEMS 3 & 5)
10 ALR-20A CONTROL PANEL 34 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
11 SIDE PANEL FLOOD LIGHTS (SYSTEMS 4 & 8)
12 ALE-24 PROGRAMMER CONTROL PANEL 35 INTERPHONE FOOT SWITCH
13 ALE-24 SELECTOR CONTROL PANEL 36 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
14 UPPER AISLE AND ENTRY LIGHT (SYSTEMS 6 & 13)
15 UPPER AIR OUTLET 37 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
16 ALR-20A INDICATOR (SYSTEMS 7 & 14)
17 ECM CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 38 INTERPHONE CONTROL PANELS
18 ALQ-172 LOW PRESSURE WARNING AND 39 ALT-32H CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 11)
BLANKING PANEL 40 AERP BLOWER ELECTRICAL CONNECTER
19 ALQ-172 CONTROL INDICATOR 41 AERP BLOWER MOUNTING BRACKET
20 EMERGENCY ALARM LIGHT 42 ASHTRAY
21 ALQ-172 CONTROL MONITOR 43 ALT-16A CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 9)
22 ALQ-153 CONTROL INDICATOR PANEL 44 ALT-16A CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 21)
23 SI MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY 45 MAIN CONSOLE LIGHT CONTROL PANEL
24 TEMPERATURE CONTROL PANEL 46 OXYGEN BOTTLE RECHARGER
25 SI CONTROL PANEL 47 PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE
26 MASTER EXPENDABLES CONTROL PANEL 48 GROUND EMERGENCY EGRESS HANDLE
27 ALR-20A LOOK THRU PANEL 49 ESCAPE ROPE CONTAINER

Figure 1-1 (Sheet 4 of 4)

Change 9 1-7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ECM Antenna Locations

1A TRANSMIT ANTENNA (ALQ-172, SYSTEM 16) 11 G/H-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 6
1 PHASED ARRAY (ALQ-172 TRANSMIT/ 12 G/H-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 4
RECEIVER, SYSTEM 16) (ONE EACH SIDE) 13 G/H-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 2
2 SCIMITAR OR DIPOLE (ALR-20A, TN-390A, 14 HORN (ALQ-172 OMNI RECEIVE SYSTEM 16)
AND TN-391A) (ALT-28 MONITOR) 15 H/I-BAND (ALQ-155, SYSTEM 2)
3 A/B BAND SCIMITAR (ALR-20A, TN-386A) 16 H/I-BAND (ALQ-155, SYSTEM 1)
4 LEFT WINGTIP (ALT-32A, SYSTEM 20) 17 RWR ANTENNA
5 RIGHT WINGTIP (ALR-20A, TN-386A) 18 HELIX (ALR-20A, TN-388A)
6 G/H-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 1 19 SPIRAL (ALR-20A, TN-387A)
7 G/H-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 3 20 HELIX (ALR-20A, TN-389A)
8 E/F-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 5 21 HORN (ALR-20A, TN-390A)
9 D/E-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 7 22 I/J-BAND HORN (ALR-20A, TN-391A FWD)
10 E/F-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 8 23 C-BAND DIPOLE ARRAY (ALT-16A, AS-3087A)

Figure 1-2 (Sheet 1 of 2)


1-8 Change 10
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

24 C-BAND WINGED BLADE 30 D/E-BAND CONICAL HORN/SLOT


(ALQ-122/ALT-16A, SYSTEM 9) (ALQ-155, SYSTEM 14)
25 ALQ-153 (AS-3193) ANTENNA (LEFT SIDE VIEW, 31 A/B-BAND BLADE (ALT-32A, SYSTEM 12)
RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE) 32 I/J-BAND HORN (ALR-20A, TN-391A AFT)
26 HORN (ALQ-172 OMNI RECEIVE SYSTEM 15) (ONE EACH SIDE FUSELAGE)
27 RWR ANTENNA (ONE EACH SIDE) 33 PHASED ARRAY (ALQ-172 TRANSMIT/
28 A/B-BAND BLADE (ALT-32A, SYSTEM 11) RECEIVER, SYSTEM 15)
29 E/F-BAND CONICAL HORN/SLOT
(ALQ-155, SYSTEM 13)

Figure 1-2 (Sheet 2 of 2)

Change 10 1-9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Transmitter Antenna Types

Figure 1-3 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-10
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-3 (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-11/(1-12 blank)
BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RECEIVER SYSTEMS
AN/ALR-20A SEARCH RECEIVER 1-13
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1-13
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 1-15
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 1-23
RADAR WARNING RECEIVER 1-27
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1-27
OPERATIONAL MODES 1-28
GUNNER STATION 1-31
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 1-31
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 1-36
NORMAL OPERATION 1-42K
SENSOR INTEGRATION SYSTEM 1-43
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1-43
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 1-43
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 1-46
NORMAL OPERATION 1-53

AN/ALR-20A SEARCH RECEIVER This mode allows the operator to singularly tune a
selected tuner through the use of the MAN FREQ
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION CONTROL. In order to facilitate frequency identifi-
cation, an intensified spot is placed on the selected
The AN/ALR-20A receiving set provides the capa- trace at a position corresponding to the tuner fre-
bility of simultaneously surveying, detecting, and quency. Special provisions for audio examination of
displaying all radio frequency transmissions in the the received signals are also provided when
frequency band covered. Onboard OAS Radar Set SWEEP WIDTH control is in AUDIO. The audio
transmitter is blanked to prevent display of the output feeds into the interphone system enabling
transmitted signals. The receiving set is tied in the operator to further evaluate the received signal
with the ALT-32A and ALT-16A jamming transmit- and aid in the determination of approximate pulse
ters to enable the EW officer to look through the repetition frequency.
jamming signal. Audio examination of the received
signals is accomplished through tie-in with the in- The C-4782/ALR-20 control enables the operator to
terphone system. Self-test features provide compre- look through his own jammer signals to survey
hensive checks of the receiving set on the ground or other signals in the band. This look through is
during flight. AN/ALR-20A component locations are accomplished with a minimum of jammer signal
shown in figure 1-4. The AN/ALR-20A controls and interruption. In look through operation, the jam-
indicators are contained in figure 1-10. mers remain on continuously for 50% of the sweep
time. During the 50% look through period, the jam-
System Function mers are chopped on and off. The 50% look through
period shifts from left to right such that in not less
Seven radio frequency tuners are provided to cover than 10 sweep periods, it is possible to look at sig-
the system frequency spectrum. System operation nals across the full band.
is controlled from the C-9449/ALR-20A receiving
set control and the IP-1168/ALR-20A indicator Less POWER DISTRIBUTION
DS , or IP-1168B/ALR-20A indicator DS .
The master power supply, PP-3406A/ALR-20A, pro-
Two modes of operation are provided to operate the vides the main low voltage regulated power for the
tuners and the display of the ALR-20A receiving system. Input aircraft electrical power supplied to
system. The primary mode is the automatic mode the power supply is 115-vac, three-phase, 400-Hz
(SWEEP WIDTH control in MAX). In this mode, all power and 28-vdc power. Special high voltage power
tuners are tuned by a linear rising sawtooth. The supplies are provided for each tuner and for the
system responds to both cw and modulated signals. cathode ray tube in the indicator. System power
Special circuits are used to intensify the received and operation are controlled from the IP-1168/
signals for ease of identification on the indicator. ALR-20A indicator Less DS , or IP-1168B/ALR-20A
The secondary mode of operation is the manual indicator DS and the C-9449/ALR-20A receiver
mode (SWEEP WIDTH control less than MAX). control.

Change 7 1-13
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RECEIVING AND DISPLAY respectively through the use of gun 2. In order to


use a single gun to display two traces, the time
The receiving and display circuits are comprised of share chopper function generator generates a bot-
those circuits which receive, process, and display tom-chop and then a top-chop signal in a repeating
detected RF energy within the frequency range of sequence. When the bottom-chop signal is received
the RF tuners. Two modes of operation are used to video from the TN-387A/ALR-20A tuner is dis-
control the tuners and the display of the ALR-20A played on trace 2. When the top-chop signal is
system. The primary mode of operation is the auto- received, video from the TN-388A/ALR-20A tuner is
matic mode (SWEEP WIDTH control in MAX). In displayed on trace 3. Thus, gun 2, on a time-sharing
this mode, all tuners are tuned throughout their basis, is used to generate two traces. Indicator guns
frequency range by a linear rising sawtooth signal 3 and 4 are likewise used to display video from the
(tuning signal). The secondary mode of operation is other four tuners. Indicator guns 5 and 6 are used
the manual mode (SWEEP WIDTH control less in the expand mode only.
than MAX). This mode allows the operator to
manually tune a selected tuner by selecting the DS
sweep length with the SWEEP WIDTH control and The display of video on the IP-1168B/ALR-20A indi-
positioning the selected sweep length with the cator received from the seven system tuners is
MAN FREQ CONTROL. In order to facilitate fre- accomplished through the use of an anolog to digi-
quency identification, an intensified spot (audio tal conversion and displayed on the monochrome
dot) is displayed on the selected trace at a position cathode ray tube.
corresponding approximately to the tuner fre-
quency when the SWEEP WIDTH control is in Special provisions are made for audio examination
AUDIO. of the received signal while operating in the
manual mode. With the SWEEP WIDTH control in
DS AUDIO, an intensified spot will be displayed on the
An arrow is displayed below the audio dot. The fre- indicator for the corresponding trace. The horizon-
quency corresponding to the location of audio dot is tal position of the intensified spot is controlled by
displayed below the left side of the trace. the MAN FREQ CONTROL. Any received signal at
the frequency indicated by the position of the inten-
The low frequency tuner TN-386A/ALR-20A is func- sified spot will produce an audio output. The audio
tionally different from the other tuners. The input output is routed to the aircraft interphone system.
circuitry to this tuner is such that RF energy from The operator can evaluate the received signal and
two antennas is applied to six tuner modules which determine the approximate pulse repetition fre-
make up the tuner bandwidth. quency or general type of other modulation.

Each of the TN-387A/ALR-20A thru TN-391A/ EXPAND MODE


ALR-20A RF tuners is identical in function. Each
The expand mode allows the operator to simulta-
unit is tuned across its frequency range by means
neously select received video from any two RF tun-
of a magnetically tunable filter.
ers for expansion display on the indicator.
The C-9449/ALR-20A receiver control contains all
Less DS
circuitry necessary to generate the top-chop and
Two separate guns within the indicator are used for
bottom-chop signals, the main sweep (tuning sig-
the expansion display; gun 5 for expansion trace B
nal), main sweep retrace blanking and wobble, and
and gun 6 for expansion trace A. Guns 5 and 6 are
indicator intensity signals. In addition, circuitry for
also used to display the markers used with expan-
processing video, video test signals expanded video
sion A and B traces.
and audio is contained within the control unit.
DS
Less DS
Two separate traces are used for the expansion dis-
The display of video on the IP-1168/ ALR-20A indi-
play.
cator received from the seven system tuners is
accomplished through the use of a special six-gun
The portion of the trace that is expanded is deter-
cathode ray tube. Trace 1 displays video received
mined by the settings of the SWEEP WIDTH con-
from the TN-386A/ALR-20A tuner through the use
trol and the MAN FREQ CONTROL.
of gun 1. Traces 2 and 3 display video received from
TN-387A/ALR-20A and TN-388A/ ALR-20A tuners

1-14 Change 2
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

JAMMER BLANKING COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

The C-4782/ALR-20 jammer control (figure 1-6) Receiver-Control (C-9449/ALR-20A)


enables the operator to look through selected on-
board jammer signals to survey other signals in the The receiver-control (figure 1-5) is located in the
band. This look through is accomplished with mini- left side of the EW officer front panel. The control
mum interruption of the jammer signals. In the panel contains seven sets of three controls, one set
look through mode, the jammers remain on for 90% for each of seven tuners. The three controls consist
of the normal receiver sweep time and the tuners of a SWEEP WIDTH control, a MAN FREQ CON-
are blanked out. During the 10% look through time, TROL, and an RF LEVEL control. The SWEEP
the jammers and tuners are chopped on and off at WIDTH control controls the sweep width of the as-
alternate intervals such that each is on for 100 mi- sociated trace as displayed on the IP-1168/
croseconds and off for 100 microseconds. The 10% ALR-20A indicator Less DS , or IP-1168B/ALR-20A
look through period shifts from left to right such indicator DS and supplied to the tuner when ro-
that in not less than 10 sweep periods, it is possible tated from MAX to AUDIO. When the SWEEP
to look at signals across the full band. WIDTH control is in AUDIO, the sweep width will
be approximately zero and an intensified dot will be
The four pushbuttons on the front of the jammer displayed on the indicator. The MAN FREQ CON-
control are spring loaded to the off position. When TROL is used to position the sweep for a particular
look through of a particular jamming signal is de- trace, with SWEEP WIDTH control not in AUDIO;
sired, the corresponding switch on the front of the or position the intensified dot for a particular trace,
jammer control must be held depressed. with the SWEEP WIDTH control in AUDIO. Any
processed video at the frequency indicated by the
RF TEST MODE intensified dot will be routed to audio amplifier cir-
cuits for analysis by the EW officer through the
The RF test mode provides a coarse check on the interphone system. The RF LEVEL control is used
overall operation of the system. The RF TEST to adjust the gain of a traveling wave tube amplifi-
switch is located on the front of the ALR-20A indi- er and thus, in turn, the display of received video
cator. Depressing this switch results in an RF test on the indicator.
enable signal being routed through the
PP-3406A/ALR-20A power supply to oscillators Look Through Panel (C-4782/ALR-20)
within each of the RF tuners.
The look through panel (figure 1-6) initiates the
VIDEO TEST MODE “look through” function for the ALR-20A. This func-
tion permits the EW officer to look through his own
Video test permits a complete test of the video cir- jamming transmitter signals. In look through mode
cuits exclusive of the tuner inputs. The video test of operation, the jamming effectiveness of the se-
circuits are activated by depressing the VIDEO lected aircraft transmitters is reduced by only 10%
TEST switch located under the adjustment cover at of the transmitter duty cycle. This minimizes the
the top of the indicator Less DS , or the top of the effect of look through on jammer effectiveness and
front panel DS . permits the EW officer to observe and track a
threat signal frequency shift. Controls on the look
through panel consist of four buttons: one for high
frequency ALT-32A, one for low frequency ALT-32A,
one for the ALT-16A and one for all ALT-32A and
ALT-16A transmitters. When any button is
depressed, the output is routed to the look through
logic circuit board of the receiver control which
operates in conjunction with the look through gen-
erator and driver circuits to perform the look
through function.

Change 2 1-15
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Indicator (IP-1168) And Controls Less DS oscillators located in each tuner. The signals
injected into the tuners by the oscillators are pro-
The IP-1168 indicator (figure 1-10) is located in the cessed and displayed on the indicator. If all test sig-
lower center of the EW officer front panel. In addi- nals are present and relatively equal in amplitude,
tion to displaying received signal information, the the system can be assumed to be operating nor-
panel contains eight primary controls: SCALE mally. The POWER switch has three positions:
ILLUM, RF TEST, VOLUME, POWER, EXPAN- OFF, STBY, and ON. OFF position prohibits power
SION A, EXPANSION B, LEFT MARK, and from being applied to any ALR-20A circuits. STBY
RIGHT MARK. The SCALE ILLUM control is used position permits the application of power to fila-
for obtaining desired graticule illumination. The RF ments, heaters, and all system devices requiring
TEST switch activates test oscillators located in warmup prior to operation. The LEFT MARK con-
each tuner. The signals injected into the tuners by trol and the RIGHT MARK control positions the
the oscillators are processed and displayed on the reference markers for expand traces A and B. The
indicator. If all test signals are present and rela- two expansion switches, EXPANSION A and
tively equal in amplitude, the system can be EXPANSION B, have an OFF position and seven
assumed to be operating normally. The VOLUME numerical positions, one for each trace. These two
control sets the desired level of the processed audio switches permit the expansion of received video
occurring as a result of received video. The POWER from any two selected traces. The VOLUME control
switch has three positions: OFF, STBY, and ON. sets the desired level of the processed audio occur-
OFF position prohibits power from being applied to ring as a result of received video. In addition, the
any ALR-20A circuits. STBY position permits the indicator BIT SELECT switch in the BIT 1 position
application of power to filaments, heaters, and all generates a static test screen that provides both in-
system devices requiring warmup prior to opera- dicator internal status information and permits an
tion. The two expansion switches, EXPANSION A assessment of indicator video performance. BIT
and EXPANSION B, have an OFF position and Selections BIT 2, BIT 3, and ALIGN are mainte-
seven numerical positions, one for each trace. These nance functions. For a BIT failure, a BIT FAIL mes-
two switches permit the expansion of received video sage is displayed in reverse video below the right
from any two selected traces. The LEFT MARK end of Expansion Trace A for both normal and BIT
control and the RIGHT MARK control positions the 2 displays.
reference markers for expand traces A and B.
Power Supply (PP-3406A/ALR-20A)
NOTE
The power supply (figure 1-7) is located in the up-
Some trace 6 strobing and marker jittering per left electrical equipment rack below the crew
should be considered normal operation and bunk. The power supply provides the necessary
the degree of strobing requiring mainte- supply voltages required by the ALR-20A system,
nance will be determined by the electronic serves as a junction box for all components of the
warfare officer in coordination with the system, and contains timing and protection circuits.
maintenance technician. The power supply receives prime input power from
the aircraft electrical system consisting of 115-volt
ALR-20A Indicator (IP-1168B) And Controls DS three-phase ac and TR power. Input and output
voltages are protected by fuses located on the front
The IP-1168B indicator (figure 1-10A) is located in panel. A voltmeter and selector switch are also
the lower center of the EW officer front panel. In located on the front panel for manual monitoring of
addition to displaying received signal information, the operating condition of the power supply. When
the panel contains eleven primary controls: MAS- the ALR-20A system is initially placed ON or in
TER ILLUMINATION, EDGE ILLUMINATION, STBY, a time delay of approximately 1 minute is
SCALE ILLUMINATION, EMITTER PERSIS, RF actuated which delays application of voltages to all
TEST, POWER, RIGHT MARK, EXPANSION A, circuits except system heater circuits, and DS in
EXPANSION B, LEFT MARK, and VOLUME. The addition STBY applies 115 vac to fully power the in-
three ILLUMINATION controls are used to obtain dicator. The delay will occur automatically even if
the desired display illumination. EMITTER PER- the power selector is placed in ON position initially.
SIS is used to vary the length of time a signal is The 1-minute time delay is fully reset in the event
displayed after the actual intercepted signal has power selector is placed to OFF position and then
disappeared. The RF TEST switch activates test back to STBY or ON.

1-16 Change 2
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RF Tuner (TN-386A/ALR-20A) OAS radar. This eliminates the possibility of con-


fusing the aircraft OAS signal with external sig-
The TN-386A/ALR-20A RF tuner (figure 1-8) is lo-
nals.
cated in the EW officer compartment. This unit
tunes across its frequency range through the use of Antennas
tuner modules. Each of the tuner modules is
switched on electrically at preset intervals of time Antennas used with the ALR-20A receiving set con-
and tuned by the voltage-controlled capacitance sist of a scimitar antenna in the forward wheel well
tuning elements. In addition to the tuner modules, area, a wingtip antenna on the right wing; two
the unit contains a video amplifier, ramp pick-off RX-1 antennas located in external blisters on the
circuit, frequency control circuits, and a test oscilla- left and right sides of section 49; and two RL-1 an-
tor. The test oscillator provides test signals at fre- tennas, two RS-1 antennas, and a 10-30257 anten-
quencies. na located in the nose radome. A 4125A monitoring
scimitar or dipole antenna is installed on the un-
RF Tuners (TN-387A/ALR-20A through TN-391A/ derside of the fuselage just forward of the crew en-
ALR-20A) trance hatch.
The tuners (figure 1-8) are located as shown in fig- Monitoring Antenna
ure 1-4. Each unit tunes across its frequency range
by means of electronically tunable solid-state fil- The monitoring antenna allows monitoring of the
ters. Each unit contains a RF amplifier and asso- systems operating in the frequency range of the
ciated power supply, video detector, log video ampli- TN-390A and TN-391A tuners. The monitoring
fier, and a test signal generator for self-test. antenna can be momentarily disconnected, when
look through of jamming signals is desired, by
Blanking Amplifier pressing the ALT-28 MONITOR (OMNI)
ALR-20A OAS blanking is provided through the pushbutton on the ALT-28 antenna selector panel.
blanking amplifier (figure 1-9) which prevents the (See ALT-28 ANTENNA SELECTOR PANEL, in
triggering of the ALR-20A receiver circuits by the this section.)

Change 2 1-16A/(1-16B blank)


BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Component Locations

Figure 1-4 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-17
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Component Locations (Cont)


ALR 20A
INDICATOR (A6666)
C 9449/ALR 20A
RECEIVER CONTROL (A6665)

C 4782/ALR 20
JAMMER
CONTROL
(A6695)

EW OFFICER’S STATION

TN 386A/ALR 20A
RF TUNER (A6668)

TO WING TIP
ANTENNA VR 1

ANTENNA AS3102/A
(E6254)
LEFT LOAD CENTRAL ADAPTER UG27D/U

SECTION 41
BLANKING MODULE

PP 3406A/ALR 20A
POWER SUPPLY (A6667)

TN390A/ALR 20A
RF TUNER (A6672)

BLANKING AMPLIFIER (A6585)

TN 389A/ALR 20A RF TUNER (A6671)

TN 388A/ALR 20A RF TUNER (A6670)


TN 387A/ALR 20A RF TUNER (A6669)

UPPER LEFT EQUIPMENT RACK A67339

Figure 1-4 (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-18 Change 2
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

C-9449/ALR-20A Receiver-Control

1 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL 12 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-387A/ALR-20A RF


(TN-391A/ALR-20A RF TUNER, AFT) TUNER)
2 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-391A/ALR-20A RF 13 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL
TUNER, AFT) (TN-386A/ALR-20A RF TUNER)
3 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL 14 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-386A/ALR-20A RF
(TN-391A/ALR-20A RF TUNER, FWD) TUNER)
4 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-391A/ALR-20A RF 15 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-386A/ALR-20A RF
TUNER, FWD) TUNER)
5 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL 16 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-387A/ALR-20A RF
(TN-390A/ALR-20A RF TUNER) TUNER)
6 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-390A/ALR-20A RF 17 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-388A/ALR-20A RF
TUNER) TUNER)
7 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL 18 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-389A/ALR-20A RF
(TN-389A/ALR-20A RF TUNER) TUNER)
8 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-389A/ALR-20A RF 19 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-390A/ALR-20A RF
TUNER) TUNER)
9 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL 20 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-391A/ALR-20A RF
(TN-388A/ALR-20A RF TUNER) TUNER, FWD)
10 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-388A/ALR-20A RF 21 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-391A/ALR-20A RF
TUNER) TUNER, AFT)
11 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL
(TN-387A/ALR-20A RF TUNER)
Figure 1-5

1-19
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Look-Thru Panel

1 ALT-32A LOW BAND LOOK THRU BUTTON


2 ALT-32A HIGH BAND LOOK THRU BUTTON
3 ALT-16A LOOK THRU BUTTON
4 “ALL” LOOK THRU BUTTON
Figure 1-6

1-20
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PP-3406A/ALR-20A Power Supply

1 POWER SUPPLY PROTECTION FUSES 5 ELAPSED TIME INDICATOR


2 VOLTAGE MONITOR METER 6 INPUT POWER CONNECTOR
3 EXTERNAL METER CONNECTORS 7 SPARE FUSES
4 VOLTAGE MONITOR METER SELECTOR SWITCH
Figure 1-7

RF Tuners

RF TUNER TN-386A/ALR-20A RF TUNER TN-( )A/ALR-20A


Figure 1-8

1-21
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Blanking Amplifier

1 AN/ALQ-172(V) NO. 15, NO. 16


2 BLANKING OUTPUT TO RWR SIGNAL PROCESSOR
3 BLANKING OUTPUT TO AN/ALR-20A RECEIVER
4 OAS BLANKING INPUT
5 POWER-ON INDICATOR LIGHT
6 POWER RECEPTACLE
7 OPERATING FUSE
8 SPARE FUSE
Figure 1-9

1-22 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Controls and Indicators Less DS

IP-1168 CONTROL-INDICATOR
1 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROLS (7) 11 INOPERATIVE
2 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROLS (7) 12 CRT SCREEN
3 RF LEVEL CONTROLS (7) 13 POWER SELECTOR
4 SCALE ILLUMINATION CONTROL 14 RIGHT MARKER CONTROL
5 INTENSITY AND FOCUS ADJUSTMENTS 15 EXPANSION TRACE SELECTOR (B TRACE)
6 HP, V, AST, AND WIDTH ADJUSTMENTS 16 EXPANSION TRACE SELECTOR (A TRACE)
7 VIDEO TEST BUTTON 17 LEFT MARKER CONTROL
8 RF TEST BUTTON 18 VOLUME CONTROL
9 ELAPSED TIME INDICATOR 19 LEFT MARKS
10 RIGHT MARKS
Figure 1-10 (Sheet 1 of 3)

Change 2 1-23
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Controls and Indicators Less DS (Cont)


CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

C-9449/ALR-20A CONTROL

1 SWEEP WIDTH Controls (7 places) Seven sweep width controls, one for each trace, control the width of
sweep of the tuners. The controls are adjustable from 0 to 100%. Only the
selected position of the band is available for viewing and the rest of the
trace is lost. When the control is in MAX position (full CW), the full tuning
range (100%) of the tuner is displayed. When the control is in AUDIO det-
ent (full CCW), a dot will appear at the frequency selected by the manual
frequency control and audio of that frequency is available.

2 Manual Frequency Controls (7 places) Seven manual frequency controls, one for each trace, control the position
of the tuning range on the main trace when the sweep width control is out
of AUDIO detent. When the sweep width control is in the AUDIO detent,
the manual frequency control controls the position of the dot (frequency)
on the main trace.

3 RF LEVEL Controls (7 places) Seven RF level controls, one for each trace, provide a means of adjusting
the signal strength of the associated bands.

IP-1168/ALR-20A INDICATOR

4 Scale Illumination Control Provides a means of adjusting the illumination of the frequency scale.

5 Intensity and Focus Adjustments Provides means of adjusting trace intensity and focus.

6 HP, V AST, and Width Adjustments Provides means of adjusting trace position, astigmatism, and width.

Adjustments of the intensity, focus, HP, V, AST, and width con-


trols should be accomplished only by ground maintenance per-
sonnel or during SIOP/contingency operations. The use of
extreme care and an insulated screwdriver is recommended
due to the fragile potentiometers and possible contact with high
voltages.

7 VIDEO TEST Button Provides a means of testing the video circuitry exclusive of the tuners.
When depressed, a signal of 3/16 inch minimum in amplitude should
appear at the left edge of each trace (with the RF level control in MAX
position).

8 RF TEST Button For RF test frequencies, refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1)

9 Elapsed Time Indicator Indicates the total elapsed time that the IP-1168/ALR-20A indicator has
been in operation.

10 Right Marks Right reference marks for expand trace A and B.

11 Inoperative

Figure 1-10 (Sheet 2 of 3)

1-24 Change 2
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

IP-1168/ALR-20A INDICATOR (Cont)

12 CRT Screen Provides a panoramic display of intercepted radar signals present within
the frequency range of the ALR-20A system. The CRT screen has seven
main traces representing seven individual bands of frequencies plus two
expansion traces used for closer analysis of any signal appearing on any
of the seven main traces. Intercepted signals are shown as vertical spikes
extending from the baseline of each trace. Signals appearing on the lower
six main traces and the expansion traces appear above the baseline
while signals on main trace No. 7 appear below the baseline. Traces 6
and 7 cover the same frequency range and will display signals received
on the forward and aft tuners, respectively. The height of the spike is an
indication of signal strength and the position of the spike along the base-
line is a measure of the center frequency of the intercepted radar signal.

13 Power Selector STBY position applies power to filaments, heaters, and all system
devices requiring warmup prior to operation. ON position applies all sys-
tem voltages for full operation. OFF position removes all power from the
ALR-20A circuits.

14 Right Marker Control Controls the position of the right marker on both expansion traces.

15 Expansion Trace Selector (B Trace) Provides a means for selecting a main trace for expansion on B trace.
When moved from OFF position to a numbered position, that portion
selected by the sweep width control will be displayed on the appropriate
expansion trace.

16 Expansion Trace Selector (A Trace) Provides a means for selecting a main trace for expansion on A trace.
When moved from OFF position to a numbered position, that portion
selected by the sweep width control will be displayed on the appropriate
expansion trace.

17 Left Marker Control Controls the position of the left marker on both expansion traces.

18 VOLUME Control Provides a means of adjusting the volume of audio received in the
intercom system. Operative only when sweep width control is full CCW
(in detent).

19 Left Marks Left reference marks for expand trace A and B.

Figure 1-10 (Sheet 3 of 3)

Change 2 1-25
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Controls and Indicators DS

IP-1168B CONTROL-INDICATOR
1 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROLS (7) 10 RF TEST BUTTON
2 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROLS (7) 11 CRT SCREEN
3 RF LEVEL CONTROLS (7) 12 POWER SELECTOR
4 MASTER ILLUMINATION CONTROL 13 RIGHT MARK CONTROL
5 EDGE ILLUMINATION CONTROL 14 EXPANSION TRACE SELECTOR (B TRACE)
6 SCALE ILLUMINATION CONTROL 15 EXPANSION TRACE SELECTOR (A TRACE)
7 EMITTER PERSISTENCE SELECTOR 16 LEFT MARK CONTROL
8 BIT SELECT SWITCH 17 VOLUME CONTROL
9 VIDEO TEST BUTTON
Figure 1-10A (Sheet 1 of 4)

1-26 Change 2
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

NO. CONTROL-INDICATOR FUNCTION

C-9449/ALR-20A CONTROL

1 SWEEP WIDTH Controls (7 places) Seven sweep width controls, one for each trace, control the width of
sweep of the tuners. The controls are adjustable from 0 to 100%. Only the
selected position of the band is available for viewing and the rest of the
trace is lost. When the control is in MAX position (full CW), the full tuning
range (100%) of the tuner is displayed. When the control is in AUDIO det-
ent (full CCW), a dot will appear at the frequency selected by the manual
frequency control and audio of that frequency is available. An arrow is dis-
played below the audio dot. The frequency corresponding to the location
of audio dot is displayed below the left side of the trace.

2 Manual Frequency Controls (7 places) Seven manual frequency controls, one for each trace, control the position
of the tuning range on the main trace when the sweep width control is out
of AUDIO detent. When the sweep width control is in the AUDIO detent,
the manual frequency control controls the position of the dot (frequency)
on the main trace.

3 RF LEVEL Controls (7 places) Seven RF level controls, one for each trace, provide a means of adjusting
the signal strength of the associated bands.

IP-1168B/ALR-20A INDICATOR

4 MASTER ILLUMINATION Control Provides a means of adjusting the overall brightness of the CRT screen.
All displayed images including trace video, frequencies, and graticule are
equally affected.

5 EDGE ILLUMINATION Control Provides means of adjusting the writing surface edge lighting brightness.
Only user markings are affected.

6 SCALE ILLUMINATION Control A sixteen position (0-15) digital selector controls relative brightness of
displayed frequencies and graticule.

NOTE
Rapid movement of the Scale Illumination control may delay
the re-drawing of the displayed frequencies and the graticule.

7 EMITTER PERSIS Selector A sixteen position selector selects one of 5 persistence values. As a mini-
mum, 5 rates are provided: P0 thru P4.
P0 - No electronic persistence. The emitter trace is visible only as long
as it is being received.
P1 - Persistence approximately equal to the IP1168 ALR-20A Indicator
P2 - Increased persistence over P1
P3 - Increased persistence over P2
P4 - Infinite persistence causes the displayed signals to remain displayed
until power is removed or persistence is changed.

NOTE
Operating the system with a P4 level of persistence may de-
grade the operators ability to detect new signals.

Figure 1-10A (Sheet 2 of 4)

Change 2 1-26A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Controls and Indicators DS (Cont)


NO. CONTROL-INDICATOR FUNCTION

IP-1168B/ALR-20A INDICATOR (Cont)

8 BIT SELECT Switch The BIT SELECT Switch selects display operating mode

NOTE

• To prevent the inadvertent selection of a BIT mode (BIT 2,


BIT 3, or ALIGN) there is a five second delay between opera-
tor positioning of the switch and engagement of the selected
mode.

• The BIT 3 routine requires 5 minutes to complete. Once BIT


3 has completed, it requires approximately 70 seconds to exit
BIT 3 and return to normal operation after the BIT SELECT
SWITCH is placed to OFF.

OFF – Normal operation

BIT 1 – Static test screen with status (such as temperature, fan rotation,
firmware) displayed. See fig 1-10B.

BIT 2 – Normal screen layout but uses internally generated video/sweep


signals. See fig. 1-10C.

BIT 3 – Dynamic test of all memory and display circuits. This screen is
intended for factory testing only.

NOTE
If BIT 3 is entered and terminated early before the BIT auto-
matically completes, indicator alignment may be lost . In addi-
tion frequency data may be lost which cannot be reloaded in
flight.

ALIGN – Alignment mode allows maintenance personnel to adjust trace


height, width, and position. The parameters adjustable at this position
are: Video Offset, Video Gain, Sweep Offset, and Sweep Gain.

1. Move BIT SELECT control to ALIGN.


2. All traces will appear on screen with parameter selection text below
each line. Video Test function is automatically enabled. The currently
selected parameter will be displayed in reverse video. See figure
1-10D.
3. To select the parameter of interest, rotate the SCALE control until the
desired parameter is shown in reverse video. The SCALE control
rotation is continuous, moving from line to line in sequence through
the displayed traces.
4. Once the desired trace and parameter are selected, the EMITTER
PERSIS control is rotated to affect the desired change. The Operator
observes trace height, width, and position while making the
adjustment.

Figure 1-10A (Sheet 3 of 4)

1-26B Change 2
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

NO. CONTROL-INDICATOR FUNCTION

IP-1168B/ALR-20A INDICATOR (Cont)

9 VIDEO TEST Button Provides a means of testing the video circuitry exclusive of the tuners.
When depressed, a signal of 3/16 inch minimum in amplitude should
appear at the left edge of each trace.

10 RF TEST Button Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for RF test frequencies.

11 CRT Screen Provides a panoramic display of intercepted radar signals present within
the frequency range of the ALR-20A system. The CRT screen has seven
main traces representing seven individual bands of frequencies plus two
expansion traces used for closer analysis of any signal appearing on any
of the seven main traces. Intercepted signals are shown as vertical spikes
extending from the baseline of each trace. Signals appearing on the lower
six main traces and the expansion traces appear above the baseline
while signals on main trace No. 7 appear below the baseline. Traces 6
and 7 cover the same frequency range and will display signals received
from the forward and aft tunners respectively. The height of the spike is
an indication of signal strength and the position of the spike along the
baseline is a measure of the center frequency of the intercepted radar sig-
nal.The audio dot, arrow, and frequency (represented by XXXX) are
shown below the fourth main trace. The frequency is based on the calibra-
tion of the display.

12 Power Selector STBY position applies power to filaments, heaters, CRT display, and all
system devices requiring warmup prior to operation. The OFF to STBY
action takes approximately 50 seconds. ON position applies all system
voltages for full operation. STBY to ON action (full up display) takes 10
seconds. OFF to ON (full up display) takes approximately 60 seconds.
OFF position removes all power from the ALR-20A circuits.

13 Right Mark Control Controls the position of the right marker on both expansion traces.

14 Expansion Trace Selector (B Trace) Provides a means for selecting a main trace for expansion on B trace.
When moved from OFF position to a numbered position, that portion
selected by the sweep width control will be displayed on the appropriate
expansion trace.

15 Expansion Trace Selector (A Trace) Provides a means for selecting a main trace for expansion on A trace.
When moved from OFF position to a numbered position, that portion
selected by the sweep width control will be displayed on the appropriate
expansion trace.

16 Left Mark Control Controls the position of the left marker on both expansion traces.

17 VOLUME Control Provides a means of adjusting the volume of audio received in the
interphone system. Operative only when sweep width control is full CCW
(in detent).

Figure 1-10A (Sheet 4 of 4)

Change 2 1-26C
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

IP-1168B BIT 1 SCREEN DS Geometry

This screen (figure 1-10B) is displayed when the The box that runs the perimeter of the screen is
unit is placed in the BIT 1 mode, by rotation of the drawn at the limits of the display. It is normal for
BIT SELECT knob located on the unit’s top front the box to disappear in the corners. The five circles
panel. It presents unit internal status and part and squares located in the corners and center are
number/revision information, provides feedback on useful in determining the display’s geometry. The
Persistence and Scale Illumination knob operation, circles should be nearly round, not egg shaped. The
and provides images which aid in determining unit squares should be nearly square and not rectangle.
video performance (including size, geometry, band- A complete character list is displayed at the
width, focus, and intensity range). screen’s bottom center. The characters should be
clear and readable.

IP1168B BIT 1 Screen DS

6 6
Temp Temp
Top FAN SPEED Bottom
°F RPM °F
SCALE PERSISTENCE

7
0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

8
A67544

Figure 1-10B (Sheet 1 of 3)

1-26D Change 2
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

IP1168B BIT 1 Screen DS (Cont)


NO. CONTROL-INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Unit and Firmware Information These boxes provide part number and other information about the dis-
play. None of this information changes or is affected by BIT.

2 Intensity Gradients (2 places) These two areas display all 16 levels of intensity, from full black to full
bright. They can be used to verify display range by direct observation of
the gradients.

3 Display Bandwidth (2 places) These two locations provide a means to determine the display’s band-
width. The top two boxes contain lines spaced at 128 lines per inch (LPI),
while the bottom two boxes are at 64 lines per inch. The individual lines
in all boxes should be distinguishable.
NOTE
The upper left box (128 vertical) is the most difficult to distin-
guish. To distinguish individual lines it is necessary to use mag-
nification (such as an eye loupe) and to adjust the Master Illumi-
nation control for optimal view-ability.
4 Scale Readout This display is intended for testing the IP-1168B front panel SCALE Illumi-
nation Control. The numbers in this box increment or decrement, depend-
ing on the rotation direction of the front panel control knobs. The specific
values range from 0 to 15, and they rollover. With each click of the knob
the displayed value will either increment or decrement by one and change
the scale illumination respectively. If knob is rotated quickly, some dis-
played values may be missed. Scale illumination will change when the
control is moved.

5 Fan Speed The number in this box is the measured speed of the display’s internal fan
or blower. At room temperature/sea level the fan speed should be 3400
to 3800 RPM. At air temperatures below about 50° F, an internal thermal
switch turns off the fan, producing a fan speed readout of 0000 RPM. If
the temperature is above 77° F (25° C) and fan speed is below 2000 RPM,
a failure condition exists and the BIT FAIL message will be displayed in
reverse video on the normal or BIT 2 display.

NOTE

The Fan Speed BIT failure condition requires maintenance ac-


tion as soon as possible. No fire hazard exists. However, contin-
ued usage of the system without repair will reduce the reliability
of a number of components in the system. Therefore, only con-
tinue to run the system in a tactically urgent situation. The sys-
tem may shut itself down at any time without warning following
this failure.

Figure 1-10B (Sheet 2 of 3)

Change 5 1-26E
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

IP1168B BIT 1 Screen DS (Cont)


NO. CONTROL-INDICATOR FUNCTION

6 Temperature (Top and Bottom) These are temperature reading on the Trace Generator CCA, one located
at the top of the CCA and the other at the bottom of the CCA. After warm-
up, the temperatures read about 20° F higher than the ambient inlet air
temperature. If the average of the two temperature readings is 176° F (80°
C) or higher, a potential failure condition exists and the BIT FAIL message
will be displayed in reverse video on the normal or BIT 2 display.

NOTE

The Temperature BIT failure condition requires maintenance


action as soon as possible. No fire hazard exists. However, con-
tinued usage of the system without repair will reduce the reliabil-
ity of a number of components in the system. Therefore, only
continue to run the system in a tactically urgent situation. The
system may shut itself down at any time without warning follow-
ing this failure.

7 Persistence Readout This display is intended for testing the IP-1168B front panel EMITTER
PERSIS selector. The numbers in this box increment or decrement, de-
pending on the rotation direction of the front panel control knobs. The spe-
cific values are meaningless, but range from 0 to 15, and they rollover.
With each click of the knob the displayed value will either increment or
decrement by one. If knob is rotated quickly, some displayed values may
be missed. The persistence of the display will not change.

8 Intensity Boxes (5 places) The five intensity boxes, located in the four corners and in the center of
the screen, are intended for use during test and debug. The intensity of
the boxes is initially set to maximum and is controlled by the SCALE Illu-
mination control. The scale readout value equates to the intensity level,
where 15 is maximum brightness and 00 is minimum brightness.

Figure 1-10B (Sheet 3 of 3)

1-26F Change 5
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

IP1168B BIT 2 SCREEN DS Pass/Fail determination is left up to the operator or


technician through observation of the BIT 2 screen
BIT 2 is intended to test as much of the hardware and through operation of Master, Edge, Scale Illu-
as practical. All video generated during BIT 2 is in- mination, and Persistence controls. If the pattern
ternal to the display. It does not test the receiver shown below is displayed and is constantly up-
system controls: Audio Volume, Right/Left Markers, dated, then BIT 2 is considered a PASS.
A/B Expansion Select, Video Test, and RF Test.

IP1168B BIT 2 Screen DS

Figure 1-10C

Change 5 1-26G
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

IP1168B Align Screen DS

Figure 1-10D

1-26H Change 5
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER Scan Routines

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The RWR provides both TWS and conical scan anal-
yses.
The Radar Warning Receiver (RWR) is an improved
version over earlier RWR systems having an en- Antisymbol Splitting Routines
larged memory and the capability to detect addi-
tional types and more sophisticated threats. An up- The RWR incorporates special routines to avoid
graded CM-479 processor, employing reprogram- symbol splitting. Symbol splitting is an effect which
mable Electrically Erasable Read Only Memory is due to aircraft rolls and banks. During these
(EEROM) is installed. The EEROM processor can maneuvers the same emitter is seen at new relative
be reprogrammed in the aircraft by a portable angles by the antennas. Were it not for the anti-
MK-2278/APM-379 conversion kit, signal processor, symbol splitting routines, these changes in relative
ASM-695 Program Loader Verifier (PLV)Memory angles would cause multiple symbols for the same
Loader Verifier (MLV). The receiver alerts the EW emitter to appear as the aircraft maneuvers. The
officer, and in some instances the gunner, when RWR antisymbol splitting routines minimize such
particular threat radar signals are received. The degradation. After an emitter has once been identi-
system is designed to protect the aircraft with mini- fied, the allowable angle variations during each
mum inflight manipulation of the controls. That is, successive intercept are widened. This allows the
most modes of operation are selected before takeoff system to track an emitter through most aircraft
or before target ingress. AN/ALQ-172(V)2 PR trans- maneuvers.
mitters blank the warning receiver to prevent dis-
play of associated transmitted signals. Audio ex- Audio
amination of received signals is accomplished
through tie-in with the interphone system. Self-test The audio heard is a function of the environment
features provide comprehensive checks of the warn- and operator selection.
ing receiver on the ground or during flight. Compo-
nent locations are shown in figure 1-11. RWR con- NORMAL AUDIO
trols and indicators are shown in figure 1-13.
In normal operation, audio from all emitters which
Symbology are strong enough to be processed by the RWR will
be heard. Search radars (those of long pulse widths)
The symbology for the threat files in the RWR is will only be heard when SEARCH is selected on the
shown in figure 1-13. These files are stored in the indicator control. The amplitude of each PRF will
processor’s EEROM and can be reprogrammed in be proportional to the power received from the
the aircraft by a portable MK-2278/APM-379 con- threat. The AUDIO control on the indicator control
version kit, signal processor, MLV. The three files can be used to adjust the level of audio from maxi-
can be briefly described as follows: mum to completely off.
1. Normal File - Contains land and water based
surface-to-air missile, AAA systems, and all air- DIAMOND AUDIO
borne interceptors.
2. Terrain File - Contains land based surface-to- Any time the operator wishes to hear audio from
air missile systems, all airborne interceptors, and any one of the displayed emitters, he can do so by
land based AAA radars. pressing the HANDOFF button on the indicator-
control. He will then hear only the audio from the
3. Sea File - Contains water based surface-to-air symbol which has the diamond - diamond audio.
missile systems, water based AAA, and all airborne Audio amplitude will be constant regardless of
interceptors.
range to the threat. The AUDIO control on the indi-
cator-control can be used to adjust diamond audio
from maximum to completely off.

Change 7 1-27
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Diamond Routines Modes

Two routines are used in the RWR system. Following initiation of system power and time-in,
the MODE button indicates the system is in OPEN
FLOATING DIAMOND mode. In this mode, up to 16 threats may be pro-
cessed and displayed using appropriate alphanu-
In this mode, a diamond symbol is always on the meric symbols. Azimuth angles are displayed rela-
highest priority emitter displayed at that moment. tive to aircraft heading. Distance from the aircraft
It floats with the highest display priority in a pre- to the threat is displayed as a function of symbol
programmed order as the environment changes. In displacement from the center of the screen. This
this mode, normal audio will be heard. distance is normalized in terms of the threats lethal
range. Threats beyond the outer ring of the azi-
LATCHED DIAMOND muth indicator are beyond lethal range of the
weapon associated with that threat. Symbols which
In this mode, a diamond symbol is latched on the appear inside the outer ring are within lethal
displayed emitter selected by the operator. When range. The threat from which audio can/will be
latched, the diamond will stay on that emitter heard is emphasized by having a diamond placed
regardless of the state of the environment, until around it. The ALQ-155 Mode is controlled by the
that emitter is off the display, or the operator Sensor Integration indicatorr control. The ALQ-155
mode is selected by pressing and releasing the
selects another emitter, or emitter file. In this
MODE pushbutton. There may be a momentary
mode, diamond audio will be heard.
delay before the system enters the ALQ-155 mode.
Do not press the button again during this delay.
OPERATIONAL MODES
This mode is indicated by illumination of the leg-
Power On
end.

Handoff
The system is energized by pressing and releasing
the POWER button on the indicator-control.
In normal operation, the diamond is floating. It fol-
POWER ON light should come on. A time-in period
lows a list of preprogrammed display priorities as
of 9 seconds is allowed for azimuth indicator fila-
the environment changes. When the HANDOFF
ment warmup. During this time the indicator-con- pushbutton is depressed, any collocated targets are
trol lights may flash randomly. After time-in, the separated and the diamond rotates through all dis-
system will be in open mode, normal file, floating played threats in a preprogrammed order and con-
diamond, and normal audio. SEARCH will be off tinues to do so as long as the pushbutton is held in.
and ALTITUDE will be in the position it held when If the pushbutton is released, the diamond stays
the warning receiver was last used. latched to the threat symbol it currently encloses
regardless of other environment activity. When the
Auto-Restart diamond is latched, audio is diamond audio and the
diamond legend on the HANDOFF button comes on
If at any time after turn-on the system suffers a (the HANDOFF legend is illuminated whenever
momentary power loss or surge, the system will power is applied). As the diamond cycles through
momentarily turn itself off. When this occurs, the the displayed threat priorities, the operator will
system will auto-restart within 15 seconds. Auto-re- hear the audio of each emitter as the diamond
start is followed by a 9 second time-in period. Fol- encloses it. The diamond is returned to floating
lowing auto-restart and time-in, the system will be mode by (1) momentarily pressing the HANDOFF
in OPEN mode, normal file, floating diamond, and button, (2) loss of the threat on which it was
normal audio. The SEARCH button will be out latched, or (3) a change from one threat file to
(even if it were energized before the power shut- another. If the HANDOFF button is pressed and
down) while ALTITUDE will be in the position it held, the diamond will continue cycling through the
held before the power loss. displayed emitters.

1-28 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Target Separate be displayed by the symbol S. All other existing


threats will remain displayed. It should be noted
BEFORE DZ Momentarily separates symbols that search radars can only be heard when the
which are collocated on the azimuth indicator (but search button is depressed.
not necessarily collocated on the ground) so that the
operator may clearly identify them. The symbols NOTE
are displaced along a 45° line whose direction is
determined by the location of the display on the azi- The S emitters have very low priority. Thus,
muth indicator. The highest display priority threat it is possible, particularly in the PRIORITY
will always be at the bottom of the diagonal. Target mode, that no S symbols will appear even
separate is obtained by depressing the T button, though they exist in the environment, are
which will illuminate the ON legend (the lower illuminating the aircraft, and are heard in
TGT SEP legend will go out). The symbols will normal audio.
remain separated for approximately 3 seconds after
release of the button. During the diamond HAND- AFTER DZ System is primarily a terminal threat
OFF mode, no apparent movement of the diamond RWR and activation of the SEARCH further identi-
may be observed. In this case, T may be depressed fies less lethal threats. When depressed, this elec-
to determine if several collocated identical threats trically latching switch allows C to J Band Search
are being displayed. type Radars to be displayed with an S symbol on
the azimuth indicator. All other symbols on the azi-
AFTER DZ Target Separate toggles separation of muth indicator are retained. The S legend is illumi-
displayed symbols collocated on the azimuth indica- nated when the Search function is selected or dur-
tor(but not necessarily collocated on the ground) to ing the lamp check phase of system test. Certain
more clearly identify them. The symbols move ra- known Search Radars have narrow PW and will
dially along the azimuth of threats. If the symbols display even if this mode is not selected. Selection
reach the indicator edge, they will wrap around the of the Search mode does not significantly impact
outer edge of the display in a clockwise direction. system response time, but could increase the num-
Target separate is obtained by depressing the T ber of symbols displayed on the azimuth indicator.
button, which will illuminate the ON legend. The In a dense threat environment, the extra symbols
lower TGT SEP legend will go out. may clutter the display. This button, when de-
pressed during system test, activates the Extended
Unknown BIT.

Unknown assumes that the system has identified a Altitude Priority


radar whose characteristics are not stored in the
processors threat files or which has not transmitted By use of the ALTITUDE pushbutton the operator
enough parameters to make unambiguous identifi- can change the display priority as the mission
cation possible. The processor will identify this changes. That is, at low altitudes some AAA threats
radar as an unknown emitter. This will cause the U and low altitude missiles can be given display prior-
legend on the UNKNOWN button to flash at a 16 ity, while at high altitudes, display priorities can be
Hz rate. (The UNKNOWN legend is always illumi- assigned to SAMs. This display priority change is
nated). By pushing and releasing the UNKNOWN accomplished by pressing the ALTITUDE button.
button, a band coded symbol will be displayed at HI ALT or LO ALT legend will be illuminated,
the proper position on the azimuth indicator and whichever was selected last.
the U legend will be on steadily.
Excess Noise Strobes
Search
As a maintenance assist, excess noise bars have
BEFORE DZ The RWR is primarily a terminal been added to the scope display at 9, 12, and 3
threat warning system. Terminal threats can be o’clock. During system test, a fourth bar may
characterized by narrow pulsewidths; nonterminal appear at 6 o’clock. It has no meaning in the pres-
threats have long pulsewidths. Long pulsewidth ent RWR configuration. Clockwise from 9 o’clock,
threats can be added to the processing and display the presence of the bars indicates normal amplifier-
cycle by pressing and releasing the SEARCH but- detector noise in the low-mid-high-bands. The bars
ton on the indicator-control. (The S legend will will be either off or on. Excess noise in any band
come on; the SEARCH legend is etched on the but- will extinguish that band bar. When a threshold
ton). The system will remain in search until the bar is missing, but SYS TEST for that band is good,
button is again pressed or power is removed. the detection range for that band has been reduced,
Acquisition, GCI, and heightfinder radars will now but the system is still usable with caution.

Change 7 1-29
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Cycle Timer BEFORE DZ Bands 1, 2, and 3 system tests are


initiated by pressing the SYS TEST pushbutton for
At the left-hand end of the 3 o’clock noise bar will at least 2 seconds. The SYS TEST legend is always
appear a short vertical bar that alternately points illuminated. The ON legend comes on if the
up and down. Each movement of the bar represents memory self-tests are successful. Total time of the
the time used to input and process data from all test is 15 seconds. Upon initiation of SYS TEST,
three frequency bands. The rate at which the cycle every light on the indicator-control may come on
timer moves will vary with pulse density of the briefly. Those which do not come on should be
threat environment and the amount of time needed pressed. If they come on when pressed, the lamp
by the computer to process the pulse data. test is successfully completed. During system test,
the antennas are not disabled from the processor so
System Test that any other radars in the environment which are
illuminating the aircraft will be received and pro-
BEFORE DZ The frequency coverage provided by cessed. Any PRF received within the system test
the RWR is divided into three bands for the purpose limits will be displayed by the appropriate band
of improving signal to noise ratio. The three bands symbol and not by their real identifying symbology.
are called 1, 2, and 3. During SYSTEM TEST bands Thus, band symbols not associated with a processor
1, 2, and 3 symbols are displayed in each quadrant dot may be displayed. Except when it is known that
indicating that the respective azimuth channel is no other radars are in the area, these extra band
operational. There will also be a dot in each quad- symbols can be ignored.
rant and at the center of the azimuth indicator.
Presence of the quadrant dots indicates that the AFTER DZ The self-test of the RWR) system con-
deflection circuitry in the signal processor is prop- sists of two levels of reports, self test (short summa-
erly aligned when the dots appear on the outer ring ry) and extended self test (detail required for main-
of the azimuth indicator. If the four dots are shifted tenance). Self test provides quick status of the sys-
from the outer ring, the lethality envelope has been tem and check of the operator indicators through
shifted by that same amount. If one of the dots is two Azimuth indicator screen displays that com-
missing, that portion of the azimuth display is inop- plete in five seconds. Self test may be initiated and
erable. The center dot serves to locate the center of repeated as often as necessary to verify proper op-
the azimuth indicator in darkened environments. A eration. Acceptable self-test results are indicated
fifth dot appears at the bottom of the azimuth indi- by OK symbols. NOGO will be highlighted by
cator during system test. Its only function is to flashing BAD symbols. Indicators will change after
inform the operator that the system is an RWR. two seconds to screen one indicating SYS SWV
The sensitivity of the complete system (except the number, LAMPS ON and AUDIO ON then se-
antennas and triplexers) is properly aligned when quence automatically to screen two. Screen two pro-
the quadrant dots are near the centers of the sym- vides detailed software versions for OFP and EID
bols. If a dot appears outside of the diamond by and a comprehensive summary of system status.
more than 1/8 inch, the system requires alignment. An acceptable self-test will report all OK results.
The diamond will cycle clockwise to each symbol INIT reports the hardware logic initialization re-
and a different diamond audio will be heard. A sults. Failure will be indicated by a flashing BAD
number is printed at the top of the display indicat- on Azimuth Indicator. MEMORY reports the ram
ing the software version being used. If the numeral and non-volatile memory checksum results. During
is flashing, it indicates the computer checksum self-test, memory locations are numerically
and/or memory tests failed. Illumination of the ON checked. Failure to pass check sum will be indi-
legend on the SYS TEST button indicates that the cated by a flashing BAD on Azimuth Indicator. DF
checksum and memory tests were successful. reports Band 1,2,3 video and Amplifier Detector
status. Failure will be indicated by a flashing BAD
on Azimuth Indicator. Antennas and associated
cabling are not included in self test and must be
tested by maintenance personnel using appropriate
test equipment.

1-30 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Terrain File heard from all four quadrants during the entire
system test cycle. During band 3 portion of cycle, AI
For missions which are flown against only land- symbols will be displayed at each of the four dots.
based threats, terrain file is used. This file is The entire system, except the antennas and ampli-
obtained by pressing and releasing SYS TEST fol- fier-detectors triplexers, is properly aligned when
lowed by pressing and releasing T within one sec- the AI symbol is within 1/8 inch of the quadrant
ond. No legends will come on. A symbol will appear dot. The RWR dot will be displayed.
at the bottom of the azimuth indicator to denote 2. Excess Noise Strobes - Strobes will be inverted,
this mode of operation. When in terrain file, only 15 as are displays at this station, so that the low-band
emitter symbols can be displayed since the symbol bar is at 3 o’clock, mid-band at 6 o’clock and
is always present. The system can be returned to high-band at 9 o’clock.
normal file by momentarily pressing SYS TEST fol-
lowed by pressing the T button within 1 second. 3. Threat Symbols - The only threat symbols
which will be displayed are the airborne intercep-
Sea File tors. The and symbols will be displayed
when in those modes.
To keep the number of ambiguities on the threat 4. Audio - Only band 3 audio will be present at
display to a minimum, the sea file was added for this station.
use over water. This file is obtained by pressing and
releasing SYS TEST followed by within 1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
second. Return to normal file is obtained by repeat-
ing this procedure. No legends will come on. A ship The RWR system consists of four spiral antennas
symbol will appear at the bottom of the azimuth in- for high-band coverage, an AM-6639 amplifier-de-
dicator to denote this mode. In this mode, only 15 tector for each antenna which separates the RF sig-
emitters can be displayed since the ship symbol is nals into three bands (for signal-to-noise improve-
always present. ment), a CM-479 signal processor (employing repro-
grammable EEROM) which handles all threat anal-
GUNNER STATION ysis, an azimuth indicator for alphanumeric display
of the threat environment, and C-11528/RWR indi-
The following indications are provided at the gun- cator-control unit which controls and displays the
ner station. The RWR will update these indications modes of the system. Threats are displayed on the
as follows: RWR Azimuth Indicator. Sensor Integration (SI)
display displays RWR threat and system status in-
1. System Test - The four quadrant dots will be formation.
displayed and band 3 audio will simultaneously be

Change 7 1-31
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Component Locations

Figure 1-11 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-32 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-11 (Sheet 2 of 2)

Change 9 1-33
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CM-479 Signal Processor DZ

1 PROVIDES SIGNAL DATA INTERFACE TO CONTROL-INDICATOR


2 PROVIDES POWER AND SIGNAL DATA INTERFACE TO AMPLIIER DETECTORS
3 ELAPSED TIME INDICATOR
4 NOT USED
5 SPARE FUSE
6 PROVIDES PRIMARY POWER AND SIGNAL DATA INTERFACE TO CONTROL-INDICATOR
7 5 AMP FUSE (PRIMARY 115 VAC CIRCUIT)

Figure 1-12 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-34 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-46(V)-4 Signal Processor Less DZ

1 SPARE FUSE
2 PROVIDES POWER AND SIGNAL DATA TO CONTROL-INDICATOR
3 PROVIDES POWER AND SIGNAL DATA TO CONTROL-INDICATOR
4 ELAPSED TIME INDICATOR
5 PROVIDES POWER AND SIGNAL DATA TO CONTROL-INDICATOR
6 5 AMP FUSE (115 VAC CIRCUIT)

Figure 1-12 (Sheet 2 of 2)

Change 7 1-35
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators

CONTROL-INDICATOR
1 INTENSITY CONTROL 9 ACTIVITY INDICATOR
2 CRT INDICATOR 10 UNKNOWN BUTTON
3 LAUNCH INDICATOR 11 TARGET SEPARATION BUTTON-INDICATOR
4 SYSTEM TEST BUTTON-INDICATOR 12 HANDOFF BUTTON-INDICATOR
5 AUDIO CONTROL 13 MODE BUTTON-INDICATOR
6 DIMMING CONTROL 14 ALTITUDE BUTTON-INDICATOR
7 PROCESSOR REPROGRAMMING INPUT 15 SEARCH BUTTON-INDICATOR
8 POWER BUTTON-INDICATOR

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 1 of 6)

1-36 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators (Cont)


CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Intensity Control Varies the intensity level of CRT.

2 CRT Indicator Displays threat symbols indicating relative bearing, relative signal
strength, and type of threat radar. The top of the EW officer’s indicator
represents 0° in azimuth relative to the aircraft heading, that is, a threat
radar directly ahead of the aircraft would present a symbol at the 12
o’clock position. However, the CRT indicator at the gunner’s station is ori-
ented so that the top of the indicator represents 180° azimuth relative to
aircraft heading. A symbol at the 12 o’clock position on the gunner’s indi-
cator represents a threat directly aft of the aircraft. Relative signal
strength of a threat radar is indicated by its distance from the center of the
indicator; that is, the weaker signals appear at the edge of the indicator
and the stronger signals, near the center. The type of threat radar is indi-
cated by a characteristic symbol.

3 LAUNCH Indicator When the SAM threat guidance commands are received, the MISSILE
and LAUNCH indicators light and a flashing circle is placed around the
appropriate threat symbol. Pressing the button will generate a burst of
launch audio over the ALR-46 Audio on the interphone.

4 System Test Button-Indicator Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1

5 AUDIO Control Varies the level of audio received in the interphone system.

6 Dimming Control Varies the brightness of the legends on control-indicator.

7 Processor Reprogramming Input Input connection for Memory Loader Verifier (MLV) to reprogram the
signal processor.

8 POWER Button-Indicator Pressing and releasing this button provides power to the system. ON
POWER legend will illuminate.

9 ACTIVITY Indicator When SAM threat guidance commands are received, the MISSILE and
ACTIVITY indicators light and a circle is placed around the appropriate
threat symbol.

10 UNKNOWN Button Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1

11 Target Separation Button-Indicator BEFORE DZ When depressed, targets that are collocated on the CRT
will separate for easier identification and the ON legend will illuminate.
The symbols will r emain separated as long as the button-indicator is held
depressed. When released the targets will remain separated for approxi-
mately 3 seconds before returning to their original positions.

AFTER DZ Target Separate toggles separation of displayed symbols


collocated on the azimuth indicator(but not necessarily collocated on the
ground) to more clearly identify them. The symbols move radially along
the azimuth of threats. If the symbols reach the indicator edge, they will
wrap around the outer edge of the display in a clockwise direction. Target
separate is obtained by depressing the T button, which will illuminate the
ON legend. The lower TGT SEP legend will go out.

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 2 of 6)

Change 7 1-37
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators (Cont)


CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

12 HANDOFF Button-Indicator A diamond is superimposed over the highest priority threat on CRT dis-
play. When the HANDOFF button is depressed, the diamond rotates
through all displayed threats in preprogrammed order of descending
priority, and continues to do so as long as button is pressed. When button
is released, diamond latches to threat symbols currently enclosed
regardless of other environments. With diamond latched, diamond audio
is heard and diamond symbol is illuminated on handoff button-indicator.
Pressing the HANDOFF button also engages Target Separate.

13 MODE Button-Indicator Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1

14 ALTITUDE Button-Indicator At high altitudes, display priority is given to AIs and high altitude SAM sys-
tem when HI ALT legend is illuminated. By pressing and releasing ALTI-
TUDE button-indicator, low altitude display priority can be given to some
AAA and low altitude SAMs. LO ALT legend is then illuminated. Pressing
ALTITUDE button again returns system to high altitude priority, the LO
ALT legend will go out and HI ALT again illuminates.

15 SEARCH Button-Indicator Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 3 of 6)

1-38 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators (Cont)


DISPLAY SYMBOLOGY SCREEN 1 DZ

INDEX NUMBER TYPED NOTATION SUGGESTED PRONUNCIATION

1 WFF Wingform F
2 19 STAFF Nineteen Staff
3 A. A Dot
4 A: A Two Dot
5 A:. A Three Dot
6 U. U Dot
7 U: U Two Dot
8 U:. U Three Dot
9 -A- A Bar
10 C STAFF C Staff
11 -2- Two Bar
12 8 STAFF Eight Staff
13 WF Wingform
14 WFI Wingform One
15 AI AI
16 BOAT Boat

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 4 of 6)

Change 7 1-39
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DISPLAY SYMBOLOGY SCREEN 2 DZ

INDEX NUMBER TYPED NOTATION SUGGESTED PRONUNCIATION

17 L L
18 R R
19 15 STAFF Fifteen Staff
20 -P- P Bar
21 1 One
22 2 Two
23 3 Three
24 4 Four
25 5 Five
26 6 Six
27 7 Seven
28 8 Eight
29 9 Nine
30 C C
31 G G
32 H H

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 5 of 6)

1-40 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators (Cont)


DISPLAY SYMBOLOGY SCREEN 3 DZ

INDEX NUMBER TYPED NOTATION SUGGESTED PRONUNCIATION

33 19 Nineteen
34 T Training
35 ML Missile Launch
36 UML Uncorrelated Missile Launch
37 THRESHOLD BARS Threshold Bars
38 10 Ten
39 0 Zero
40 11 Eleven
41 12 Twelve
42 DIAMOND Diamond
43 BROKEN DIAMOND Broken Diamond
44 S Search
45 15 Fifteen

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 6 of 6)

Change 7 1-41
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-46(V)-4 Indications Less DZ

INITIATED BY PRESSING SYS TEST BUTTON FOR ONE SECOND. DIAMOND SYMBOL WILL CYCLE CLOCKWISE TO
EACH TEST BAND SYMBOL(S). BAND 3 SYMBOL SHOWN WILL ALTERNATE WITH NUMERAL 3 AT EW POSITION. DOT
AT BOTTOM OF DISPLAY DURING TEST DENOTES ALR-46(V)4 SYSTEM. TEST DURATION IS APPROXIMATELY 15
SECONDS.

NOTE

• Not to scale.

• An electronic dot coincident with an etched dot at the CRT center is present during all
modes of operation in order to define the center of the display in a darkened environment.

Figure 1-14 (Sheet 1 of 4)

1-42 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-46(V)-4 Indications Less DZ (Cont)

Figure 1-14 (Sheet 2 of 4)

Change 7 1-42A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-46(V)-4 Indications Less DZ (Cont)

Figure 1-14 (Sheet 3 of 4)

1-42B Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-46(V)-4 Indications Less DZ (Cont)

Figure 1-14 (Sheet 4 of 4)

Change 7 1-42C
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Operational Checkout


SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ
NOTE

During auto self-test, a low frequency audio tone lasting approximately


one second will be heard. System self-test must be performed to deter-
mine if an actual fault exists in the system.

STEP RESULT
On RWR INDICATOR CONTROL UNIT (ICU)
set audio control to mid-range.

On RWR INDICATOR CONTROL UNIT (ICU) POWER and all lower legends except LAUNCH and SEARCH
illuminate steadily. Also some or all of the
remaining legends may illuminate briefly.
After 10 second warm-up, observe-noise bars only appear on
azimuth indicator.

After warm-up observe that all legends illuminate, except


LAUNCH and ACTIVITY.
On RWR ICU depress and hold SYS TEST switch Azimuth Indicator flashes first screen showing version number,
until noise bars disappear on azimuth indicator. then advances to second screen.

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 1 of 6)

1-42D Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators (Cont)


SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ (Cont)
STEP RESULT

SYS TEST (Cont) Azimuth Indicator flashes second screen indicating OFP and
EID version number.

Degraded performance will be indicated by flashing version


number or “OK” status shows “BAD”.
Azimuth Indicator returns to normal display (noise bars only).

For additional testing as determined, proceed to EXTENDED SELF-TEST

NOTE

• Extended (maintenance) self-test may be initiated and repeated as


often as necessary to verify proper operation. Operators shall be famil-
iar with self-test prior to test start.

• If failures are identified as a result of system self-test, ensure that


appropriate testing and maintenance is performed.

• There are twelve different screens in the maintenance test display se-
quence. A short press of the SEARCH switch will hold display se-
quence on the screen of interest, alternating with advance/abort screen.

• Since the system continues to receive radar signals during extended


self-test, radars in the vicinity may cause erroneous results.

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 2 of 6)

Change 7 1-42E
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Operational Checkout (Cont)


EXTENDED SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ
STEP RESULT

To begin Extended self test, Depress and release SYS RESULT 1: “BEGINNING EXTENDED BIT” screen appears on
TEST switch, then at second screen, depress and hold Azimuth Indicator
SEARCH switch until “BEGINNING EXTENDED BIT”
screen appears on Azimuth Indicator (then release).

RESULT 2: After 5 seconds, screen appears announcing


blanking of azimuth indicator while test are being performed.

RESULT 3: ML audio is heard.


RESULT 4: All THREAT WARNING panel lights except LOW
come on for 1 second then extinguish.
RESULT 5: Audio song is heard at low and varying level.

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 3 of 6)

1-42F Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Operational Checkout (Cont)


EXTENDED SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ (Cont)
STEP RESULT

NOTE

Normal maintenance test indications are “000” or “OK” Faults will be highlighted by flashing symbol at 1 Hz rate.

RESULT 6: CM-479 A4 Status screen is displayed.

RESULT 7: ADVANCE/ABORT screen appears alternately with


A4 status screen.

NOTE

A short press of the SEARCH switch will hold a screen of interest for indefinite display, alternating with
ADVANCE/ABORT screen. A second press of the SEARCH switch will continue the sequence of test results.
Depress and release SEARCH switch while RESULT 8: CM-479 CCA5 test status is displayed for 5
ADVANCE/ABORT screen is being displayed. seconds.

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 4 of 6)

Change 7 1-42G
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

EXTENDED SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ (Cont)


STEP RESULT

RESULT 9: CM-479 CCA6 test status is displayed for 5


seconds.

RESULT 10: CM-479 CCA8 test status is displayed for 5


seconds.

RESULT 11: System Memory test status is displayed for 5


seconds.

RESULT 12: DF test status is displayed for 5 seconds. (“DF”


and all numbers should be present and steady.)

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 5 of 6)

1-42H Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Operational Checkout (Cont)


EXTENDED SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ (Cont)
STEP RESULT

RESULT 13: Software status is displayed for 5 seconds.

RESULT 14: END OF EXTENDED BIT screen is displayed for


5 seconds.

RESULT 15: Azimuth indicator returns to normal display.


(Noise BArs only).

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 6 of 6)

Change 7 1-42J
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR NORMAL OPERATION tenance). Self test provides quick status of the sys-
tem and check of the operator indicators through
Turn-On Procedure two Azimuth indicator screen displays that com-
plete in five seconds. Self test may be initiated and
Turn-on of the RWR will be accomplished in accor- repeated as often as necessary to verify proper op-
dance with the basic flight manuals. eration. Acceptable self-test results are indicated
by OK symbols. NOGO will be highlighted by
Self-Test flashing BAD symbols. Indicators will change after
two seconds to screen one indicating SYS SWV
BEFORE DZ The self-test provides a check of all number, LAMPS ON and AUDIO ON then se-
system components except antennas and associated quence automatically to screen two. Screen two pro-
cabling. This check will be performed during the vides detailed software versions for OFP and EID
calibration and interference check. The EW officer and a comprehensive summary of system status.
may also accomplish the self-test to determine An acceptable self-test will report all OK results.
operational capability any time during flight when INIT reports the hardware logic initialization re-
system performance is questioned. As the antennas sults. Failure will be indicated by a flashing BAD
are not disabled during self-test, environmental on Azimuth Indicator. MEMORY reports the ram
radars are allowed to be received and processed. and non-volatile memory checksum results. During
Any radars received with PRI within self-test limits self-test, memory locations are numerically
will be displayed with appropriate test band sym- checked. Failure to pass check sum will be indi-
bol, not their real identifying symbology. Therefore, cated by a flashing BAD on Azimuth Indicator. DF
additional symbols may be displayed during self- reports Band 1,2,3 video and Amplifier Detector
test. The test is initiated by pressing the SYS TEST status. Failure will be indicated by a flashing BAD
pushbutton for approximately 1 second. When SYS on Azimuth Indicator. Antennas and associated
TEST is pressed, every light on the control panel cabling are not included in self test and must be
should illuminate briefly, or blink, those which do tested by maintenance personnel using appropriate
not should be pressed after the test to verify that test equipment.
they light when pressed. When activated, the SYS
TEST ON legend illuminates momentarily indicat- Extended Self-Test AFTER DZ
ing a valid memory self-test. The system sensitivity
alignment is verified when the four test quadrant Extended self-test is interruptive of normal warn-
dots are within or touching the diamond signal. ing function and takes in excess of two minutes to
Position of the quadrant dots also represents the complete. A total of twelve screens are displayed on
lethal range of threat radars. If the four dots are the Azimuth Indicator, summarizing specific details
shifted from the outer ring, the lethality envelope of system status. System self-test should be per-
has been shifted by that same amount. If the ver- formed at the maintenance level to further define
sion number blinks, then the operational flight pro- self test faults reported by air crews. Initiating ex-
gram or emitter identification data (OFP/EID) tended self test will assist maintenance personnel
memory has an error. If an R appears on the CRT in fault isolation. Upon completion of self test, soft-
ware will re-initialize and Azimuth Indicator will
then an error in the processor ram memory has
return to normal display.
been detected. Either of these errors could cause
incorrect threat information to be displayed; there-
Cycle Timer
fore, the processor should be repaired as soon as
possible. If an “M” appears on the CRT an error in The cycle timer is a short vertical bar attached to
the loader software exists. This error will not affect the left side of the 3 o’clock noise bar and alter-
operation of the OFP but could adversely affect the nately points either up or down. The cycle timer
reprogramming process. changes position each time the RWR has processed
data from all frequency bands. Therefore, the rate
AFTER DZ The self-test of the RWR system con- at which the cycle timer moves is dependent on the
sists of two levels of reports, self test (short summa- complexity of the environment that is being pro-
ry) and extended self test (detail required for main- cessed.

1-42K Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Threat Files AFTER DZ (4) Training file is to be used only for


training purposes as it contains only those emitters
The multitude of threats in today’s environment which are present at training sites and ranges. This
requires the RWR to be very discriminating in file is selected by pressing and releasing SYS TEST
order to reduce ambiguity. Three expanded threat and then pressing and releasing the MODE and
files are available to the operator. HANDOFF buttons simultaneously within one (1)
second. An “H” will appear at the bottom of the azi-
(1) Normal file contains land and water-based sur- muth indicator.
face-to-air missile systems, all airborne intercep-
tors, and land and sea-based AAA systems. This file Audio Scheme
is for use over land and in coastal areas. Normal
file is automatically selected when power is applied The following audio schemes are available as a
to the system. To return to normal file following function of environment and the operators selection
operator selection of terrain file, momentarily press of control-indicator pushbuttons:
SYS TEST button followed by TGT SEP button on
control-indicator within 1 second. (1) Normal proportional audio, (diamond
pushbutton not latched), from all emitters which
(2) Terrain file contains land-based surface-to-air are of sufficient strength to be processed, will be
missile systems, airborne interceptor, and land- heard. The amplitude of each prf will be propor-
based: AAA radars and is for use over land areas tional to the power received from the threat. The
only. This file is obtained by pressing and releasing AUDIO control (figure 1-13) on the control-indica-
SYS TEST followed by pressing and releasing T tor can be used to adjust the level of this audio.
(Target Separation) button within 1 second. No leg-
ends will illuminate but a symbol “T” will appear at (2) Diamond audio, (diamond pushbutton latched),
the bottom of the azimuth indicator at the EW offi- is provided to the crewmember who wishes to hear
cer position. When in terrain file, only 15 emitter the audio from only the symbol enclosed by the dia-
symbols will be displayed with the “T” symbol. mond by pressing the HANDOFF button on the
control-indicator. Diamond audio amplitude is
(3) Sea file contains water-based surface-to-air mis- constant, regardless of range of threat. Diamond
sile systems, all airborne interceptors, and all ship- audio level can be adjusted with the AUDIO control
board AAA radars. This file is obtained by pressing on the control-indicator.
and releasing SYS TEST followed by the ship sym-
bol UNKNOWN button on the control-indicator (3) Launch audio, a synthetic launch warning tone,
within 1 second. Only 15 emitter symbols may be is generated whenever an emitter guidance signal
displayed with the ship symbol which is always goes into a launch state. It consists of one burst of
present in this file. To select sea file when in nor- approximately seven beeps in 1.5 seconds of a 1 kc
mal or terrain files, momentarily press SYS TEST tone generated in the signal processor.
button followed by UNKNOWN button on control-
indicator within 1 second.

Change 7 1-42L/(1-42M blank)


BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

SENSOR INTEGRATION SYSTEM Signal Processor CM-465A/ALQ-155(V)

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The signal processor (SP) is the system controller


for the Countermeasures Set, operating under soft-
The sensor integration (SI) system is designed to ware control. It can integrate up to six control-indi-
enhance the radar warning display capability of the cator/programmers with each control-indicator/pro-
B-52 defensive avionics. The SI system collects grammer capable of controlling two receiver/trans-
threat warning information from the Radar Warn- mitters (RCVR/XMTRs). The SP interfaces with the
ing Receiver (RWR), threat warning and jamming control-indicator/programmer, RCVR/XMTR, RWR,
information from the ALQ-172(V) ECM system, and ALQ-172(V) countermeasures set, and the
threat warning and jamming information from the ID-2463/ALQ-155(V) control-indicator. Threat infor-
ALQ-155(V) ECM system. The SI system then ana- mation is available in video format on the
lyzes the information from the respective systems IP-1362/ASQ-175 multifunction display (MFD)
and optimizes the threat information on a multi- which operates under the control of the SP. The SP
function display. The SI countermeasures set con- is programmed to provide all control functions and
sists of one-half of the signal processor CM- implement the basic instruction set for the Coun-
465A/ALQ-155(V) (SI/PMS signal processor), one termeasures Set. The SP consists of two functional
control panel ID-2463/ALQ-155(V) (SI control-indi- sections. These sections are the ALQ-155(V) signal
cator), one multifunction display IP-1362/ASQ-175 processor and the Sensor Integration (SI) signal
(SI display), and ten data bus couplers for the processor.
defensive avionics bus installed with the SI set. In
addition, the CM-479 processor must be repro- The ALQ-155(V) half of the SI/PMS processor con-
grammed for the SI function. Component locations sists of a central processing unit (CPU) circuit card
are shown in figure 1-15. Sensor Integration con- assembly (CCA) and an ALQ-155 interface CCA.
trols and indicators are shown in figure 1-16. The CPU CCA contains a microprocessor circuit
and an electrically erasable programmable read-
The SI system contains Built-In-Test (BIT) to pro- only-memory (EEPROM). The microprocessor cir-
vide a status of the warning system. The SI system cuit operates on instructions contained in the
also provides the threat data to the ALQ-155(V) for EEPROM to automatically control the actions of the
automatic mode operation. Reprogramming of the ALQ-155(V) system. The ALQ-155 interface CCA
SI/PMS processor can be accomplished with the provides data routing circuits which interface the
ASM-695 Program Loader Verifier (PLV). control-indicator/programmer to the system receiv-
ers. The control-indicator/programmer provides
The SI countermeasures set uses both 28-volt dc controls and indications required for remote control
and 115-volt, 400 Hz ac power from the aircraft of the system and controls for initiating the jam-
buses. ming program desired. The sensor integration half
of the SI/PMS processor consists of three CCAs. The
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION CPU CCA acts upon instructions contained in
EEPROM to create the information presented on
Control-Indicator ID-2463/ALQ-155(V) the multifunction display (MFD). The sensor
integration interface CCA provides data commu-
The control-indicator (SI control) provides the con- nications between the RWR system, the
trols and indicators for the operation and control of ALQ-172(V) system, and the CPU CCA. If the sen-
the SI system. Ten switch/indicators, containing sor integration half of the SI/PMS processor is not
lamps for back-lighting front legends, and a lamp operative, the data from the RWR is passed through
intensity control are provided on the front panel of to the ALQ-155(V) half. The MFD driver CCA con-
the SI control. Control is also provided for switch- tains the circuits necessary to control the MFD.
ing operating power to the SI subsystem on or off
and for initiating self-test (BIT). See figure 1-16 for If the Sensor Integration half of the signal proces-
control-indicator pushbutton/indicator legends. sor is not operative, the data from the RWR is
passed through to the ALQ-155(V) half of the signal
processor. The MFD driver CCA contains the cir-
cuits necessary to control the MFD.

Change 7 1-43
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

SI Display IP-1362/ASQ-175 The display may be divided in functional areas as


follows:
The SI display has a cathode ray tube (CRT) which 1. Threat Display.
provides the operator with threat jamming, angle of
arrival, frequency, and pulse repetition interval 2. Diamond Threat and Associated Emitter
(PRI) information along with ALQ-155, RWR, and Section.
ALQ-172 self test results. Brightness and contrast 3. Indentifying Sensors Section. Appropriate Sys-
controls are provided to adjust the intensity of the tem box(es) illuminate to indicate which sensors are
MFD CRT display. The SI display is shown in figure receiving the threat enclosed in the HANDOFF dia-
1-16. mond.
4. RWR Status Box.
5. ALQ-172 Status Box.
6. SI Mode Status Box.
7. System Fault Status Box.

1-44 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration Component Locations

1 SI PROCESSOR
2 DATA BUS COUPLERS

Figure 1-15

1-45
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration Controls and Indicators

SI CONTROL PANEL

1 ALQ-155 MODE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR


2 BIT STATUS PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
3 HANDOFF PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
4 SEARCH/UNKNOWN PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
5 BLANK
6 AUDIO CONTROL
7 DIMMING CONTROL
8 SYSTEM POWER PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
9 RESET PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
10 TARGET SEPARATION PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
11 SYSTEM TEST PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
12 PRIORITY MODE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR

Figure 1-16 (Sheet 1 of 6)

1-46
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

SI MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD)

13 THRESHOLD BARS (THREAT DISPLAY) 18 IDENTIFYING SENSORS


14 JAM 155-172 (THREAT DISPLAY) 19 ALQ-172 STATUS BOX
15 AZIMUTH CIRCLE (THREAT DISPLAY) 20 RWR STATUS BOX
16 SPECIAL TECHNIQUE (THREAT DISPLAY) 21 SI MODE AND SYSTEM FAULT BOXES
17 DIAMOND THREAT AND ASSOCIATED EMITTERS
Figure 1-16 (Sheet 2 of 6)

Change 7 1-47
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration Controls and Indicators (Cont)


CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

SI CONTROL PANEL

1 ALQ-155 MODE Pushbutton-Indicator When pressed (upper legend ALQ-155 illuminated), allows diamond
symbol to be moved to only those threats detectable by the AN/ALQ-155
system. When pressed (lower legend OPEN illuminated), allows dia-
mond symbol to be moved to any displayed threat .

2 BIT STATUS Pushbutton-Indicator When pressed (upper legend STATUS illuminated), toggles MFD be-
tween BIT status display and tactical display. When pressed (lower leg-
end STATUS illuminated), provides continuously illuminated control leg-
end.

3 HANDOFF Pushbutton-Indicator When pressed (upper legend diamond symbol illuminated), the diamond
symbol rotates through threats displayed on the MFD as determined by
the ALQ-155 Mode pushbutton-indicator. When pressed and quickly
released, causes diamond to move to the highest priority threat. When
pressed (lower legend HANDOFF illuminated) provides continuously illu-
minated control legend.

4 SEARCH/UNKNOWN Pushbutton- When pressed (upper legend SEARCH illuminated), allows concurrent
Indicator display of search and other type symbols on the MFD. When pressed
(lower legend UNKNOWN illuminated), allows display of unknown sym-
bols on the MFD. Any of four combinations of these modes is possible.

5 Blank

6 AUDIO Control Rotate CW to increase audio volume. Rotate CCW to decrease audio vol-
ume

7 Dimming Control Rotate CW to increase legend light intensity. Rotate CCW to decrease
legend light intensity

8 SYSTEM POWER Pushbutton- When pressed (both upper and lower POWER legend illuminated),
Indicator 115-volt AC operating power is applied to the Sl subsystem

9 RESET Pushbutton-Indicator SYMBOL (upper)


When depressed, clears threat information and re-acquires current SI in-
formation from sensors.
RESET (Lower)
Provides continuously illuminated control legend.

10 Target Separation Pushbutton- When pressed (upper legend SEP DEF illuminated) emitters displayed
Indicator on MFD are compressed to their original location (target separation
defeated). When released, operates in target separate mode. Targets
are separated so that individual symbols do not overlap and display.
Lower legend, TGT SEP is illuminated regardless of mode.

11 System Test Pushbutton-Indicator When pressed (upper legend ON illuminated), toggles built-in-test (BIT)
BIT may be stopped by pressing button during test. When pressed (lower
legend SYS TEST illuminated) provides continuously illuminated control
legend.

Figure 1-16 (Sheet 3 of 6)

1-48 Change 1
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

SI MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD)

12 PRIORITY MODE Pushbutton- When pressed (upper legend PRIORITY illuminated), MFD displays five
Indicator symbols of highest priority for 30 seconds. The display may be stopped
by pressing button during the 30 second period. When pressed (lower
legend PRIORITY illuminated) provides continuously illuminated control
legend.

13 Threshold Bars (Threat Display) Each of the three bars represents a frequency band received by the RWR
system. When present, the bar indicates that noise in the RWR amplifier-
detectors is below a predetermined limit. If a bar is not present, the RWR
system has detected excess noise in the associated band and is operat-
ing at a reduced threshold level.

14 JAM 155-172 (Threat Display) Indicates that the ALQ-155 and ALQ-172 jamming systems are counter-
ing the same threat. This legend is displayed with an inverted video back-
ground.

15 Azimuth Circle (Threat Display) Provides angle of arrival information for threats sensed by EW sensors.
Top of display is current aircraft heading. Threat symbology is similar to
that used in standard radar warning receiver systems. Threats being
jammed are presented on a light background (inverted video).

16 SPECIAL TECHNIQUE When ALQ-172 is countering a threat using special technique, an indica-
(Threat Display) tion of this jamming appears in this area. The threat symbol jamming indi-
cation (inverted video background) associated with this technique
flashes on and off. This legend is displayed with an inverted video back-
ground.

17 Diamond Threat and Associated This section displays emitter information for the threat enclosed in the
Emitters HANDOFF diamond. Information for four associated emitters can be dis-
played. When an emitter is being countered by the ALQ-155 or ALQ-172
system, the information is presented on a light background (inverted
video). Emitter types are identified by the following symbols:

Type Symbol

TTR No symbol

Missile Activity,
Missile Launch, or
Missile Guidance (Circle)

Acquisition (Square)

FREQ is a display of emitter frequency.

SCAN is the scan type of the emitter.

PRF is a display of emitter PRF. PRF also displays CW or CYCLER for


appropriate emitters.

Figure 1-16 (Sheet 4 of 6)

Change 7 1-49
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration Controls and Indicators (Cont)


CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

SI MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) (Cont)

18 Identifying Sensors Boxes illuminate to indicate which sensors are receiving the threat
enclosed in the HANDOFF diamond.

19 ALQ-172 Status Box

PR O or S Indicates the operational status of the ALQ-172 pulse radar system


FORE and AFT (F and A).

O - Operational
S - Standby

PD O or S Indicates the operational status of the ALQ-172 pulse Doppler system


FORE and AFT (F and A).

O - Operational
S - Standby

HIGH or LOW Indicates the ALQ-172 system altitude mode.

T or W Indicates the ALQ-172 mode.

T - Training mode
W - War mode

See ALQ-172, this section, for explanation of ALQ-172 modes.

20 RWR Status Box RWR operational mode:

T Terrain Mode

N, or N Normal mode
- Sea mode

See ALR-46, this section, for explanation of ALR-46 modes.

OPEN or 155 Indicates the state of the ALQ-155 mode pushbutton-indicator.

HIGH or LOW Indicates the RWR altitude mode.


S Indicates the RWR Search mode is enabled.
U Indicates the RWR Unknown mode is enabled.

Figure 1-16 (Sheet 5 of 6)

1-50 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

21 SI Mode and System Fault Boxes

OPEN or 155 Indicates the state of the SI ALQ-155 mode pushbutton-indicator.

TOP 5 Indicates that the PRIORITY mode pushbutton has been depressed.

S Indicates that the SI Search mode is selected.

U Indicates that the SI Unknown mode is selected.

SI FAULT Indicates that a built-in-test (BIT) failure is detected in the SI subsystem.

46 FAULT Indicates that a BIT failure is detected in the RWR system.

155 FAULT Indicates that a BIT failure is detected in the ALQ-155 system.

172 F FAULT Indicates that a BIT failure is detected in the ALQ-172 FORE system or
that the MIL-STD-1553 data bus is inoperative.

172A FAULT Indicates that a BIT failure is detected in the ALQ-172 AFT system or that
the MIL-STD-1553 data bus in operative.

Figure 1-16 (Sheet 6 of 6)

Change 7 1-51
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration BIT Displays

SI MFD INITIATED BIT DISPLAY

SI MFD OPERATIONAL BIT STATUS DISPLAY

Figure 1-17

1-52
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

NORMAL OPERATION control panel illuminate; then, after 20 seconds


operational data and status appears on the SI
The SI system collects threat warning data from MFD. Press and release the SYS TEST button-indi-
the RWR and threat warning data and jamming cator. Ensure the missile launch tone is audible for
information from both the ALQ-172(V) and the approximately 1.5 seconds and verify the initiated
ALQ-155(V). Therefore, these systems must be BIT display (figure 1-17) appears on the SI MFD.
functional to interact with the SI system for normal Set the audio control knob to mid range. Further
operation. To operate the SI system, ensure the SI audio adjustment may be necessary as the mission
control and SI display circuit breakers located on dictates. Press and release the SYS TEST button-
the A177 ECM circuit breaker panel are in. The SI indicator again to return the SI MFD operational
control panel contains pushbutton-indicators and data and status presentation. Press and release the
control knobs for SI operation. The audio control BIT STATUS button-indicator. The operational BIT
knob should be set to minimum volume for check of status appears on the SI MFD. Press and release
the missile launch tone. Operational displays are the BIT STATUS button-indicator again to return
shown in figure 1-16. Press and release the SYS- to the SI MFD to the operational data and status
TEM POWER button-indicator. Lamps on the SI presentation.

Change 7 1-53/(1-54 blank)


BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

BLANKING SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Blanking to the ECM receiving systems is provided ward CV-3809/ALQ-172(V) signal data converter
by the OAS Radar Set Group (Radar Set). The and through the forward and aft ALQ-172(V)2 sys-
blanking pulses cut off the receivers to avoid receiv- tem. ALQ-172(V)2 forward PR transmitter blanking
ing transmitted signals from the Radar Set. This is supplied to the radar receiver-transmitter
avoids the possibility of confusing the Radar Set through the forward CV-3809/ ALQ-172(V) signal
transmitted signals with those of an enemy radar data converter. ALQ-172(V)2 aft PR transmitter
unit. blanking is supplied to the RWR through the aft
CV-3809/ALQ-172(V) signal data converter. The
Radar Set blanking signals are supplied through blanking system equipment location is shown in fig-
the blanking amplifier to the ALR-20A system, or ure 1-18.
to the RWR, and terrain computer through the for-

Change 7 1-55
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Equipment Locations

1 R-2247/ALQ-172(V) RECEIVER (SYSTEM NO. 16)


2 RWR SIGNAL PROCESSOR
3 CV-3809/ALQ-172(V) SIGNAL DATA CONVERTER
(SYSTEM 16)
4 C-9449/ALR-20A RECEIVER CONTROL
5 BLANKING AMPLIFIER
6 BLANKING CABLE STOWAGE RECEPTACLE 9 CV-3809/ALQ-172(V) SIGNAL DATA CONVERTER
7 BLANKING MODULE (SYSTEM NO. 16) (SYSTEM 15)
8 BLANKING MODULE (SYSTEM NO. 15) 10 R-2247/ALQ-172(V) RECEIVER (SYSTEM NO. 15)
Figure 1-18

1-56 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS
AN/AL T-16A 1-57
AN/AL T-28(V) JAMMING TRANSMITTER 1-57
AN/AL T-32A JAMMING TRANSMITTER 1-57
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 1-60

AN/ALT-16A drives both a pump and fan, a cooling coil, and cir-
cuitry for control of the system timing periods. The
Two AN/ALT-16A transmitter sets are integrated AN/ALQ-155(V) control-indicator provides controls
with the AN/ALQ-122 to make up the AN/ and indications required for remote control of the
ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A countermeasures system system. Circuitry from the control-indicator to the
(see ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A COUNTERMEASURES transmitter passes through the liquid cooler provid-
SYSTEM, under RECEIVER TRANSMITTER SYS- ing interlock protection. The programmer provides
TEMS, this section). controls for initiating the jamming program
desired. The C-9525/ALT-28(V) antenna select
panel drives a waveguide switch for systems No. 1
AN/ALT-28(V) JAMMING TRANSMITTER and 2 to transfer electromagnetic energy from the
transmitter to either the forward or omni antennas.
The AN/ALT-28(V) jamming transmitter system Circuits within the panel control dc voltages used to
(used as alternate mission equipment to the AN/ disable the transmitters during waveguide switch-
ALQ-155(V) power management system) is capable ing time.
of providing various types of RF power output cov-
ering a wide frequency range by using interchange-
able transmitter groups. (see ALQ-155(V) POWER
AN/ALT-32A JAMMING TRANSMITTER
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM under RECEIVER-
TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS, this section). The AN/ALT-32A jamming transmitter is an air-
borne countermeasures transmitter capable of jam-
Each transmitter group has a specific frequency ming enemy radar. The complete AN/ALT-32A sys-
range and power output which is designated as a tem includes low-band and high-band sets. One
band. Each system consists of a T-1150/ALT-28(V) low-band set is installed in position No. 20 and two
transmitter, HD-766A/ALT-28(V) dual electronic high-band sets are installed in positions No. 11 and
equipment liquid cooler, antenna system, and 1/2 of 12. The low-band set is comprised of a T-1086A/
a C-10130/ALQ-155(V) control indicator/program- ALT-32A radio transmitter, T-1087/ALT-32A radio
mer. Location of system components is shown in fig- transmitter, PP-1087/ALT-32 power supply, and a
ure 1-29. The transmitter contains an M-type back- C-7721/ALT-32A control indicator. The high-band
ward wave oscillator (BWO) and most of the func- set is comprised of a T-1087/ALT-32A radio trans-
tional circuits of the system. The transmitter hous- mitter, PP-1087/ALT-32 power supply, and a
ing is a magnesium casting which provides mount- C-7722/ALT-32A control-indicator. All operating
ing for the BWO, and liquid and air-cooled cavities controls and indicators are located on the front
in which modules containing the power supplies, panel of the control-indicators. Component loca-
regulators, and modulators associated with the tions are shown in figure 1-19. ALT-32A controls
BWO are mounted. The liquid cooler comprises a and indicators are shown in figure 1-20.
reservoir for cooling fluid, a single motor which

1-57
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALT-32A Component Locations

Figure 1-19 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-58 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-19 (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-59
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALT-32A Operating Controls and Indicators

1 SPOT A FREQUENCY CONTROL 6 FAULT LIGHT


2 SPOT A BANDWIDTH CONTROL 7 STANDBY LIGHT
3 SPOT B BANDWIDTH CONTROL 8 WARMUP LIGHT
4 TRANSMIT CHANNEL SELECTOR 9 SPOT B FREQUENCY CONTROL
5 RADIATE LIGHT

Figure 1-20 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-60
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Spot A Frequency Control Adjusts the center frequency of spot A transmitted signal.

2 Spot A Bandwidth Control Adjusts the bandwidth of the center frequency of spot A transmitted
signal.

3 Spot B Bandwidth Control Adjusts the bandwidth of the center frequency of spot B transmitted
signal.

4 TRANSMIT Channel Selector A rotary selector controls the application of power to the equipment and
selects the mode of operation. STBY position provides power to the
blower circuits and to the standby light. SPOT A position energizes the
spot A noise circuits and applies operating power to that portion of the
transmitter. SPOT B position energizes the spot B noise circuits and
applies operating power to that portion of the transmitter. SPOT A & B
position simultaneously energizes both spot A and spot B noise circuits
and applies operating power to that portion of the transmitter. BARRAGE
1, 2, 3 and 4 deenergizes the spot noise circuits, activates the barrage
noise circuits, and applies operating power to the transmitter. Barrage
noise will be radiated in the channelized bandwidth determined by the
numerical position selected.

NOTE

If transmitter is placed in A, B, or A & B Modes with Spot (A or


B) frequency control knob CCW, the transmitter may not come
into operation. Move the appropriate (Spot A or B) frequency
control knob clockwise until the transmitter comes into opera-
tion. The frequency control knob may then be returned to the
CCW position if desired.

5 RADIATE Light A green light,when illuminated, indicates that the transmitter is radiating
RF energy.

6 FAULT Light A white light, when illuminated, indicates the failure of the 3–phase ac
input, or a reduction of the inputs by 50% or more. When illuminated, the
primary power circuit is deenergized preventing operation of blowers.

7 STANDBY Light An amber light, when illuminated, indicates that the transmit channel
selector is in STANDBY position. The 60-second warmup is complete,
and the delay control relay is energized.

8 WARMUP Light (Not functional)

9 Spot B Frequency Control Adjusts the center frequency of spot B transmitted signal.

10 Shaft Locks A shaft lock, mounted concentrically with each frequency control and
each bandwidth control, locks the control in place. Clockwise rotation of
the lock locks the control, while counterclockwise rotation unlocks the
control.

Figure 1-20 (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-61/(1-62 blank)
BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS
AN/ALQ-172 COUNTERMEASURES SET 1-63
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1-63
CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU) 1-65
AN/ALQ-172 AUXILIARY PANEL 1-72G
CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU) OPERATION 1-72J
CDU SYMBOL SET 1-72V
NORMAL OPERATION 1-73
CDU NORMAL OPERATION 1-74
KEYBOARD COMMANDS 1-74D
AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEM 1-75
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1-75
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 1-75
AN/ALQ-153(V) TAIL WARNING SYSTEM 1-83
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1-83
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 1-83
NORMAL OPERATION 1-91
AN/ALQ-155(V) POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 1-92
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1-92
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 1-92
NORMAL OPERATION 1-101

AN/ALQ-172(V)2 COUNTERMEASURES SET


FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Less DT The systems share a common control-in-
The AN/ALQ-172(V)2 countermeasures set is a ful- dicator C-11213/ALQ-172(V) (control-indicator)
ly automatic receiving and transmitting ECM set. (LRU-5) and control-monitor C-11270/ALQ-172(V)
The set provides the aircraft with protection (control-monitor) (LRU-6). Both controls are in-
against threat radars. The AN/ALQ-172(V)2 set stalled at the EW officer station.
consists of two systems, designated systems 15 (aft)
and 16 (fwd). Each system includes one counter- DT The systems share a common Control-Display
measures receiver R-2247/ALQ-172(V) (receiver) Unit (CDU) C-12615/ALQ-172(V) (LRU-21). This
(LRU-1), one countermeasures transmitter T-1470/ control is installed at the EW officer station. The
ALQ-172(V) (PR transmitter) (LRU-2), one counter- C-12615/ALQ-172(V) Control-Display Unit (CDU)
measures transmitter T-1476/ALQ-172(V) (PD/CW (LRU-21) provides control and display functions for
transmitter) (LRU-4), one countermeasures conver- the two ALQ-172(V)2 systems. In addition it pro-
ter CV-3773/ALQ-172(V)2 (converter) (LRU-7), two vides communication and threat hand off between
phased array antennas AS-4078/ALQ-172(V)2 (an- the two ALQ-172 systems. The CDU allows for
tenna) (LRU-8), one quadrant switch SA-2396/ ALQ-172(V) memory loading and reading via a
ALQ-172(V)2 (switch) (LRU-9), one countermea- PCMCIA card (Personal Computer Memory Card
sures signal controller C-11271/ALQ-172(V) (PD/ International Association) inserted in the front pan-
CW processor) (LRU -10), and one signal data con- el. The PCMCIA card is the approximate dimen-
verter CV-3809/ALQ-172(V). The forward system sions of a credit card, but is thicker. Only Wing EW
also contains one transmitter T-1471/ALQ-172(V)2 officer approved PCMCIA cards may be used with
(LRU-12) (See figures 1-22 and 1-23). Additionally the CDU. The function of the PCMCIA interface is
the forward and aft systems each utilize an omni to allow for data loading of the ALQ-172(V)2 system
receive antenna E6329 (FWD) and E6337 (AFT). including CDU, data recording and playback. An
The forward system equipment (system 16) is in- Auxiliary Panel is also installed which includes
stalled in the forward radome. The aft system switches for system power and HIGH/LOW altitude
equipment (system 15) is installed in the tail sec- override. Both controls are installed at the EW offi-
tion. See figure 1-21. cer station.

Change 9 1-63
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Each AN/ALQ-172(V)2 system comprises a Pulse ALQ-172(V)2 PD subsystem. An RF filter in the for-
Radar (PR) and a Pulse Doppler (PD) subsystem. ward AN/ALQ-172(V)2 PR subsystem provides com-
The PR subsystem detects threats from convention- patibility between the AN/ALQ-155 band 12 trans-
al pulse radar fire control systems and applies ap- mitters/receivers and the AN/ALQ-172(V)2 PR sub-
propriate countermeasures. The PD subsystem rec- system.
ognizes threats from PD types of fire control radars
and applies appropriate countermeasures. All oper- Pressurized waveguides are used for all the trans-
ation is automatic including the reception and rec- mitting RF transmission lines and for the
ognition of threats and the programming and appli- waveguide that connects the transmitter output to
cation of suitable countermeasures. The set con- the RF switch input. Pressurization for the
tains comprehensive Built-In-Test (BIT) features. waveguide is supplied from two PN 2830400-3 com-
These features test overall functions of the system pressors, one forward and one aft. Two SA-377/ASQ
LRUs from the antenna inputs to the control-indi- pressure switches are installed with each compres-
cators. For flight line maintenance, the set BIT pro- sor. The high pressure switch operates the compres-
vides the means of isolating most failures to a par- sor when the waveguide pressurization falls below
ticular LRU. BIT is initiated by pressing the TEST 30.5 inches of Hg, while the low pressure switch
button on DT the C-12615/ALQ-172(V) Control Dis- operates the waveguide low pressure warning
play Unit or Less DT the C-11213/ALQ-172(V) con- lights when waveguide pressure falls below 24
trol-indicator. Programmed tests are then con- (±0.5) inches of Hg. The forward air compressor also
ducted automatically. These results are indicated to supplies pressure to the AN/ALQ-155(V) systems 1
the operator on the DT C-12615/ALQ-172(V) Con- and 2 waveguides.
trol Display Unit or Less DT lights on the
C-11213/ALQ-172(V) control-indicator and displays Two waveguide low pressure lights, one for the for-
on the C-11270/ ALQ-172(V) control-monitor. ward and one for the aft system, are located on the
ALQ-172 waveguide low pressure warning and
DT The CDU receives ALQ-172 bit, system status blanking panel (figure 1-24). Illumination of either
and situation information via an internal ALQ-172 light indicates insufficient pressure in the applica-
local 1553B Data Bus (figure 1-20A). Also, the for- ble system for proper operation and the pump in
ward and aft receivers are connected to the Sensor that system will continue to operate until shut off
Integration (SI) countermeasures set through the by pulling the associated pump circuit breaker(s) lo-
Defensive System 1553B Data Bus. This enables cated on the Overhead A117 DECM CB Panel.
threat and system status information to be dis- When either waveguide low pressure light illumi-
played on the SI display. nates refer to the AN/ALQ-172 Malfunction Analy-
sis Checklist in Section III of this manual.
Less DT The forward and aft R-2247 receivers are
interconnected with the SI countermeasures set The forward air compressor supplies pressure for
through data bus couplers. This enables threat and both the AN/ALQ-172(V)2 forward and the the AN/
system status information to be displayed on the SI ALQ-155(V) systems 1 and 2 waveguide runs. Pres-
display. sure tubing from the forward compressor connects
directly to the AN/ALQ-155(V) system 1 and 2 omni
Aircraft Interface antenna waveguide runs. This configuration pro-
vides complete pressurization for systems 1 and 2
The AN/ALQ-172(V)2 aft PR receiver is blanked omni antenna, forward antenna, and the transmit-
from the B-52 Radar Set; the AN/ALQ-172(V)2 for- ter waveguide runs. Waveguide pressure for the
ward PR receiver is blanked only by the B-52 Radar AN/ALQ-172(V)2 forward system is supplied by a
Set. This avoids electromagnetic interference to the pressure tube running from the AN/ALQ-155 sys-
PR subsystem. These blanking signals are routed to tem 2 forward antenna waveguide.
the PR receivers through the blanking modules.
Blanking is provided from both forward and aft PR Two 5-amp 28 volt-dc circuit breakers on the DECM
transmitters to the AN/ALR-46 receiver, and from circuit breaker panel labeled SYS 15 PRESS PUMP
the forward PR transmitter to the B-52 Radar Set. and SYS 16 PRESS PUMP supply control voltages
This blanking signal is routed to the receiver to high pressure switches. The switches provide on-
through the CV-3809/ALQ-172(V) signal data con- off control for the compressors. A 5-amp 28 volt-dc
verters. Forward and aft systems are intercon- circuit breaker on the DECM circuit breaker panel
nected with the AN/ALQ-155 power management labeled PRESS PUMP INDICATOR supplies con-
system. This provides compatibility between the trol voltage to the waveguide low pressure warning
AN/ALQ-155 band 12 transmitters and the AN/ light(s) and low pressure switches.

1-64 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU) erate enable, and two sets of four software pro-
grammable switches. The programmable switches
The AN/ALQ-172(V) LRU-21 Control Display Unit are arranged along the bottom for display control
(CDU) C-12615/ALQ-172(V) replaces LRU-5 and and down the right side for system control. A rocker
LRU-6. The CDU performs the Operator Interface, switch varies the intensity of the LCD display. The
the hand off of threat signals between systems, and CDU has a carrying handle that is used to assist
the communication between the systems and CDU with installation, removal, and transportation of
via the ALQ-172 local 1553 Bus; plus the capability the CDU. The handle should always be stowed and
to load the EID, OFP and ECM data via the 1553B locked in the upright position after installation.
data bus through the CDU, using a PCMCIA card
as a storage/transport medium. The CDU also pro- NOTE
vides maintenance diagnostics capability by report-
ing the results of the 172 systems self test. Detailed The handle must always be in the stowed
diagnostics files can also be selected to assist with and locked (upright position) inflight.
fault isolation. The CDU also provides record/play-
back capability as well as display of OAS NAV data. The Display module provides the operator interface.
It contains three single function switches, one
The CDU performs the following major functions: dedicated indicator, 8 programmable switches, a
• Power and control of ALQ-172 FWD and AFT
PCMCIA interface, a keyboard connector, a ambient
light sensor and dimming control, and a 6 by 8
LRUs. Color Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Display panel
• Threat situation display. incorporating a Touch Screen. The necessary
• System status display. electronics and lighting for the active matrix LCD
• Signal handoff. and the programmable switches are contained in
this module.
• Overtemperature report/override.
• Self test results display. The electronics module contains the processor and
• Self test details and fault diagnostics. communications electronics to communicate with
• OFP/EID/ECM file data loading. both ALQ-172 systems and the display module and
process and display the data reported. It also
• Configuration identification. contains the power supplies for all functions. This
• Recording and playback. module stores the software (in solid state memory)
• OAS NAV data display. to run the CDU GO mode of operation. The CDU
can be booted with a PCMCIA card installed,
The CDU is capable of controlling up to three bypassing the installed software stored in the
ALQ-172 systems in either the Fail/Safe or CDU electronics unit. This is used for loading ALQ-172
GO mode of operation. It consists of three modules system files (EID, OFP, ECM) into the 172 systems,
(figure 1-20B); a Switch/Display module with a for maintenance troubleshooting, as well as for
PCMCIA module; an Electronics module; and the updating the software stored in the CDU
Personality module. electronics unit. (i.e. if the user requires loading a
new version of CDU software it can be loaded from
The CDU controls two ALQ-172 systems, config- a preprogrammed PCMCIA card).
ured as FWD and AFT systems. The CDU has two
modes, the fail-safe interface mode and the CDU The personality module contains the interface for
GO mode. See CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU) three ALQ-172 systems and the Aircraft
OPERATION this section for discussion of the two (Connectors) and the relay logic for fail safe
modes. operation. The present aircraft design uses only two
systems. The third system is for future growth.
Figure 1-23A shows the front view of the CDU. The This logic, similar to the LRU-5 logic circuits,
CDU contains a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), provides for operation of the ALQ-172 systems in
switches for power on, test initiate, and standby/op- the event of a CDU failure.

Change 9 1-65
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Component Block Diagram


DT

Figure 1-20A

The CDU provides a continuous threat status dis- muth at a relative range based on signal strength.
play of the type of threat (PR, PD, CW), direction of It will change to the appropriate red or green upon
threat (relative to aircraft heading), the system’s re- receipt of a valid DF report from the ALQ-172 sys-
sponse to the threat (jam indictions) and threat tems.
symbology based upon the threat identification and
mode i.e. search, track, illuminate or guidance. This condition can occur during periods where the
Threat symbols are displayed at the relative bear- signal is above 172 system receiver threshold but
ing as reported by the ALQ-172 systems and at a not yet above antenna subsystem receiver threshold
relative range from the center or the area depend- or during the signal acquisition interval where the
ing on their received signal strength. The display is 172 trackers have not yet established signal track-
a bulls eye consisting of two concentric circles. Sig- ing gates required by the antenna system.
nals detected, but below jam threshold, will be dis-
played in red in the outer ring of the bulls eye. As The yellow symbol can be displayed at any beam
the signal strength increases, the symbol will be position not just default if invalid DF report is pro-
positioned closer to the inner ring. When the signal cessed after receipt of a valid DF report. In this
is above jam threshold and actively being jammed, case the symbol will be placed at the last known
the symbol color will change to green. If the signal valid DF position with its color changing from red
does not have a valid DF report, the symbol will ap- or green to yellow until another valid DF report is
pear in yellow regardless of whether or not it is be- received in which case its color will switch back to
ing jammed. Signals with invalid DF reports will red or green as appropriate.
appear along the 225° (AFT) or 315° (FWD) azi-

1-66 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Control Display Unit


DT

Figure 1-20B

System resource status is displayed on the screen In situations where both the FWD and AFT sys-
in the upper right corner i.e. how many channels tems detect the same signal, the CDU will control
are tracking signals. LRU failure indications as signal handoff so that only one symbol will appear
well as resource activity indicators display the type on the display and only one system jams the signal.
of system resources available to handle new The CDU continuously monitors the threat process-
threats. Threat data for a selected threat is dis- ing conditions and determines when to perform sig-
played in the system status data field. A threat can nal handoff to the other system. The decision crite-
be selected by touching the screen where the sym- ria is based on threat frequency, PRF and ampli-
bol appears or using the handoff pushbutton. When tude reports. Transition from one system to another
a threat is selected by placing the select diamond will only occur at the completion of an ECM cycle.
around the symbol, the corresponding data from the As a result, signal handoff will not be commanded
threat is displayed in the threat data field. Data in the middle of an ECM program sequence.
displayed includes the threat name, symbol fre-
quency, PRF, mode, the ALQ-172 system process- The frequency activity indicator is at the bottom of
ing/engaging the threat, and the emitter angle of the situation display. Signals reported by both sys-
arrival (AOA) and clock position. Selecting the tems are displayed in 1 GHz increments starting at
handoff pushbutton repeatedly will sequence A-2 on the left and incrementing to C+4 on the
through the threats being displayed in the order right. Navigation data received from the OAS NAV
that the threats were received and placed into the data bus is displayed at the top of the situation dis-
CDU track file. play. The data includes heading, altitude, air speed,
latitude and longitude. Time is displayed in the sys-
If only one symbol is present on the display, the tem status area. The time can be set manually or
symbol will automatically be selected and its corre- obtained automatically from the OAS.
sponding data displayed in the threat data field.

Change 9 1-66A/(1-66B blank)


T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Component Locations

Figure 1-21 (Sheet 1 of 5)

Change 9 1-67
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Component Locations (Cont)

Figure 1-21 (Sheet 2 of 5)

1-68 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-21 (Sheet 3 of 5)

Change 9 1-69
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Component Locations (Cont)

Figure 1-21 (Sheet 4 of 5)

1-70 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-21 (Sheet 5 of 5)

Change 9 1-71
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Controls and Indicators


Less DT

C-11213/ALQ-172 CONTROL-INDICATOR

1 MODE SELECTOR INDICATOR


2 FAIL INDICATOR
3 COLD INDICATOR
4 HOT INDICATOR LIGHT/OVERRIDE SWITCH INDICATOR
5 CONTROL-INDICATOR LAMP TEST PUSHBUTTON
6 POWER SWITCH INDICATOR
7 TEST STATUS INDICATOR
8 SECURE SWITCH
9 SELF-TEST PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
10 TEST STATUS INDICATOR
11 PD AFT STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
12 PD FWD STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
13 PR AFT STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
14 PR FWD STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
15 AFT TEST INDICATOR
16 FWD TEST INDICATOR

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for ALQ-172 control and indicator functions.

Figure 1-22

1-72 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Control Monitor


Less DT

C-11270/ALQ-172 CONTROL MONITOR

1 PD FWD JAM INDICATOR LIGHT 5 CONTROL MONITOR LAMP TEST PUSHBUTTON


2 THREAT DISPLAY INDICATOR 6 PR AFT JAM INDICATOR LIGHT
3 PD AFT JAM INDICATOR LIGHT 7 PR FWD JAM INDICATOR LIGHT
4 DIMMER CONTROL 8 WEDGE VALUES

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for ALQ-172 control and indicator functions.

Figure 1-23

Change 9 1-72A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Control Display Unit


DT

1 BACK LIT COLOR LCD SCREEN


2 GO INDICATOR
3 POWER PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
4 FWD STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
5 SPARE PUSHBUTTON INDICATOR
6 KEYBOARD CONNECTOR
7 AFT STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
8 HOT/COLD/FAIL INDICATOR/OVERRIDE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
9 TEST INITIATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
10 MASTER STANDBY/OPERATE INDICATOR
11 PCMCIA INTERFACE
12 SELECT KEY INDICATOR/SWITCHES
13 LCD BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
14 LIGHT SENSOR

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for Classified functions.

Figure 1-23A (Sheet 1 of 5)

1-72B Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 LCD Color Display A back lit 6 X 8 inch color touch screen with a minimum 640 X 480 pixel
color active matrix display is used for displaying situation awareness and
system status. Sixteen colors are available for display. The touch screen
can be activated with or without gloves.

2 Go Indicator The pushbutton switch indicator comes on to indicate power status of


system components. Pressing the Go Indicator will perform a Lamp Test,
which will light all non-programmable switches including LWR which is for
future growth.

CDU (Green) CDU indicator comes on to indicate that the CDU GO mode is active.
FWD (Green) FWD indicator comes on to indicate that the forward system is powered.
AFT (Green) AFT indicator comes on to indicate that the aft system is powered.

3 POWER Pushbutton-Indicator The pushbutton switch indicator applies power to the FWD and AFT
systems and the CDU. Provided that the Auxiliary Panel switches are on.
POWER (Green) POWER is always lit when power is available to the CDU.
//// (Green) The presence of green diagonal lines indicate power has been applied
to the CDU.
4 FWD Standby/Operate The software programmable pushbutton switch indicator is used for FWD
Pushbutton/Indicator system control indicates when FWD System is in Standby/Operate
Mode. Pressing the pushbutton when in Standby switches the FWD sys-
tem to Operate Mode. Pressing the pushbutton when in Operate Mode
switches the system into Standby Mode.
The Operate state is indicated by both the PR and PD legends being high-
lighted in reverse video (i.e. Operate mode selected). Pressing the push-
button switch will result in the following sequence:

PR Standby
PD (Reverse Video) Operate

PR (Reverse Video) Operate


PD Standby

PR Standby
PD Standby

PR (Reverse Video) Operate


PD (Reverse Video) Operate

5 Spare Pushbutton Switch Indicator Spare software programmable pushbutton switch indicator is reserved
for the third, Lower (LWR) system, when installed.

6 Keyboard Connector The keyboard connector that allows the operator to connect a standard
keyboard with a MIL STD cable adapter to the CDU processor for ex-
tended functions.

Figure 1-23A (Sheet 2 of 5)

Change 9 1-72C
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Control Display Unit (Cont)


DT
CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

7 AFT Standby/Operate The software programmable pushbutton switch indicator used for AFT
Pushbutton/Indicator system control indicates when AFT System is in Standby/Operate Mode.
Pressing the pushbutton when in Standby switches the AFT system to
Operate Mode. Pressing the pushbutton when in Operate Mode switches
the system into Standby Mode.
The Operate state is indicated by both the PR and PD legends being high-
lighted in reverse video (i.e. Operate mode selected). Pressing the push-
button switch will result in the following sequence:

PR Standby
PD (Reverse Video) Operate

PR (Reverse Video) Operate


PD Standby

PR Standby
PD Standby

PR (Reverse Video) Operate


PD (Reverse Video) Operate

8 Hot/Cold/Fail Indicator/Override The software programmable pushbutton switch indicator used for system
Pushbutton/Indicator control and displays Hot, Cold and Fail indications all in green text.

HOT indicator comes on to indicate that a system HOT has been de-
tected. Pressing the pushbutton with the HOT indication will enable Over-
ride Mode for 60 seconds. The switch will display the count down time.
Override can be discontinued anytime by pressing the button.
COLD indicator comes on to indicate that a system COLD has been de-
tected.
FAIL indicator comes on to indicate that a system transmitter FAULT has
been detected.
This pushbutton will display any system over temperature, overheat,
TWT FAIL and cold indication. Overtemp and overheat conditions result
in the 172 system to be placed in a STBY mode. Over temperature and
overheat conditions can be overridden by depressing the pushbutton.
The pushbutton will display a 60 second countdown.

During this period, the applicable subsystem will be placed back into OP-
ERATE mode. The applicable subsystem will go through autonomous
self test for 8 seconds before actual RF transmissions will continue. The
override can be repeated every 60 seconds as required with the knowl-
edge that the identified subsystem is reporting an over temperature/over-
heat condition. Therefore, system operation may be degraded.

When a TWT FAIL indication is reported, the pushbutton will display the
failed condition. The FAIL message will continue to flash continuously.
However, by depressing the pushbutton, the FAIL message will no longer
be displayed. However, the indication will still be displayed on the situa-
tion screen.

(Continued)

Figure 1-23A (Sheet 3 of 5)

1-72D Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

Hot/Cold/Fail Indicator/Override The following legends can be displayed on this pushbutton:


Pushbutton/Indicator (Cont)
A2 HOT AFT LRU-2 High Voltage Overheat
A4 HOT AFT LRU-4 High Voltage Overheat
A A HOT AFT Antenna Subsystem Over temp
AFT Cold AFT System Cold
A PD HOT AFT PD Subsystem Over temp
A PD TWT FAIL AFT LRU-4 TWT Failure
A PR HOT AFT PR System Over temp
A PR TWT FAIL AFT LRU-2 TWT Failure
F2 HOT Forward LRU-2 High Voltage Overheat
F4 HOT Forward LRU-4 High Voltage Overheat
F12 HOT Forward LRU-12 High Voltage Overheat
F A HOT Forward Antenna Subsystem Over temp
F PD HOT Forward PD Subsystem Over temp
F PD TWT FAIL Forward LRU-4/12 TWT Failure
F PR HOT Forward PR Subsystem Over temp
F PR TWT FAIL Forward LRU-2 TWT Failure
FWD Cold Forward System Cold

9 Test Initiate Pushbutton/Indicator The pushbutton switch has three built in legends. The top half indicator
indicates operator initiated self-test (TEST in white). The bottom half-left
indicator indicates a BIT (BIT in green). The bottom half-right indicator in-
dicates a fault (FAU in yellow).

TEST (White) TEST pushbutton switch top half indicator indicates operator initiated
self-test. Pressing this button initiates BIT in the FWD and AFT systems.
During BIT the TEST light is off.
BIT (Green) Bottom half-left BIT indicator comes on to indicate that a self test in prog-
ress. The BIT segment will stay illuminated for approximately 14 sec-
onds.
FAU (Orange) Bottom half-right FAU indicator comes on to indicate when any system
fails.
10 MASTER Standby/Operate Alternate action pushbutton switch indicator selects and indicates
Pushbutton/Indicator STANDBY (STBY orange text) or OPERATE (OPER green text). Operate
applies power to select transmitters (all transmitters in Fail Safe mode).
When the pushbutton is depressed while the system is in CDU Go Mode,
only those systems assigned to operate via controls 4 and 7 will be al-
lowed to go into Operate Mode.

STBY (Orange) STBY indicates the system is in standby. STBY will come on when the first
of the FWD or AFT PR or PD subsystems times into STBY (less than 240
seconds). Status of all subsystems can be observed on the CDU display.
OPER (Green) OPER indicates the system is in operate.

Figure 1-23A (Sheet 4 of 5)

Change 9 1-72E
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Control Display Unit (Cont)


DT
CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

11 PCMCIA Interface The PCMICA Interface is a single PCMCIA drive slot. A properly config-
ured PC card will boot the processor from the drive slot (E drive). The
drive is used to load the ALQ-172 OFP/EID/ECM files and databurn pro-
gram. The drive is also used to record and playback recorded data via the
PC card. The PC card can be 40 - 200MB or greater. Only Wing EW officer
approved PCMCIA cards are authorized.

NOTE

The PCMCIA drive slot has a firm ejection spring. Care should
be taken to keep from dropping the PCMCIA card when ejecting
it from the drive slot.

12 Select Key Indicator/Switches (Text Four programmable select key indicator/switches are located below the
Green) display. Pressing the bottom bar of the respective switch frame will enable
the feature indicated in the display portion of the switch or will swap the
functions of the normal video and reverse video features. Figure 1-24D
lists and defines the possible switch text items.

13 Brightness control The rocker dimmer control varies the intensity of the LCD display. Pro-
vides baseline illumination for the LCD display. Pressing the top of the
switch increases intensity. Pressing the bottom of the switch decreases
intensity.

14 Light Sensor The light sensor automatically maintains the LCD brightness under vary-
ing lighting conditions. The initial baseline brightness is adjusted with the
brightness control (13).

Figure 1-23A (Sheet 5 of 5)

1-72F Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Waveguide Low Pressure Warning and


Blanking Panel

1 WAVEGUIDE LOW PRESSURE LIGHTS


2 BLANKING SWITCH

Figure 1-24

DT AN/ALQ-172 AUXILIARY PANEL If the CDU fails, the system HIGH/LOW altitude
mode defaults to HIGH. The CDU altitude override
The ALQ-172 Auxiliary Control Panel (figure switch allows the EW Officer to override the CDU
1-24A) provides switches for manual powering off altitude mode default and places both FWD and
either the FWD or AFT systems independently af- AFT systems simultaneously in the LOW altitude
ter application of system power by the CDU. The mode. If OVRD LO is selected with a functioning
switches are mechanical switches which function by CDU in HIGH mode the systems will switch to low
removing ground from the relays in the individual and LOW will be displayed on the CDU in red. Set-
system LRUs, thereby disabling the respective sys- ting the switch back to CDU ALT will change LOW
tem LRUs. The lights are 5 volt ac with power sup- on the CDU from red LOW to yellow HIGH and de-
plied when aircraft power is applied. Brightness is fault to the CDU setting.
controlled by the main console panel light switch.
The lights indicate the respective switch position
regardless of the power state of the CDU.

Change 9 1-72G
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel


DT

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Forward (FWD) System Power Push- The switch allows the operator to prevent initial power application to the
button/Indicator FWD system or to remove power from the FWD system. The switch is an
alternate action mechanical pushbutton.
FWD (Green) When the FWD (upper half of the switch) is lit the FWD system power ap-
plication/removal is controlled by the CDU.
FWD OFF (Yellow) When the FWD OFF (lower half of the switch) is lit, power to the FWD sys-
tem has been removed.
2 Lower (LWR) System Power Pushbut- Not functional - Switch is reserved for the third Lower (LWR) system when
ton/Indicator installed.
3 Aft (AFT) System Power Pushbutton/In- The switch allows the operator to prevent initial power application to the
dicator AFT system or to remove power from the AFT system. The switch is an
alternate action mechanical pushbutton.
AFT (Green) When the AFT (upper half of the switch) is lit the power application/remov-
al is controlled by the CDU.
AFT OFF (Yellow) When the AFT OFF (lower half of the switch) is lit, power to the AFT sys-
tem has been removed.
4 CDU Altitude Override Switch If the CDU fails the altitude mode defaults to HIGH. The switch is an alter-
nate action mechanical pushbutton which allows the operator to override
the HIGH altitude mode selection by the CDU and commands both
ALQ-172 systems to the LOW altitude mode.
CDU ALT (Green) When the upper half (CDU ALT) of the switch is lit, the CDU is controlling
the altitude mode.
OVRD LO (Yellow) When the lower half (OVRD LO) of the switch is lit, both ALQ-172 systems
are placed in the LOW mode.

Figure 1-24A

1-72H Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU) OPERATION Threat data for selected threats is displayed below
the system status data. When a threat is selected
Fail Safe Mode by touching the threat symbols on the screen, or
pressing the HANDOFF pushbutton, the select dia-
With the Fail Safe mode, all control/monitoring is mond is placed around the threat and the corre-
accomplished through a combination of indicators sponding data from the system is displayed in the
and single function switches. Minimal information Threat Data area. Threat name, symbol, frequency,
is provided while each system automatically pro- PRF, Mode of the threat, the ALQ-172 system pro-
cesses the threats. The following switch/indicators viding the data, and the emitter Angle Of Arrival
are functional in the Fail Safe mode: (AOA)/clock position are displayed.
• CDU POWER Switch Along the bottom of the Situation page is the Activi-
• CDU, FWD and AFT Go Indicator. ty indicator. This area displays the signals reported
• TEST Switch/Indicator (TEST, BIT, FAU) by both systems in a Frequency/Amplitude display.
• Master OPER/STBY Switch/Indicator The remainder of the page is used to display the
threat symbols at the relative bearing as reported by
The lower half of the POWER switch will light the systems, and at a relative range from the center
when pressed, indicating that a ground has been of the area depending on their received signal
provided for both systems. The FWD and AFT go strength. The display is a bulls eye consisting of two
indicators will come on as the respective subsystem concentric circles. Signals detected, but below the
is powered. When the CDU indicator comes on, the Jam threshold, will be displayed red in the outer ring
CDU will have exited the Fail Safe mode and will of the bull’s eye. Signals are displayed based upon sig-
be in the CDU GO mode. If the CDU indicator does nal strength. Upon being received at their predeter-
not come on, the CDU is in Fail Safe mode. mined Jam Threshold, the symbol will change to
The Master OPER/STBY Switch/Indicator controls green. Jam indicators for both systems make up the
the transitions from STBY (Standby) to OPER (Oper- rest of this area. The FWD PR indicator is on the
ate) for both systems. In the Fail Safe Mode, as soon upper left of the area, the FWD PD indicator is on the
as one system reports Standby, the STBY legend upper right of the area. At the bottom level of the bulls
comes on, and that system can be placed into opera- eye is the AFT system indicator. Between the system
tion. Placing this switch into the operate mode places indicators is an area that is used to deconflict signal
all systems into operate as soon as they time out to selection when several signals are selected by the
STBY. touch screen. When several signals are under the
touch screen select box, all the symbols under the
CDU Go Mode touch screen select box are displayed in this area.
From this area a single threat can be selected by
In the CDU GO mode the CDU controls both touching the appropriate symbol.
ALQ-172 systems and display data that is arranged
In addition to displaying data, the CDU performs
on three pages; the Situation Page, Status Page
another task, acting as the integrator of both systems.
and the Detailed Status Page.
The CDU performs the task of determining when a
Situation Page
signal is handed off to another system. In a typical
scenario a signal will be received first in the FWD
The Situation page contains the data necessary for system, and reported to the CDU, and then received
the EW Officer to make the decisions to transmit by the AFT system as the aircraft approaches the site.
against the various signals illuminating the air- The CDU will assign the signal to only one system to
craft. The Situation page is shown in figure 1-24B. Jam, in this case the FWD system. At the appropriate
time, the CDU will hand off the signal to the AFT
Across the top of the page is an area where Naviga- system for continued jamming and prevent the FWD
tion information from the OAS NAV bus is dis- system from jamming the signal.
played when provided by OAS.
Status Display Page
The system resource status is displayed on the up-
per right area of the screen and indicates which The Status Display page provides system self test and
File (EID) has been selected. This area indicates an configuration data. The Status page is shown in fig-
abbreviated system status, with failed LRU’s shown ure 1-24C.
as part of the corresponding system. Resource activ-
ity indicators display the portion of system re- Detailed Status Page
sources available to handle new threats. A yellow The Detailed Status Page provides detailed self-test
box will appear as a channel is assigned to a signal. data for a specific system. The Detailed Status
For the PR subsystem only, a red box will appear if Screen is shown in figure 1-24E. See section III.
a channel has been disabled due to a self test fault.

Change 9 1-72J
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Situation Display


DT

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 OAS Navigation Data The top of the CDU screen displays the aircraft navigation data. The data
is obtained from the OAS MIL-STD-1553A Controls and Displays B and
D buses from the Navigation and Weapon Delivery Avionics Control Unit.
The data is received at a rate of approximately 16 times per second and
updated on the CDU at the CDU refresh rate of approximately 5 times per
second. The following data is displayed as follows:

HDG Magnetic heading in degrees


AGL/MSL OAS altitude in feet. The default altitude displayed is MSL altitude. When
below 5000 feet with a valid radar altimeter AGL altitude is displayed.
KTAS True airspeed in knots
Latitude Latitude in degrees, minutes, seconds
Longitude Longitude in degrees, minutes, seconds

Figure 1-24B (Sheet 1 of 4)

1-72K Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

2 System Status Displays the status of the 172 systems as reported.

File Indicates which database file is selected by the operator (File 1 or File 2).
HIGH/LOW Indicates whether the 172 systems are in HIGH mode or LOW mode. If
there is a detected difference between the mode selected by the operator
and the mode reported by the 172 systems, the mode of the 172 systems
will be displayed in red. This discrepancy can occur if the AUXILIARY
PANEL CDU Altitude Override switch is set to OVRD LO with HIGH se-
lected on the CDU.
FWD Indicates the status of the FWD 172 system. If no self test failures de-
tected, FWD will appear in green. If self test failures detected or commu-
nications not established, FWD will appear in red. Any failed LRUs de-
tected and reported during self test will display their LRU number i.e., 1,
2, 4,10, 7, 8R, 8L, 9, 12.
For a hard failure the LRU number is displayed in red; For a soft failure
the LRU number will appear in yellow; and for a software configuration
fault the LRU number will appear in orange.
The channel initialization status bar segments will appear in green if there
are no signals being tracked. The segments will appear in yellow indicat-
ing the number of channels that are actively tracking signals in the PR
subsystem and PD subsystem.
For the PR subsystem only, a red box will appear if a channel has been
disabled due to a self test fault detect.
(Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional information)
AFT Indicates the status of the AFT 172 system. All other information dis-
played, except for LRU-12, is the same description as the FWD system.
Time of day is displayed in hours/minutes/ seconds in green at the bottom
of the system status field. Time of day can be set manually or is automati-
cally obtained from the OAS NAV data bus.
REC The letters REC in red indicate that record mode is in progress.
PLY The letters PLY in green indicate that playback mode is in progress.
3 Threat Information This field displays the particular emitter information that is pertinent to a
selected threat symbol enclosed in the HANDOFF diamond. If the HAND-
OFF function is selected or the touch screen function is used to select a
threat, a diamond will appear around the threat symbol. When this occurs,
the selected emitter’s parameters will be displayed in the field. The pa-
rameters include:

Threat Name Threat name as defined in data base and symbol table by the mission pro-
grammer. It is referenced by the T Type.
Symbol Based upon the CDU symbol set. Some emitter types will also have attrib-
ute symbols along with the emitter symbol as follows:
Missile Activity/Alert (circle)
Missile Guidance (circle)
Missile Launch (flashing circle)
Acquisition (square). Symbols and attributes are referenced by T Type.
FREQ Is a display of the emitter frequency.
(Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional information)
(Continued)

Figure 1-24B (Sheet 2 of 4)

Change 9 1-72L
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Situation Display (Cont)


DT
CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

PRF Is a display of emitter PRF. PRF also displays CW or NO TRK.


(Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional information)
MODE Is the scan type of the emitter.
(Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional information)
SYSTEM Is a display of which system is handling and is processing the signal i.e.
FWD or AFT.
AOA Is a display of the actual angle of arrival of the emitter signal in both de-
grees azimuth and clock position from the nose of the aircraft (0 degrees
and 12 o’clock) as reported by the antenna subsystem.
4 Frequency Spectrum Displays the frequency of all signals detected by the 172 systems and dis-
played on the CDU. The color i.e. red, green or yellow corresponds to the
color of the symbol as displayed in the azimuth circle. Symbol that has
the diamond select will be displayed under the corresponding frequency.

The height of the frequency spectral line is proportional to the reported


amplitude. The frequency spectrum displays frequencies from A-2 (left
most edge) to C+4 (right most edge). Each tick on the display line repre-
sents 1 GHz increments. (Refer to T.O.1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional infor-
mation)
5 Handoff When pressed, the diamond symbol rotates through threats displayed on
the CDU. When FWD pressed and quickly released, causes diamond to
move to the first signal in the track file. When pressed again the diamond
will move to the next signal in the track file. When REV pressed and quick-
ly released, causes the diamond to move to the next higher signal in the
track file.

6 AFT Subsystem Status Under each subsystem legends i.e. PR (lower left corner) or PD (lower
right corner) will indicate the system mode as follows:

Blank Subsystem has not yet timed in, after power up system should time in
within 240 seconds.
STBY (Yellow) Subsystem transmitters have timed in.
OPER (Green) Subsystem transmitters have been placed into operate mode.
JAM (Green) Subsystem transmitters are actively jamming one or more emitters.
HOT (Red) An overtemp or overheat condition has been detected in the AFT subsys-
tem. This condition can be overridden for 60 seconds by pressing the
OVRD button.
FAIL (Red) An overcurrent condition has been detected in the subsystem transmitter.
When the FAIL indication appears all RF transmissions for that subsys-
tem will be terminated.
7 Azimuth Circle (Threat Display) Provides angle of arrival information for threats sensed by EW sensors.
Top of display is current aircraft heading. Threat symbology is similar to
that used in standard radar warning receiver systems.
Threats being detected with valid DF are presented in the RED.
Threats being jammed with valid DF are presented in the GREEN.
Threats being detected or jammed without valid DF are presented in
YELLOW.

(Continued)

Figure 1-24B (Sheet 3 of 4)

1-72M Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

Threat symbols are displayed at the relative bearing as reported by the


ALQ-172 systems and at a relative range from the center or the area de-
pending on their received signal strength. The display is a bulls eye con-
sisting of two concentric circles. Signals detected, but below jam thresh-
old, will be displayed in red in the outer ring of the bulls eye. As the signal
strength increases, the symbol will be positioned closer to the inner ring.
When the signal is above jam threshold and actively being jammed, the
symbol color will change to green. If the signal initially does not have a
valid DF report, the symbol will appear in yellow regardless of whether or
not it is being jammed. Signals with invalid DF reports will appear along
the 225° (AFT) or 315° (FWD) azimuth at a relative range based on signal
strength. It will change to the appropriate red or green upon receipt of a
valid DF report from the ALQ-172 systems.
This condition can occur during periods where the signal is above 172
system receiver threshold but not yet above antenna subsystem receiver
threshold or during the signal acquisition interval where the 172 trackers
have not yet established signal tracking gates required by the antenna
system.
A yellow symbol can be displayed at any beam position not just default
if invalid DF report is processed after receipt of a valid DF report. In this
case the symbol will be placed at the last known valid DF position with its
color changing from red or green to yellow until another valid DF report
is received in which case its color will switch back to red or green as ap-
propriate.
Signals detected by the forward system are displayed in the upper he-
misphere. Signals detected by the AFT system are displayed in the lower
hemisphere. The threat symbols that are displayed correspond to the
symbols selected by the mission programmer and correspond to the
threat data programmed into the ALQ-172 mission data file.

8 FWD Subsystem Status Under each subsystem legends i.e. PR (upper left corner) or PD (upper
will indicate the system mode as follows:

Blank Subsystem has not yet timed in, after power up system should time in
within 240 seconds.
STBY (Yellow) Subsystem transmitters have timed in.
OPER (Green) Subsystem transmitters have been placed into operate mode.
JAM (Green) Subsystem transmitters are actively jamming one or more emitters.
HOT (Red) An overtemp or overheat condition has been detected in the FWD sub-
system. This condition can be overridden for 60 seconds by pressing the
OVRD button.
FAIL (Red) An overcurrent condition has been detected in the subsystem transmitter.
When the FAIL indication appears all RF transmissions for that subsys-
tem will be terminated.
9 Special Technique When ALQ-172 is countering a threat requiring use of the special tech-
nique, an indication of this jamming appears in this area. (Refer to
T.O.1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional information)

Figure 1-24B (Sheet 4 of 4)

Change 9 1-72N
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Status Display


DT

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Self Test Status Displays the self test status of each LRU within the ALQ-172 shipset. The
following color convention is utilized:
Green LRU passed and good.
Yellow LRU soft failure detected. At least half the number of channels are still op-
erational.
Red LRU hard failure detected. Subsystem or system associated with LRU or
LRUs is inoperative.
Orange LRU-1 and 10 only. Configuration error detected. OFP, EID or ECM files
do not match correctly. Reported checksum or version number is not cor-
rect. May be a data load problem or hardware problem.
2 System Configuration This area will display the version number of the CDU software resident
in the CDU along with the release date. It will also display the version
number and release date of the HI and LO symbol table files. Also dis-
played by system will be the PR & PD EID version numbers as well as the
overall LRU-1 and LRU-10 software configuration (CFG) number. The
operator should verify that the proper CDU and system software has
been reported prior to performing any further operations with the
ALQ-172 system.
3 1553 Communications If 1553 communication has not been established the words 1553 DIS-
CONNECTED will appear in this area in the color red. The words SELF
TEST IN PROGRESS will appear in the color yellow during system self
test.

Figure 1-24C

1-72P Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Select Key Matrix


DT

Figure 1-24D (Sheet 1 of 4)

Change 9 1-72Q
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Select Key Matrix (Cont)


DT
PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON STATE DESCRIPTIONS

KEY LEGEND FUNCTION KEY LEGEND FUNCTION


AFT Selects/deselects the AFT system. DATA Selecting this button allows the op-
LOAD erator to select a sub-menu for per-
AFT Selecting this button allows the op-
forming data loading via the CDU
ANALYZE erator to view an analyze screen
and 1553 data bus.
for the AFT 172 System which pro-
vides more detailed information on DETAIL Selects a sub-menu.
the fault description. SRU/LRU
DETAILS Selecting this button allows the op-
and probability factor (weighing).
erator to branch to a substate to se-
AFT Displays any errors detected in the lect which system detailed self test
ERRORS AFT System. status results to be viewed.
AFT Displays the results of the AFT ID DIM Selecting this button will decrease
ID request. the light intensity of the program-
mable push button switches. Each
AFT Selecting this button allows the op- selection will result in a further de-
STATUS erator to view the detailed self test crease light intensity.
results for the AFT 172 system as
reported on the 1553 bus. ECM Allows the operator to select/dese-
lect the ECM file for loading or veri-
AFT Displays the results of the AFT ID fying.
SYSTEM request by major function and any
error blocks that were detected. ESCAPE Selecting this button brings the op-
erator to the next highest submenu
BRIGHT Selecting this button will increase level.
the light intensity of the program-
mable pushbutton switches. Each ERROR Selects a sub-menu to display ei-
selection will result in a further in- DETAIL ther the FWD or AFT errors de-
crease in light intensity. tected.
CANCEL Selecting this button returns the FILE SELECT Selecting this button allows the op-
operator to the Situation Display erator to branch to a substate to se-
Screen. lect which database file and high/
OR low state to command the 172
Selecting this button returns the hardware and software.
Operator to the CDUBURN
FILE Selects a sub-menu to alter the de-
Screen. - As applicable
TYPES fault settings.
CHANGE Selects which field to be altered.
FILE 1 Selecting this button selects the
FIELD Default is hours.
FILE 2 database file setting that will be
Six fields can be altered as follows:
recognized by 172 System.
Hours Minutes Seconds (24 Hour
Clock) FWD Selects/deselects the FWD sys-
tem
Month Day Year
FWD Selecting this button allows the op-
Repeated pushing the button will
ANALYZE erator to view an analyze screen
allow the operator to select the
for the FWD 172 System which
next field.
provides more detailed information
CLOSE Allows the operator to stop the Play on the fault description. SRU/LRU
FILE Back function and return to the Sit- and probability factor (weighing).
uation Display Screen.
FWD Displays any errors detected in the
DATA Selects a sub-menu to alter the de- ERRORS FWD System.
FUNCTION fault setting for which data function
to be executed.

Figure 1-24D (Sheet 2 of 4)

1-72R Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

KEY LEGEND FUNCTION KEY LEGEND FUNCTION


FWD Displays the results of the FWD ID MORE Selecting this button at any place in
ID request. the menu will bring the operator
into the next sub-menu or sub-
FWD Selecting this button allows the op- state.
STATUS erator to view the detailed self–test
results for the FWD 172 system as NEW Selecting this button allows the op-
reported on the 1553 bus. RUN erator to branch to a sub-menu to
select Run numbers and mission
FWD Displays the results of the FWD ID numbers for the Record file.
SYSTEM request by major function and any
error blocks that were detected. NUMBER Selecting this button allows the op-
X erator to have a numeric code by
HANDOFF Selecting this button allows the op- displayed for each fault reported.
erator to return to the Handoff Selecting this button again results
menu. in the report reverting back to an X
HANDOFF Selecting this button places the for each fault reported.
FWD diamond symbol around the sym- OK Selecting this button allows the op-
bol of the first threat in the track file. erator to start the Situation Display
Repetitively selecting this button Program.
will place the diamond symbol The PCMCIA card must be re-
around the next threat symbol moved in order for the CDU to boot
entry in the track file. off of internal memory and load the
HANDOFF Selecting this button reverses the Situation Display Program. It takes
REV diamond symbol selection pro- approximately 80 seconds to re-
cess. load the program.
HIGH Selecting this button sets the 172 OFP Allows the operator to select/dese-
LOW system into the proper altitude set- lect the OFP file for loading or veri-
ting which will determine the prop- fying.
er threat jam and lethal thresholds OK Selecting this button allows the op-
as well as priorities. erator to start the Data Load Pro-
ID Provides a summary of the ID re- gram.
SUMMARY quest status reporting PR Configu- The PCMCIA card must be
ration # and Pass/Fail. Any failed installed into the CDU PC drive in
items will appear in Red. order for the Data Load Program to
be loaded into the CDU.
ID Selects a sub-menu to display ei-
DETAIL ther the FWD ID or AFT ID. PAGE DOWN Selecting this button allows the op-
erator to page down through the
ID Selects the ID Request function. text. This button will bring the oper-
REQUEST ator to the bottom of the page.
LAMP Selecting this button causes all pro- PAGE Scrolls down the ID Details screen
TEST grammable pushbutton switches to DOWN to the bottom of the text file.
illuminate with a test pattern that
lights all pixels along with the fail PAGE UP Selecting this button allows the op-
safe button lamps. Depressing any erator to page thru the text. This
programmable pushbutton returns button will bring the operator to the
the operator to the original menu top of the page.
state. PAGE Scrolls up the ID Details screen to
LOAD Selects the Load function. UP the top of the text file.

MIS # Decrements the mission number PLAY BACK Selecting this button allows the op-
–1 each time by 1. FUNCTIONS erator to select the Play Back sub-
menu.
MIS # Increments the mission number
+1 each time by 1. PLAY BACK Selecting this button allows the op-
START erator to start the Play Back of pre-
MISSION Allows the operator to select/dese- viously recorded data. The PC
DATA lect Mission Data File for loading or card with the recorded data must
verifying. be installed in the PC drive for
proper operation.
MISSION Selects a sub-menu to select the
RUN mission or run number.

Figure 1-24D (Sheet 3 of 4)

Change 9 1-72S
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Select Key Matrix (Cont)


DT
KEY LEGEND FUNCTION KEY LEGEND FUNCTION
RECORD Selecting this button will allow the START Selecting this button will result in
FUNCTIONS operator to branch to a sub-menu the OFP/EID/ECM files to be
to enable the record of the 1553 loaded, verified or identified into
messages. the FWD and AFT ALQ-172 Sys-
tems via the CDU 1553 interface.
RECORD Selecting this button stops record-
A typical data load will be com-
OFF ing
pleted in less than 8 minutes. The
RECORD Selecting this button starts record- default options are as follows:
ON ing. File Type: Mission Data
OPEN Returns the operator to the pre- OFP Files
FILE vious sub-menu. ECM Files
System #: FWD System
RETURN Allows the operator to Return to the
AFT System
previous sub-menu.
1553 Functions: Load
RUN Allows the operator to Run the data
in real time. Premature termination of data
OR loading will result in an inoperative
Allows the operator to Run the data software load in the ALQ-172 sys-
load program by selecting a sub- tem.
menu. - As applicable STATUS Selecting this button selects the
RUN Selects a submenu to select the PAGE Self Test Status Page.
MISSION mission number or run number. STEP Allows the operator to Step
RUN Selecting this button allows the op- FORWARD through the data with time incre-
OPTION erator to select a submenu to menting.
change the default options. STEP Allows the operator to Step
RUN # Decrements the run number each REVERSE through the data with time decre-
–1 time by 1. menting.

RUN # Increments the run number each STOP Selecting this button results in the
+1 time by 1. CDUBURN stopping during the
data load operation. Hitting this
SYSTEM Selecting this button provides a top button during loading will result in
SUMMARY level summary of the data being an invalid OFP/EID/ECM load into
loaded or verified into the 172 sys- the 172 systems.
tem
Information presented includes ID SYSTEM Selects a sub-menu to display ei-
code, function, % complete, # er- DETAIL ther the FWD or AFT system de-
rors and status. tails.
VERIFY Selects the verify function.
TIME Selects a sub-menu to set the time
SET and date. VIEW Selects a sub-menu for obtaining
more detailed information con-
SELECT Selects a sub-menu to alter the de-
cerning the data loaded into the
SYSTEM fault settings for which system to
172 System.
be loaded or verified.
–1 Decrements the number by 1.
SITUATION Selecting this button will result in
PAGE the sub-menu for exiting of the +1 Increment the number by 1.
CDUBURN Program and will re-
turn the operator to the Situation
Display Program and situation Dis-
play Screen.
OR
Selecting this button returns the
operator to the situation screen.

Figure 1-24D (Sheet 4 of 4)

1-72T Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Detailed Status Screen


DT

Figure 1-24E

Change 9 1-72U
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT CDU SYMBOL SET To verify all the symbols in the CDU, the hook up of
an external keyboard to the J6 connector is re-
The symbol set used for this configuration is repre- quired. Select the menu item Q and observe the
sented in figure 1-24F. This is the CDU version of symbol set displayed on the CDU.
the Sensor Integration symbol set.

CDU Symbol Set


DT

Figure 1-24F

1-72V Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Less DT NORMAL OPERATION (ALQ-172) STBY in rapid succession (1-2 seconds). During the
autonomous self-test, the applicable FWD and/or
Turn-On Procedures AFT test status indicators will light for the test. All
systems components are checked except for the
Turn-on of the ALQ-172 will be accomplished in high voltage power supply (HVPS) and the high lev-
accordance with the section II procedures. el traveling wave tube amplifiers (HLTWTA), there-
fore, no RF energy is transmitted during this test.
ALQ-172 System Tests The autonomous self-test takes approximately 10
seconds. If malfunctions are detected during the
OPERATOR INITIATED SELF-TEST test, applicable ALQ-172 control indicator fault sta-
tus lights will illuminate along with control monitor
The operator initiated self-test provides an end-to- wedges. To display FWD and/or AFT fault codes on
end checkout of all ALQ-172 system components. It the control monitor the WAR/TRAIN switch must
is conducted during the EW Officer’s Calibration be in TRAIN. To display FWD and/or AFT PR sub-
and Interference check and anytime the EW Officer system faults on the control monitor, the HIGH/
questions system performance. Both forward and LOW MODE switch (1, figure 1-22) must be in
aft systems are calibrated and tested during the HIGH. To display FWD and/or AFT PD subsystem
self-test. The self-test is initiated by pressing the faults on the control monitor, the HIGH/LOW
TEST button on the ALQ-172 control indicator (9 MODE switch (1, figure 1-22) must be in LOW. The
figure 1-22). The ON light in the power switch (6 numbers on the lighted wedges indicate specific
figure 1-22), and the FWD and AFT test status in- malfunctioning LRUs. See Section III for wedge
dicators (16 and 15, figure 1-22) should illuminate value indications.
for the duration of the self-test. The wedges on the
ALQ-172 control monitor (figure 1-23) are num- TEST STATUS INDICATORS
bered and some will illuminate in the forward and
aft sectors during the test, indicating the mission If a failure is detected during either the operator
data software version number. The operator initi- initiated self-test or the autonomous self-test, the
ated self-test takes approximately 10 seconds, dur- TEST STATUS indicators PR (RX and TX), PD/CW
ing which RF energy is transmitted for approxi- (RX and TX), or ANT (EU, R, L, SW) (7 and 10, fig-
mately 1.5 seconds. ure 1-22) will illuminate. If a failure is catastrophic
(hard), the appropriate LRU fail indicator light will
AUTONOMOUS SELF-TEST come on and remain on until power is removed or
another self-test cycle is initiated. In the case of a
An autonomous self-test is automatically initiated hard failure, the associated subsystem is inopera-
every 10 minutes by the ALQ-172 for the respective tive. If a non catastrophic (soft) failure is detected,
system provided that no RF activity has been re- the appropriate fail indicator light will come on, re-
ceived during that time. Additionally, the EW Offi- main on for 5-10 minutes and then go off. A soft
cer can force the ALQ-172 to initiate an autono- failure indicates that the associated system may be
mous self-test by momentarily placing either FWD degraded.
and/or AFT subset from STBY to OPER and back to

Change 9 1-73
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT CDU NORMAL OPERATION (ALQ-172) COLORS

The CDU Program is a control program for the AN/ The most important item concerning the display
ALQ-172 Countermeasures Set. This program is de- test colors is green means no problem exists and
signed to communicate with the ALQ-172 system red means there may be a problem. All failures are
over the 1553B Local Bus that connects the CDU shown in red, normal conditional are shown in
hardware to the systems (figure 1-20A). The CDU green. Yellow is also used throughout the program,
Hardware is connected to the FWD and AFT sometimes it is used just to increase the readability
ALQ-172 Systems and the CDU Program can dis- of the display and other times as a warning. On the
play the information from these systems and con- Situation Page screen, threats that are red are not
trol their reaction to threats in the environment. being jammed, threats that are green are being
jammed. Threats displayed in yellow do not have
NOTE valid DF. On the Status Page screen LRUs that are
red have a hard failure, LRUs that are yellow have
If the ALQ-172 CDU fails both, FWD and a soft failure, LRUs that are orange have a configu-
AFT systems default to the HIGH altitude ration failure and LRUs that are green have no fail-
mode. LOW altitude mode can be selected ures.
for both systems by selecting OVRD LO on
the ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel CDU Altitude SCREEN SWITCHING
Override Switch.
Switching screens can be accomplished by using ei-
Starting The CDU Program ther the pushbuttons or the touch screen. From the
Situation screen, the EW Officer can switch to the
The CDU Program is designed to startup automati- Status screen, by pressing the STATUS PAGE but-
cally from powering on the CDU hardware or upon ton or by touching the screen in the SYSTEM STA-
exiting from the CDUBURN Program as long as TUS box. In order to zoom in on a threat or a region
there is no PCMCIA card inserted into the PCMCIA of the screen the EW Officer can touch the
slot at the front of the CDU hardware. THREAT DATA box on the screen. Touching this re-
gion of the screen again will cause the CDU display
Running The CDU Program to return to normal zoom. From any screen other
then the Situation screen the EW Officer can re-
Once the CDU Program starts there will be a slight turn to the situation screen by touching the bottom
delay as the firmware is loaded onto the 1553 card, right button marked SITUATION PAGE. In order
during this time the screen will display the mes- to return to the Situation screen from the Status
sage CDU PROGRAM LOADING. This is normal screen the EW Officer can just touch the screen.
and may take as long as 1 minute. The screen will The remainder of the screens are only available by
then come up with the Situation Page Screen dis- using the pushbuttons.
played and the programmable pushbuttons will be
illuminated. LAMP TEST

The rest of this section deals with the different op- A lamp test feature in the CDU program allows the
tions available to the EW Officer. EW Officer to test the pixels on a programmable
pushbutton. Pressing the LAMP TEST program-
The CDU Display has some fundamental concepts mable pushbutton on the Status Page lights all of
that need to be understood in order to gain full use the pixels on the pushbuttons. There is also a lamp
of the system. These are for general use throughout test for just the non programmable pushbuttons as
the display and can be used during all the functions part of the CDU hardware. These pushbuttons are
of the CDU. There may be some additional features tested by pressing the CDU Go indicator button.
that are dependent upon specific areas of the CDU When this button is pressed, all of the bulbs inside
Display and these will be handled separately. the fixed switches should light.

1-74 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

HIGH LOW ALTITUDE MODE order to access the time setting feature of the CDU
Program the EW Officer must switch to the Status
The CDU Program is design to control multiple AN/ screen and then press the MORE button repeatedly
ALQ-172 systems. These systems are designed to be until they see the TIME SET button. Pressing this
operated in either high or low altitude modes. Since button will then get the EW Officer to the Time and
the threat priorities and lethality are altitude de- Date screen. The Time and Date may be set to some
pendent, the CDU comes with an option for chang- very odd values or to the correct time depending on
ing the altitude indication to the 172 system. In or- the CPU BIOS. By using the CHANGE FIELD but-
der to change the altitude setting the EW Officer ton along with the -1 and +1 buttons the EW Offi-
must press the FILE SELECT button from the Sit- cer can set the time and date. When the time and
uation screen. This button will bring up a new set date are set properly, the EW Officer can press the
of buttons, including one that has a HIGH LOW SITUATION PAGE button to return to normal op-
displayed on it. Pressing this button will change the erations. Any power interruption will cause the
altitude setting for the AN/ALQ-172 systems. The CDU Hardware to lose track of the time and there-
Situation screen displays the altitude in the top of fore the time must be reset after any power inter-
the SYSTEM STATUS box. The altitude is shown in ruption. The CDU will also obtain time from the
yellow if the altitude that the CDU Program is OAS NAV bus. If time is available on the NAV bus,
sending agrees with the altitude that the system is the CDU will display this time. The CDU will check
reporting, and red if they disagree. It is normal for for time from the OAS bus every 10 minutes and
the color to change to red and then back to yellow will re-synchronize if required. However, once time
as the system processes the pressing of the HIGH is set, either from operator setting or automatically
LOW button. It will also transition during 172 sys- via OAS bus, the CDU will continue to increment
tem selftest. The CDU will always report the actual time as long as power is applied. The date must al-
ALQ-172 altitude mode. If the ALQ-172 Auxiliary ways be entered manually.
Panel CDU Altitude Override switch is set to
OVRD LO with the CDU set to HIGH, the CDU will Threats
display LOW in red to indicate the systems are in
LOW and that a discrepancy between the CDU The purpose of the CDU Display is to provide the
commanded mode and the 172 system operational EW Officer with situation awareness about the
mode has been detected. threats in the environment, threat parameters as
well as status of the ALQ-172 systems.
EID FILES
SELECTING THREATS AND THREAT HANDOFF
The ALQ-172 system is loaded with two database
files when the software is loaded. These settings al- There are two ways to select a threat, the easiest
low the operator to change the parameters in which and most direct method involves touching the sym-
threats are characterized. In order to change the bol on the screen of the threat you want to identify.
database setting the EW Officer must press the When a threat is selected it will be surrounded by a
FILE SELECT button from the Situation screen. purple diamond. The selected threat symbol is dis-
This button will bring up a new set of buttons, in- played under the corresponding frequency in the
cluding one that has a FILE 1 FILE 2 displayed on frequency display field. The threats can also be se-
it. Pressing this button will change the database lected using the handoff commands. The handoff
file for the AN/ALQ-172 systems. The Situation commands go through the list of active threats and
screen displays the file in the top of the SYSTEM selects the next or last selected threat until the end
STATUS box. The file number is shown in yellow. of the list is reached at which point it wraps
around. The HANDOFF FWD and the HANDOFF
CDU TIME REV buttons allow the EW Officer to go through
the list in forward or reverse order. The threat in-
The CDU Hardware has no internal battery and formation for the selected threat is displayed in the
can not keep time when the power is shut off on the box on the lower right side of the Situation screen.
unit. Upon initial power-up, time will read
00:00:00. In order to still be able to have the correct If only one symbol is present on the display, the
time for recording purposes the EW Officer can set symbol will automatically be selected and its corre-
the time using the programmable pushbuttons. In sponding data displayed in the threat data field.

Change 9 1-74A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

SYSTEM STATUS BOX In order to access the record feature of the CDU
Program the EW Officer must switch to the Status
In order to determine the number of threats in the screen and then press the MORE button repeatedly
environment and whether they are PR or PD until they see the RECORD FUNCTIONS button.
threats the EW Officer can look at the SYSTEM Pressing this button will allow the EW Officer to
STATUS box (2, figure 1-24B) on the upper right access the recording options. The EW Officer should
corner of the Situation screen. This box shows the then press the NEW RUN button which will allow
forward and aft system followed by a green bar sep- the EW Officer to select a file name that is not be-
arated for PR and PD threats. For each threat that ing used. This is done by pressing the RUN # +1,
is being tracked by the system a yellow box is RUN # -1, MIS # +1, and MIS # -1 buttons. Press-
placed in the green bar under the appropriate ing the MISSION RUN button will allow the EW
threat type. The number of yellow boxes in the Officer to switch between changing the mission
green bar indicates the number of tracked threats. number and the run number. The file name, e.g.,
For the PR subsystem only, a red box will appear if RUN01M02.DAT, where 01 is the run number and
a channel has been disabled due to a self test fault 02 is the mission number, will be displayed in the
detect. File status box on the lower right corner of the Situ-
ation screen. Below the file name will either be the
THREAT INFORMATION BOX recording time left on the drive, a warning that the
file name already exists, or a warning that there is
The CDU Display is designed to give much more de- not enough room available on the drive to record. If
tailed information about the threat environment the file name exists the operator must change the
than the Indicator Monitor. This information is ob- name of the file, or else the recording will not be
tained by selecting a threat as described above. The started. Once the file name has been chosen, the
threat that is selected will then have detailed infor- EW Officer should press the OPEN FILE button
mation appear about it in the threat data field on which will bring the EW Officer back to the pre-
the lower right corner of the Situation screen (3, vious button state. The CDU Program will not be-
figure 1-24B). Along with the threat data, informa- gin recording until after the RECORD ON button
tion can be obtained about a threats frequency, its has been pressed. After the recording has started,
relative amplitude and the system frequency limits. the bottom line of the System Status box on the Sit-
This information is displayed along the bottom edge uation page will show the current PC time in green
of the screen. All of the threats are displayed along followed by the letters REC in red to show that the
this bar graph of frequency with the height of the system is recording.
lines referring to their signal strength. The selected
threat will always have its symbol displayed below In order to access the playback feature of the CDU
its frequency bar. Program the EW Officer must switch to the Status
screen and then press the MORE button repeatedly
Record and Playback until they see the PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS but-
ton. Pressing this button will allow the EW Officer
The CDU Display is designed with record and play- to access the playback options. The EW Officer
back features to allow the EW Officer to record data must select a file name that exists in order to use
from a flight and then later play back the data that the playback feature. This is done by pressing the
was recorded. The CDU can also play files that RUN # +1, RUN # -1, MIS # +1, and MIS # -1 but-
were recorded using the 50 series of the existing PC tons. Pressing the MISSION RUN button will allow
based Forcing Function/Status Display/Enhanced the EW Officer to switch between changing the mis-
Diagnostics (FF/SD/ED) program and the FF/SD/ sion number and the run number. The file name,
ED program can playback files that were recorded e.g., RUN01M02.DAT, where 01 is the run number
with the CDU Program. The CDU Program records and 02 is the mission number, will be displayed in
information onto a PCMCIA card that must be in- the File status box on the lower right corner of the
serted into the PCMCIA slot on the front of the Situation screen. Below the file name will be a
CDU hardware. In order to maintain the compati- warning that the file name does not exist if the file
bility with the FF/SD/ED program the CDU does is not found.
not record any information from the OAS 1553A
Bus.

1-74B Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

After selecting a valid file name, the EW Officer button will allow the EW Officer to exit the pro-
should press the PLAYBACK START button which gram and start the CDUBURN Program for loading
will allow the EW Officer to playback the file. The the ALQ-172 systems.
time that the file was started followed by the letters
PLY will appear in green on the bottom line of the NOTE
System Status box on the Situation page. The file is
currently paused, in order to start the file playing Insert the PCMCIA card part number side
the EW Officer should first select the direction by up into the slot before reboot begins. This
pressing either the STEP FWD or STEP REV but- allows the CDU hardware to reboot to the
ton. The EW Officer can then continue to step CDUBURN program. If the PCMCIA card
through the file or press the RUN button to allow containing the CDUBURN program is not
the file to run automatically. Upon reaching the end inserted at this time the CDU hardware
of the file, the file will wrap around to the begin- will reboot to the CDU Display.
ning. In order to stop playback the EW Officer
should press the CLOSE FILE button. This will Fail Safe Mode
close the playback file and return the CDU Pro-
gram to normal operation. If the CDU processor fails for any reason, the CDU
Hardware will default to a fail safe mode with only
NOTE the four fail safe switches available. The default
states will be:
During playback there is no 1553 bus com-
munication. The current signal environ- Altitude = HIGH
ment, ALQ-172 system status and NAV
data will not be displayed. All non-program- Database File = FILE #1
mable switches are operational.
STBY/OPER = OPERATE (The Master STBY/
Entering Data Load Function OPER switch can override this default to STBY)
In order to exit the CDU Program the EW Officer NOTE
must switch to the Status screen and then press the
MORE button repeatedly until they see the DATA The Master STBY/OPER switch must re-
LOAD button. The DATA LOAD button will then main in STBY until all systems time in to
move, and needs to be pressed again. This is to en- STBY mode as displayed on the CDU
sure that the button was not accidentally pressed. screen. Placing a subsystem into OPER be-
If the DATA LOAD button is pressed again dialog fore the STBY time in occurs can result in
box will appear on the screen prompting the EW transmitter self test errors.
Officer to insert the PCMCIA card containing the
CDUBURN program into the PCMCIA slot. Once
this is done, the EW Officer should press the OK
button or touch OK on the screen. Pressing this

Change 9 1-74C
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Keyboard Commands And Screens 9 Open Playback File

There are also keyboard commands that can be Ctrl-o Open File Dialog Box for selecting a
used on the CDU program when an external key- playback file
board is attached to the CDU. The keys are ex- Ctrl-f Show Status Dialog Box
plained in the appendix.
Ctrl-c Close file
KEYBOARD COMMANDS Ctrl-r Run

Short-cut keys when CDU is being used with a key- Alt-4 1/4 Speed
board Alt-2 1/2 Speed

SCREENS: Alt-1 Normal Speed


Alt-D 2 * Speed
s Status Screen
Alt-Q 4 * Speed
f Fwd System Details Screen
a Aft System Details Screen RECORD and PLAYBACK:

d Display Situation Screen 5 Run Number + 1


h Help Screen - Show keyboard commands 6 Run Number - 1
c CDU Fault Matrix 7 Mission Number + 1
u Show Fault Analysis screen 8 Mission Number - 1
p Alignment Procedures OTHER:
q Show Symbol Table
Alt-Z Zoom
ESC Display Situation Screen
Alt-B Select Back
RECORDING: Alt-G Get Data From System
0 Choose Recording File Name Alt-A Dump ATF
Alt-R Record Start Alt-S Select Next
1 New Run Alt-x Exit

PLAYBACK: PGUP Page up for fault analysis screen


PGDN Page down for fault analysis screen
2 Forward Step
3 Reverse Step
4 Run
– Choose Playback File Name

1-74D Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A Control-Monitor (C-9040/ALQ-122)


COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEM
The control-monitor (figure 1-26) interfaces with
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION the processor and provides remote operator control
and surveillance of system operation during normal
The AN/ALQ-122 countermeasures set is an air- operation and during self-test.
borne receiver-processor system that is integrated
with two AN/ALT-16A transmitter sets to make up Duplexer (CU-2030/ALQ-122)
the AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A countermeasures
system. The system includes one R-1787/ALQ-122 The AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A countermeasures set
receiver, one MX-9187/ ALQ-122 processor, one requires two duplexers, one aft and one forward.
C-9040/ALQ-122 control-monitor, two CU-2030/ Both duplexers are identical and interchangeable.
ALQ-122 duplexers (aft and forward), one CU-
2137A/ALQ-122 directional coupler, two T-787A/ Directional Coupler (CU-2137A/ALQ-122)
ALT-16A radio transmitters (systems 9 and 21), two
AM-2714A/ALT-16A RF amplifiers, two C-3358/ The directional coupler is used to combine and
ALT-16 control-indicators, one attenuator, one normalize the received RF signals from the forward
bandpass filter, two composite filters, one AS-3087A and aft duplexers. The combined signal from the
antenna located in the nose radome, and two directional coupler output port is routed to the RF
AT-1102/A antennas, one located at station 1342 top input of the receiver. The received signal from the
centerline and one at station 1374 bottom forward duplexer (nose antenna), having the great-
centerline of the section 47 fuselage. est cable loss, is connected directly to the summing
port of the coupler. The signal from the aft duplexer
The AN/ALQ-122 set is used with two slightly mod- is connected to the coupled port through an exter-
ified AN/ALT-16 transmitter sets which are desig- nal fixed attenuator selected to balance the forward
nated AN/ALT-16A. The AN/ALT-16A retains all and aft signal levels to the receiver.
the capabilities of the AN/ALT-16, such as the 10
channel selection in the barrage (backup) mode. Radio Transmitter (T-787A/ALT-16A)
However, the AN/ALT-16A has been modified to
accept selected drive signals from the AN/ALQ-122 The transmitter is comprised of low-level circuits
in the AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A normal mode. In that generate broadband barrage noise, multiplier
the normal mode, the AN/ALT-16A transmitters lin- circuits that multiply the input signals from the
early amplify the low level signals from the receiver low-level circuits to the output frequency and that
to the desired transmit power level. To utilize com- also provide channelization, and driver circuits in
plete normal mode system operation, the AN/ which a traveling-wave tube (TWT) is used as a low
ALQ-122 control-monitor MODE switch must be power amplifier.
switched to XMIT position, and the two AN/ALT-16
control-indicator function switches must be placed Radio Frequency Amplifier (AM-2714A/ALT-16A)
in TRANSMIT. The AN/ALT-16A cannot be oper-
ated in the barrage (backup) mode unless the AN/ The solid state amplifier consists of a high power
ALQ-122 system is turned off. RF assembly, a power supply, and a control assem-
bly.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Control-Indicator (C-3358/ALT-16)
See figure 1-25 for component location. The T-787A/
ALT-16A radio transmitters are connected to the The control-indicator (figure 1-26) provides the nec-
AN/ALR-20A receiver to provide look through essary controls for activating the transmitter and
operation. During look through operation, the AN/ amplifier from a remote location, and consists of
ALR-20A receiver sends blanking pulses to the switching circuitry, a relative power indicating
transmitters which turns the transmitters off for meter, indicating lights for providing visual infor-
short durations of time. mation as to sequences of transmitter and amplifier
operation and panel lights for illuminating front
panel markings and controls.

1-75
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

System Signal Flow is fed to the section 47 bottom antenna while the
forward AN/ALT-16A (system 21) output power is
In the receive mode, RF signals are routed from the fed to the directional nose antenna in the nose
antennas to the aft and forward duplexers through radome.
connectors J7 and/or J9 (aft) or J7 (fwd), and are
routed by internal switching circuits to duplexer BUILT-IN TEST EQUIPMENT (BITE) SELF-TEST
output connectors J5. The received RF signals from
the J5 connectors of the aft and forward duplexers The AN/ALQ-122 set has a self-test capability
are routed to the directional coupler where they are which includes 1) a manual control panel lamp test,
combined to provide RF inputs to the receiver. RF and 2) an automatic test sequence using BITE. The
signals are generated at a low level by the receiver lamp test is used to verify proper operation of con-
and are then routed to receptacle J111 on the trol-monitor lamps and driver circuits. The auto-
selected aft (system 9) or forward (system 21) AN/ matic BITE self-test sequence provides an end-to-
ALT-l6A transmitter. The signal is amplified by the end checkout (except for antennas and their associ-
transmitter, routed to the RF amplifier for further ated RF transmission lines) of the entire counter-
linear amplification, and is then coupled to J4 of measures system. The self-test sequence comprises
the aft or forward duplexers. The duplexers route 12 steps which test the system ability to acquire
the RF to either connector J7 or J9 of the aft and track a test signal in each threat channel and
duplexer, or J7 of the forward duplexer, where it is operate in both ECM modes, plus the capability of
fed out to the appropriate antenna. When the AN/ automatically selecting the optimum antenna for
ALT-16A is used with the AN/ALQ-122 in off condi- each threat.
tion, the aft AN/ALT-16A (system 9) output power

1-76
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-122/ALT-16A Component Locations

Figure 1-25 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Change 9 1-77
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-122/ALT-16A Component Locations (Cont)

Figure 1-25 (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-78
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A Controls and Indicators

C-9040/ALQ-122 CONTROL-MONITOR

1 SIGNAL ACTIVITY 6 PROGRAM SWITCH


2 STATUS LIGHTS 7 MODE SWITCH
3 TEST NO-GO LIGHT 8 POWER SWITCH
4 LAMP TEST SWITCH 9 TEST IN PROG SWITCH
5 COVER SWITCH 10 FAULT LIGHTS

Figure 1-26 (Sheet 1 of 4)

1-79
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A Controls and Indicators


(Cont)

C-3358/ALT-16 CONTROL-INDICATOR

11 CHANNEL SELECTOR BUTTONS (1-10) 15 STANDBY LIGHT


12 POWER SWITCH 16 WARM UP LIGHT
13 FAULT LIGHT 17 POWER MONITOR METER
14 RADIATE LIGHT 18 VSWR BUTTON

Figure 1-26 (Sheet 2 of 4)

1-80
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

C-9040/ALQ-122 CONTROL-MONITOR

1 SIGNAL ACTIVITY Lights A description of the function of these lights during normal operation is
contained in T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1. During self-test sequence, these lights
provide an indication of the test step being exercised. Steps above 8 are
indicated by two indicators, e.g.. step 9 – 1 and 8 lights.

2 STATUS Lights The four green indicators provide indication of system status during nor-
mal operation or self-test as follows:

RX Light Comes on when the receiver is generating an ECM drive signal to excite
the AN/ALT-16A transmitters.

DUP Light Comes on to indicate AN/ALT-16A transmitter RF power is being supplied


to the antenna(s) by one or more duplexer output ports. This indicator
therefore comes on whenever the system is transmitting against a threat
and when transmitting during steps 5 thru 8 of the BITE sequence.

16F and 16R Lights Come on to indicate the forward (16F) and the aft (16R) AN/ALT-16A sets
are in TRANSMIT and ready to amplify the low level ECM drive from the
receiver.

3 TEST NO-GO Light This white light comes on to indicate a fail condition during the BITE auto-
matic sequence. This indicator is automatically extinguished when the
TEST IN PROG switch is momentarily depressed.

4 LAMP TEST Switch When held depressed, all control-monitor lights should be on verifying
lamp circuit operation.

5 COVER Switch Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for a description of switch operation.

6 PROGRAM Switch Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for a description of switch operation.

7 MODE Switch When momentarily depressed, switches set to either standby (STBY) or
transmit (XMIT) mode. In STBY (amber light), the set remains warmed up
and ready for operation. In XMIT (green light), the set is enabled for full
operation. At turn-on, the set always goes to STBY mode.

8 POWER Switch When momentarily depressed, alternately applies or removes power to


the AN/ALQ-122 set. Power on is indicated by the green ON indicator
coming on. The blue WARM UP indicator is on during set warmup and
goes out after a 5-minute maximum warmup period.

Figure 1-26 (Sheet 3 of 4)

1-81
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A Controls and Indicators


(Cont)
CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

9 TEST IN PROG Switch When momentarily depressed, switch initiates the automatic self-test
sequence. Green TEST IN PROG light should be on during this
sequence. Upon detection of a fail condition during self-test, the
sequence will halt. When this occurs, depressing TEST IN PROG switch
causes test sequence to continue through remaining steps until another
failure is noted or test sequence is completed (TEST IN PROG light goes
out).

10 FAULT Lights The four white indicators come on to indicate a fault in the receiver (RX),
processor (PR), forward duplexer (DF), and aft duplexer (DR).

C-3358/ALT-16 CONTROL-INDICATOR

11 Channel Selector Buttons Used to select channels for jamming. When depressed, dc power is fed
to brightly illuminate the button light, and provides a ground for the power
supplied to the respective channel multiplier allowing it to function. Press-
ing and releasing the button a second time deactivates the respective
channel.

12 Power Selector Used to select the application of power to the transmitter. STANDBY posi-
tion supplies power to illuminate the indicator lights. TRANSMIT position
supplies power to place the transmitter in operation. OFF & RESET posi-
tion disconnects all operating power and initiates a 3-minute cooling
cycle.

13 Fault Light A white light, when illuminated, indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
This light will not illuminate in event of a RF power output fault.

14 Radiate Light A green light, when illuminated, indicates that the system should be
radiating.

15 Standby Light An amber light, when illuminated, indicates that the power selector is in
STANDBY and the system is ready to transmit.

16 Warmup Light Not Used

17 Power Monitor Meter Not Used

18 VSWR Button Not Used

Figure 1-26 (Sheet 4 of 4)

1-82
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-153(V) TAIL WARNING SYSTEM solid state transmit modules, two low noise ampli-
fier (LNA) modules, an input power splitter, and an
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION output power combiner/left-right switch. The trans-
mit modules serve as RF power amplifiers in trans-
The AN/ALQ-153 Tail Warning System is a solid mit and the LNAs serve as receiver preamplifiers in
state pulse Doppler radar consisting of two anten- receive. The input power splitter splits drive power
nas, a radar receiver-transmitter (RRT), a digital to the two transmit modules and the output power
data signal processor (DDSP), an analog data sig- combiner combines the output of the transmit mod-
nal processor (ADSP), and a control-indicator (fig- ules and switches the transmit energy for transmis-
ure 1-28). The system utilizes digital signal process- sion by the selected antenna. RF excitation, control
ing to detect and warn against missile and aircraft signals, and power for the receiver/transmitter is
threats to the rear of the aircraft. Threats are indi- furnished by the ADSP. In receive, the LNA mod-
cated by an audio warning tone as well as indicator ules amplify the signals from the antennas and
lights. When an aircraft is detected, a light on the transmit these received signals to the receiver in
control-indicator (figure 1-28) comes on to indicate the analog signal processor. A receiver multiplexer
the range window of the threat. When a missile is switches the receive energy between the left and
detected, the left or right missile light (LMSL or right LNA pairs. The receiver/ transmitter also has
RMSL) comes on to indicate the tail sector in which a built-in test (BIT) assembly for detecting faults.
the missile is located. At the same time, the range
indicator comes on and the missile warning tone is Digital Data Signal Processor (CV-3438/ALQ-153(V))
heard through the aircraft interphone system.
When the missile approaches a selected range or The DDSP (figure 1-27) is located in the aft
time (whichever provides the least time remaining), unpressurized section of the aircraft. The unit con-
a countermeasures trigger (CM TRIG) light comes sists of a digital signal processor, a power supply,
on to indicate that a countermeasures dispense and a power contactor. The purpose of the digital
(CMD) pulse has been generated. The CMD pulse data signal processor is to discriminate between
can be utilized to initiate defensive action against missile and aircraft targets and to provide range
the missile by releasing flares, chaff, or both flares information (missile targets only) to the Control/
and chaff. A continuous built-in-test (BIT) is acti- Indicator Panel. The DDSP provides the following
vated when the system is in OPER and will cause eight functions:
the malfunction (MALF) light to come on if a mal-
function occurs. When the MALF light comes on, 1. The synchronizer generates the precision tim-
the RRT, ADSP, or DDSP light comes on to indicate ing signals for all units in the system.
the component in which the fault has occurred. A 2. It computes the Doppler offset of main-beam
HOT or PWR light will come on if the system shuts clutter based on horizontal speed received from an
down due to overheat or power faults. An operator external source.
initiated BIT procedure may be performed after 3. The Doppler filter resolution necessary to dis-
warmup to provide limited verification of proper criminate among returns from missiles, aircraft,
system operation. The system receives three-phase and clutter.
ac power and 28 volt dc power from the aircraft and 4. Constant False Alarm Rate (CFAR) and post-
directs it to power supplies in the DDSP and ADSP. processing provide a “floating” or “adaptive” detec-
tion threshold which allows extremely low false
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
alarm rates.
Antenna (AS-3193/ALQ-153(V)) 5. It provides target identification and measure-
ment in which detected targets are centroided in
Two antennas located on the left and right side of range and Doppler. Identification tests are made to
the vertical stabilizer (figure 1-27) look aft and out- discriminate between aircraft and missile returns.
board. These antennas are alternately selected by Target azimuth is calculated for missiles (left, right
the RRT. determination) in which the amplitudes of the left
and right sum channels are compared to provide an
Radar Receiver-Transmitter (RT1239/ALQ-153(V)) indication of target location. A trigger pulse for the
aircraft CMD is generated based on the present
The RRT (figure 1-27) is located forward of the control panel settings (range and/or time-to-impact
antennas in the vertical stabilizer. It consists of two control) and the system status data for display.

1-83
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

6. The Noise Automatic Gain Control (NAGC) supplies power to the ADSP and for the receiver/
loop periodically samples the level of the detected transmitter.
noise from the receiver and holds the noise level
constant via gain control feed-back to the receiver. The ADSP performs the following four functions:
7. BIT control and fault isolation controls the
1. The multifrequency STALO provides the stable
timing of system BIT and accumulates the results
system clock signal, the transmit RF drive signal,
of independent BIT within each of the Line
and the three Local Oscillator (LO) signals to the
Replaceable Unit (LRUs) to output a signal indicat-
two-channel receiver.
ing overall system status as well as to throw fault
flags in the LRUs. 2. The triple-conversion receiver provides amplifi-
cation, filtering, and mixing of the radar return sig-
8. DDSP power supply accepts prime power
nal down to baseband and produces I (in-phase)
(28-volt dc and 400 Hz three-phase ac) and controls
and Q (quadrature) signals for each of the sum and
power distribution of the ALQ-153 via contactors,
difference inputs.
as well as providing regulated dc power for the
DDSP. 3. The sampled data assembly provides analog-
to-digital conversion of the four video channel sig-
Analog Data Signal Processor CV-3439/ALQ-153(V) nals from the receiver.
4. The ADSP power supply provides regulated dc
The ADSP (figure 1-27) consists of a dual channel power to other subassemblies within the ADSP as
receiver, a stable local oscillator (STALO), four ana- well as to the RRT assembly.
log-to-digital (A/D) converters, (SAMPLE DATA
UNIT), and a power supply. The sample Data Unit Control Indicator C-10259/ALQ-153(V)
converts the four channels of video information
from the receiver-to digital information for the digi- The control-indicator (figure 1-28) interfaces the
tal data signal processor (DDSP). The STALO pro- tail warning system with the operator and provides
vides RF excitation for the receiver/transmitter, system mode control, fault status, as well as coun-
local oscillator signals for the receiver in the ADSP, termeasures control and target display. See figure
and clock signals for the DDSP. The power supply 1-28 for control and indicator functions.

1-84
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-153(V) Component Locations

Figure 1-27

1-85
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-153(V) Controls and Indicators

1 LEFT SECTOR INDICATOR 13 RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER/DIGITAL SIGNAL


2 TIME TO IMPACT (TTI) ROTARY SWITCH PROCESSOR MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
3 MISSILE RANGE INDICATOR 14 PUSH-TO-TEST TONE CONTROL
4 COUNTERMEASURES TRIGGER INDICATOR 15 HIGH/LOW ALTITUDE SELECTOR SWITCH
5 RIGHT SECTOR INDICATOR 16 TEMPERATURE/POWER MALFUNCTION
6 RANGE INDICATOR 0-3 INDICATOR & OVERRIDE SELECTOR SWITCH
7 JAM INDICATOR 17 OPERATE/STANDBY SELECTOR PUSHBUTTON
8 MINIMUM RANGE THRESHOLD SELECTOR 18 POWER PUSHBUTTON SWITCH
9 MINIMUM RANGE SELECTOR/SWITCH 19 TEST AND/OR MALFUNCTION SELECTOR
10 HOMING DEFEAT SELECTOR PUSHBUTTON SWITCH/INDICATOR
11 PUSH-TO-TEST LAMPS CONTROL 20 TIME TO IMPACT ENABLE-INHIBIT SELECT
12 ANALOG DATA SIGNAL PROCESSOR SWITCH/INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR 21 RANGE INDICATOR 3-6

Figure 1-28 (Sheet 1 of 5)

1-86
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Left Sector Indicator (Red) An illuminated L MSL lamp indicates a confirmed missile in the left tail
sector.

2 Time-To-Impact (TTI) Rotary Switch A 10-position rotary switch for the selection of a TTI threshold. The setting
of this switch is determined by mission requirements, In the event of a
missile threat, when the time-to-impact is equal to or less than the
selected time, a CM dispense pulse is automatically sent to the counter-
measure dispenser (CMD) if the TTI ENAB lamp is illuminated. An illumi-
nated CM TRIG lamp indicates that a CM dispense pulse has been initi-
ated. Pressing the TTI ENAB/INHBT switch disables this function and illu-
minates the INHBT lamp.

3 Missile RANGE Indicator A two digit readout provides missile range. The L MSL, R MSL, and
RANGE is displayed only for the missile which presents the most immi-
nent threat. If the system loses detection of a missile, the MSL lamp and
the last range readout holds for a 3 second period unless a new missile
threat is detected, at which time the CIP will update and display the new
target information.

4 Countermeasures Trigger Indicator When the ALQ-153 initiates a CM dispense pulse the CM TRIG lamp illu-
(Green) minates for a 1 second period.

5 Right Sector Indicator (Red) An illuminated R MSL lamp indicates a confirmed missile in right tail sec-
tor. Both L and R MSL lamps illuminated indicate detection of a missile
within sector of the tail centerline.

6 Range Indicator (Green) 0-3 If illuminated indicates an aircraft or an unconfirmed missile within a given
range.

7 JAM Indicator (Amber) This lamp illuminates when the system senses an increase in the receiver
noise level induced by external sources which significantly degrades the
system performance.

8 Minimum Range Threshold Selector MIN RNG is a 10-position rotary switch for selection of a minimum range
threshold. The setting of this switch is determined by mission require-
ments. In the event of a missile threat, when the minimum range is equal
to or less than the selected range, a CM dispense pulse is automatically
sent to the countermeasure dispenser (CMD) if the MIN RNG ENAB lamp
is illuminated. An illuminated CM TRIG lamp indicates that a CM dispense
pulse has been initiated. Pressing the MIN RNG ENAB/INHBT switch dis-
ables this function and illuminates the INHBT lamp.

9 Minimum Range Selector Switch Operation of this control described as part of Minimum Range Threshold
Selector (No. 8).

ENAB (Enable) (Green) The ENAB light is on when MIN RNG is enabled (see No.8)

INHBT (Inhibit) (Amber) The INHBT light is on when MIN RNG is inhibited (see No.8)

Figure 1-28 (Sheet 2 of 5)

1-87
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-153(V) Controls and Indicators (Cont)


CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

10 HOMING DEFEAT Selector Pushbutton When enabled, this mode automatically inhibits system RF radiation for
a given period after a CM dispense pulse has been initiated. When defeat
mode is enabled, the HOMING DEFEAT lamp is illuminated. Pressing the
HOMING DEFEAT lamp switch the second time disables this function
and extinguishes the HOMING DEFEAT lamp.

11 Push-To-Test LAMPS Control A push-to-test function for lamp checkout. In addition, provides rotary
control to adjust the intensity of all CIP lamps. Lamp test does not inter-
rupt normal system operation or initiate any mode change.

12 Analog Data Signal Processor Malfunc- An illuminated ADSP lamp indicates a malfunction in the unit. When the
tion (ADSP) Indicator (White) HOT lamp is also illuminated this indicates a temperature problem in the
LRU. If the MALF lamp is illuminated, the ADSP lamp indicates a unit fail-
ure as detected by built-in-test (BIT). If the system has automatically
cycled into standby it can be reset by pressing the OPER switch.

13 Malfunction Indicators

Radar Receiver/Transmitter (R/T) An illuminated R/T lamp indicates a malfunction in the unit. When the
(White) HOT lamp is also illuminated this indicates a temperature problem in the
LRU. If the MALF lamp is illuminated, the R/T lamp indicates a unit failure
as detected by built-in-test (BIT). If the system has automatically cycled
into standby it can be reset by depressing the OPER switch.

Digital Signal Processor (DSP) An illuminated DSP lamp indicates a malfunction in the unit. When the
Indicator (White) HOT lamp is also illuminated this indicates a temperature problem in the
LRU. If the MALF lamp is illuminated, the DDSP lamp indicates a unit fail-
ure as detected by built-in-test (BIT). If the system has automatically
cycled into standby it can be reset by depressing the OPER switch.

14 Push-To-Test TONE Control A push-to-test function for tone checkout. In addition, provides rotary con-
trol to adjust the tone volume. Tone should be present at EW, Gunner, and
Dl stations. Tone test does not interrupt normal system operation or initi-
ate any mode change.

15 High/Low Altitude (HI ALT/LOW ALT) This switch and lamp combination is a manual aircraft altitude input to the
Selector Switch radar. HI ALT is selected when the aircraft is at 4000 feet AGL or above.

Figure 1-28 (Sheet 3 of 5)

1-88
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

16 Temperature/Power Malfunction
Indicator & Override Selector Switch

Temperature Indicator (HOT) An illuminated HOT lamp indicates that one of the system thermal inter-
(White) locks is open (no-go condition). When the HOT lamp is illuminated the
appropriate LRU lamp (ADSP, R/T, or DDSP} also illuminates, indicating
which unit is overheated. A “hot” condition automatically results in the
system power contactor being deenergized, removing input power to all
units. Once the temperature problem has been corrected, the system
automatically sequences into the standby mode if the power is on. In the
event of an emergency, this function can be disabled for the R/T and
ADSP by the OVRD, but cannot be disabled for the DDSP.

Power Malfunction Indicator (PWR) An illuminated PWR lamp indicates the input power to the system is
(White) unsatisfactory or not present. An absent phase or a voltage greater than
130 vac phase to neutral, supplied via the three-phase power source
would illuminate the PWR lamp. When the PWR lamp is illuminated, the
power contactor is deenergized. In the event of an emergency this func-
tion can be disabled by the OVRD switch.

Override Selector Pushbutton Pressing the OVRD switch disables the R/T and ADSP thermal inter-
Switch (OVRD) (Amber) locks, but does not disable the DDSP thermal interlock. It also disables
the input power monitor interlock, initiated BIT. lamp test, and tone test
functions, and prevents reversion to STBY upon BIT fault. An illuminated
OVRD lamp indicates that the override function has been initiated. Press-
ing the OVRD switch a second time extinguishes the OVRD lamp and dis-
ables the override function. The switch inhibits the automatic sequencing
from operate to standby mode in the event of a system malfunction.

17 Standby/(STBY) (Amber) An illuminated STBY lamp indicates the system is ready to be placed into
Operate (OPER) (Green) the operate mode. When the STBY lamp is illuminated, pressing the
Pushbutton Switch STBY/OPER switch automatically puts the system in the operate mode.
The STBY lamp extinguishes and the OPER lamp illuminates. During the
transitions the MALF light will illuminate. When in the operate mode
depressing the STBY/OPER switch returns the system to standby. When
the system is in the OPER mode it automatically goes to standby after the
TEST switch is pressed and the test is performed or if a system malfunc-
tion occurs, unless the OVRD button is depressed.

18 POWER Pushbutton Switch (White) The POWER switch controls system input power. Pressing the POWER
switch applies power to the CIP circuitry and energizes the power
contactor located in the DDSP. Once the power contactor has energized
the POWER & MALF lamps illuminate. The POWER and MALF lamps
remain illuminated during the warmup period. The warmup cycle requires
130 seconds if the system is turned on cold or 42 seconds if the system
has been off a short time. After the warmup cycle is completed, the
POWER and MALF lamps automatically extinguish and the STBY lamp
illuminates.

Figure 1-28 (Sheet 4 of 5)

1-89
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-153(V) Controls and Indicators (Cont)


CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

19 Test and/or Malfunction Selector


Switch/Indicator

TEST (Green) Pressing the TEST switch initiates an operator confidence test of the sys-
tem countermeasures (CM) pulse. The TEST and OPER lamp illumi-
nates and the system automatically cycles into the standby (non-radiat-
ing) mode. During this test the CM pulse to the aircraft is disabled. Missile
range is counted down until the preselected minimum range (MIN RNG)
and time-to-impact (TTI) is reached. When this occurs the CM TRIG lamp
illuminates for a 1 second period. This is a test of the DDSP and DDSP/
CIP interfaces.

System Malfunction Indicator An illuminated MALF lamp indicates a system malfunction as detected by
(White) built -in-test (BIT). When the MALF lamp illuminates, the system automat-
ically cycles into the standby mode unless it is in OVRD.

20 Time-To-Impact Enable-Inhibit Select Operation of this control described as part of Time-To-Impact (TTI) Rotary
Switch/Indicator Switch (No. 2).

ENAB (Enable) (Green) The ENAB light is on when TTI is enabled (see No.2)

INHBT (inhibit) (Amber) The INHBT light is on when TTI is inhibited (see No.2)

21 Range Indicator (Green) 3-6 If illuminated indicates an aircraft or missile within a given range.

Figure 1-28 (Sheet 5 of 5)

1-90
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

NORMAL OPERATION (ALQ-153(V)) 4. If the ALQ-153(V) system detects an aircraft or


unconfirmed missile, the aircraft detect light
Turn-On Procedures (green) will come on to indicate the approximate
range of the aircraft missile.
Press POWER pushbutton, POWER light (green) 5. If a missile has been detected, the L MSL or R
comes on and the system is in the warmup mode of MSL light(s) (red) will come on, the range indicator
operation. The POWER light will go out and the will come on to indicate missile range, and the mis-
STBY light (amber) will come on when the system sile warning tone will be heard over the interphone
is ready for normal operation (42 to 130 seconds). system. Both L MSL and R MSL lights illuminated
indicates detection of a missile within 10 degrees of
the tail centerline. When the missile reaches the
minimum range selected or the TTI selected, which-
ever criterion is met first, the CM TRIG light
The ALQ-153(V) system will not be oper- (green) will come on generating a countermeasures
ated on the ground unless ground cooling dispense (CMD) pulse.
equipment is used. Time, temperature, and
cooling requirements of T.O. 1B-52G-2-20
must be complied with.

System Operation Do not operate the ALQ-153 (V) system on the


ground with chaff or flares loaded on the aircraft.
Normal operation of the ALQ-153(V) consists of
operating the system to detect threat aircraft NOTE
and/or missiles off the tail of the aircraft. To place
the system into normal operation after a satisfac- If automatic dispensing of flares and/or
tory turn-on or operator initiated BIT procedures, chaff is desired, the flare (ALE-20) system
the following steps should be performed: and/or the chaff (ALE-24), must be on and
in the automatic mode of operation.
1. Press STBY/OPER pushbutton (amber), OPER
(green) light should come on, and STBY (amber) 6. If CMD pulse generation is not desired, press
light should go off. the MIN RNG and TTI pushbuttons and position to
2. Position MIN RNG and TTI controls to desired INHBT (amber) lights come on.
settings as directed by MAJCOM, or current tacti- 7. To turn off the ALQ-153(V) system, press the
cal directives. POWER pushbutton and all indicator lights will go
3. Press MIN RNG and TTI ENAB/INHBT off.
pushbuttons to ENAB position (green) light on.

1-91
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-155(V) POWER MANAGEMENT memory scratch pad, and the other memory con-
SYSTEM tains the threat data file. The interface processor
operates as an integral part of the ALQ-155(V) sys-
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION tem providing interface between the control-indica-
tor/programmers and the receivers. Data and con-
The AN/ALQ-155(V) system is capable of providing trol inputs from the aircraft radar warning receiver
various types of RF power output covering a wide and or SI and AN/ALQ-172(V)2 systems are also
frequency range by using interchangeable transmit- routed through the signal processor for system tie-
ter groups. Each transmitter group has a specific in. The liquid cooler comprises a reservoir for cool-
frequency range and power output which is desig- ing fluid, a single motor which drives a pump, a
nated as a band. cooling coil, and circuitry for control of the system
timing periods. The flow protect valve protects the
Band 12 systems are installed in positions 1 and 2; system from major leaks by closing off the flow of
band 9 system in position 6; band 9S systems in po- coolant to either of two T-1150/ALT-28 transmitters
sitions 3 and 4; band 10 system in position 13; band whenever a leakage rate in excess of 0.2 gallon per
10S systems in positions 5 and 8; and band 11 sys- minute (GPM) is detected. This prevents a loss of
tems in positions 7 and 14. coolant which could cause the unimpaired system to
fail. For leakage rates of 0.2 GPM or greater, the
Each system consists of an ALQ-155(V) receiver- valve closes, terminating power and coolant flow to
transmitter, one-half of an HD-766A/ALT-28(V) the leaky transmitter, and diverts all the coolant to
dual electronic equipment liquid cooler, one-half of the operable transmitter. As a second independent
a flow protect valve, antenna system, one-half of a function, the flow protect valve also senses whenev-
C-10130/ALQ-155(V) control-indicator/programmer, er the flow of coolant to either transmitter falls be-
and CM-465A/ALQ-155(V) processor. Location of low 1.8 GPM. A signal is provided to the liquid cool-
system components is shown in figure 1-29. The er to shut down that transmitter before thermal
T-1150C or D/ALT-28(V) transmitter has an damage can occur. The control-indicator/program-
R-2050/ALQ-155(V) receiver mounted on its front mer provides controls and indications required for
panel. Together they form an ALQ-155(V) receiver- remote control of the system and controls for initi-
transmitter unit. The transmitter contains an M- ating the jamming program desired. The C-9525/
type backward wave oscillator (BWO) and most of ALT-28(V) antenna select panel drives a waveguide
the functional circuits of the system. The transmit- switch for systems No. 1 and 2 to transfer electro-
ter housing is a magnesium casting which provides magnetic energy from the transmitter to either the
mounting for the BWO and liquid-and air-cooled ca- forward or omni antennas. Circuits within the pan-
vities in which modules containing the power sup- el control dc voltages used to disable the transmit-
plies, regulators, and modulators associated with ters during waveguide switching time.
the BWO are mounted. The receiver is tunable and
controlled by the signal processor in the automatic COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
mode of operation. The control signal from the ra-
dar warning receiver and or SI is received through Signal Processor (CM-465A/ALQ-155)
the ALQ-155 signal processor which consists of
three functions: an input/output interface, a central The signal processor (SP) (figure 1-30) controls the
processor, and a memory. The input/output inter- functioning of the receiver-transmitters (RTs) based
face circuits convert processor external signal in- on the mode of operation. It does this by executing
puts into control and data inputs to the central pro- a set of software instructions contained in Program-
cessor circuits and reconverts central processor mable Read Only Memory (PROM). This set of
data into outputs from the processor. When directed instructions is called the Operation Flight Program
by the external control inputs, the central process- (OFP). Also resident in the PROMs is a set or repro-
ing circuits perform programmed software opera- grammable threat parameters known as the Emit-
tions with the external data inputs. Microprocessor ter Identification Data (EID). The major compo-
chips are utilized inside the central processor to ac- nents of the ALQ-155 are controlled through four
complish these software operations. Two memories interfaces. These include the Receiver Transmitter
are contained in the processor: one provides the (RT), Control Indicator/Programmer (CIP), AN/
programmable software routines and a random ALR-46, and the AN/ALQ-172 interfaces.

1-92 Change 1
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

SIGNAL PROCESSOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS lamp state (i.e, on to off or off to on). If the blink
duration has expired, the lamp is turned off and
The computer program contained in the SP consists removed from the blink table. Timing for the blink
of an initialization and self-test sequence and an interval is determined by a combination of software
executive loop. and hardware timers.
1. Initialization and self-test. When power is first d. The final routine of the executive loop
applied to the SP, the OFP executes an initializa- maintains the accuracy of all designated transmit-
tion and self-test sequence. This sequence performs ters which have previously locked to a signal. On
the following steps: the average, this is accomplished every 1.5 seconds.
Before the receivers are checked for activity, all
a. Verifies proper installation of the EID transmitters are blanked to avoid interference.
PROMs by reading the first PROM word and Each locked-on receiver is then examined for signal
comparing it to the proper value stored in the OFP. activity. If activity is found, the receiver is set so
b. Verifies that all RAM locations can be writ- the signal is in the middle of the search frequency
ten to and read from without errors. range and the transmitter is tuned to the receiver
c. Verifies the OFP PROMs can be read and frequency. If a signal is no longer present, a reac-
contain the correct data. This is accomplished by quisition sequence is initiated. This routine also
forming a cumulative check of all OFP PROM performs the initial acquisition for transmitters
memory locations and comparing it to the correct designated in the manual mode.
value stored in the EID PROMs.
CONTROL CIRCUITS
d. Verifies that operational parameters/
constants, downloaded from PROM to RAM for The high voltages, power levels, and large heat con-
OFP use, were downloaded properly by doing a one- centrations encountered in the AN/ALQ-155(V)
to-one comparison. require that warmup, standby, and cooling off peri-
e. Verifies the hardware long and short timers ods be provided before and after application of high
used by the OFP are operating properly. voltage in the system. The necessary protection is
f. Blinks the ERR lamp on all activated CIPs provided by the turn on (cycle in) and turn off (cycle
if the sequence is successful. out) procedures of the system. The turn on proce-
dures energize relays in their proper sequence to
2. Executive Loop. The executive loop repeatedly allow system and backward wave oscillator fila-
performs a number of sequential functions. These ments to warmup prior to application of high volt-
functions are described below. age. When the MODE switch is rotated from OFF
a. One routine periodically checks the status to STBY 1, full filament voltage is applied to all but
of each RT to determine if a power failure has one filament in the system. Reduced filament volt-
occurred. If a power failure is detected, an internal age is applied to the BWO. The TUN light will come
flag is set in RAM and the OFP attempts to reacti- on. The system will remain in this condition indefi-
vate the RT. If reactivation is successful, no indica- nitely or until the next step of turn on procedure is
tions are provided to the operator. If unsuccessful, accomplished. To activate the normal filament volt-
the ERR lamp will illuminate. age to the BWO, the operator must rotate the
b. Another routine handles CIP servicing MODE switch to STBY 2, or pressing JOG/RES
whenever a CIP request is received. It first deter- switch with the MODE switch in STBY 1. At this
mines which CIP made the request and then deter- time the TUN light will be on and numeral 5 will be
mines the type of request (MODE switch, JOG/RE- displayed on the THREAT ENGAGED indicator.
SET pushbutton, or DES pushbutton). Finally, this During the time that the TUN and 5 lights are on,
routine services the request by executing the soft- full filament voltage is applied to the BWO for 60
ware sequences which apply to the switch or seconds. After the total cycle-in period has elapsed,
pushbutton. the TUN light will go out, the 5 light will remain
on, and the system is ready to transmit when the
c. Yet another routine controls operation of all MODE switch is placed in a transmit position sup-
CIP lamps that are blinking in a software con- plying plate voltage to the transmitter.
trolled blink table. It does this by inverting the

1-93
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

System Cooling BWO filament overvoltage condition causes the


phase protect relay to remove control voltage from
If the coolant becomes overheated, ground is the system thus removing all ac power. Operation of
removed from the cycle-in control circuits and the the phase fault relay causes the PHASE FAULT
system operates as in the cycle-out period except light on the liquid cooler and the FAU light on the
that control power has not been removed and the control-indicator/programmer to come on.
system will automatically begin to recycle after
coolant temperature drops. No indication of this If coolant flow falls below 1.8 gpm, the flow switch
fault is provided except that the TUN light will operates and applies 28volts dc to a 30 second time
come on. delay relay and the NO FLOW light comes on. After
30 seconds, the time delay relay opens, removing
Failure of one or two phases to the liquid cooler power from the system. The 28volts dc from the
motor or the high voltage power supply trans- flow switch is also applied to the FAU light causing
former, or failure of one or more legs of these com- a fault indication on the control- indicator/program-
ponents resulting in a high neutral current, or a mer.

1-94
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-155(V) Component Locations

Figure 1-29 (Sheet 1 of 3)

1-95
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-155(V) Component Locations (Cont)

Figure 1-29 (Sheet 2 of 3)

1-96
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-29 (Sheet 3 of 3)

1-97
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-155(V) Signal Processor

Figure 1-30

1-98
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

C-10130 (ALQ-155) Control Indicator Programmer

1 DESIGNATE SWITCH 9 FAULT LIGHT


2 ERROR LIGHT 10 JOG/RESET SWITCH
3 LOCK-LIGHT 11 MODE SELECTOR SWITCH
4 AUTOMATIC LIGHT 12 THREAT ENGAGE INDICATOR
5 SEMI-AUTOMATIC LIGHT 13 CENTER FREQUENCY CONTROL
6 STACK LIGHT 14 MANUAL SCAN RATE CONTROL
7 TUNE (WARMUP) LIGHT 15 PROGRAM SELECTOR SWITCH
8 TRANSMIT LIGHT 16 RF BANDWIDTH CONTROL

NOTE

Each ALQ-155 Control-Indicator/Programmer contains duplicate controls for two


transmitters with the exception of the MANUAL SCAN RATE CONTROL. The
MANUAL SCAN RATE CONTROL is shared by both transmitters.
Figure 1-31

1-99
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-155 Antenna Selector Panel

1 ANTENNA SELECTOR SWITCH (ALQ-155


SYSTEM 1)
2 FWD ANTENNA LIGHT (ALQ-155 SYSTEM 1)
3 CMNI ANTENNA LIGHT (ALQ-155 SYSTEM 1)
4 MONITOR BUTTON (LOOK THRU)
5 FWD ANTENNA LIGHT (ALQ-155 SYSTEM 2)
6 OMNI ANTENNA LIGHT (ALQ-155 SYSTEM 2)
7 ANTENNA SELECTOR SWITCH (ALQ-155
SYSTEM 2)
8 LAMP TEST BUTTON

Figure 1-32

1-100
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

NORMAL OPERATION (ALQ-155) warmup to standby, the TUN light is illuminated


and the number 5 is displayed in the THREAT
Turn-On Procedures ENGAGE display. After the 1 minute cycle-in
period, the TUN light will go out.
1. Positioning the MODE selector to STBY 1
places the system in warmup mode. During this 3. In the standby mode (STBY 2), the transmitter
mode of operation, full filament voltage is not is ready for immediate use and only the THREAT
applied to the backward wave oscillator (BWO) and ENGAGE will continue to display the number 5 to
only the TUN light will illuminate. The system can- signify that the system is in standby mode.
not be placed into radiation directly from this mode. 4. To return the transmitter to WARMUP mode
The upper THREAT ENGAGE indicator will dis- after it has been transmitting, rotate the MODE
play a number and the lower THREAT ENGAGE selector to the stop at STBY 2. Then pull out on the
indicator will display a letter on the first CIP set to knob and rotate counterclockwise to OFF. The num-
STBY 1 with all other MODE selectors set to OFF. ber 5 in the THREAT DISPLAY will blank out.
This number/letter display represents the version/ When the TUN light illuminates after 7 seconds,
revision of the installed software. rotate the MODE selector clockwise to STBY 1.
2. To place the system into standby mode, posi- 5. To turn the transmitter off from the warmup
tion the MODE selector to STBY 2 or JOG/RESET mode (STBY 1), rotate MODE selector ccw from
in WARMUP mode. During the 1-minute cycle-in STBY 1 to OFF.
period when the transmitter is transitioning from

1-101/(1-102 blank)
BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

EXPENDABLE COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEMS


AN/ALE-24 1-103
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1-103
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 1-103
NORMAL OPERATION 1-111
AN/ALE-20 1-113
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1-113
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 1-113
NORMAL OPERATION 1-120

AN/ALE-24 DISPENSER SET zines, mounted five to each dispenser, contain the
chaff. SUD and DOC chaff are dispensed at selected
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION intervals. SPD chaff is dispensed at continuous
rates or in bursts, programmed according to units
The AN/ALE-24 countermeasures equipment dis- per burst, interval between bursts, and bursts per
pensing set provides a means of dispensing minia- program. The AN/ALQ-153(V)1 countermeasures
ture chaff packages from the wings of aircraft set may dispense chaff as a counter to aircraft and
which misleads or clouds distant investigative missiles approaching the tail of the B-52.
radars. The set consists of eight D-20/ALE-24 dis-
pensers, a C-4508/ALE-24 selector, a C-4507/ UNITS PER BURST SEQUENCE BY
ALE-24 programmer, and a C9510/ALE MA SWITCH SETTING DISPENSER NO.
EXPEN control panel (master expendables control)
connected into the system for SPD dispensing. The 2 1-5, 3-6, 4-8
selector, programmer, and master expendables con- 4 1-4-5-8, 1-3-5-6, 3-4-6-8
trol are located at the EW officer station. Four dis- 6 1-3-4-5-6-8, 1-3-4-5-6-8,
pensers are installed in each wing and are num-
bered 1 thru 8 starting at the left outboard position COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
and continuing to the right outboard position. See
figure 1-33 for further equipment location informa- Dispenser (D-20/ALE-24)
tion. Locating the dispensers in the wings yields an
effective countermeasures capability due to the Eight identical dispensers (figure 1-33) are located
high air turbulence, a large lateral separation of in left and right wing section 11, four on each wing
dispensers, and simultaneous ejection of chaff pack- numbered 1 to 8 from left outboard to right out-
ages from both wings in bursts of two, four, or six board position. Each dispenser consists of an ejector
packages. The wing location also reduces chaff con- assembly, five magazine and feeder assemblies, and
tamination to the aircraft. five support fittings. The dispenser is capable of
handling the different thicknesses of chaff units by
The AN/ALE-24 dispensing set is designed to adjustment of an ejector roller adjustment screw
accommodate 900 packages of self-protection dis- and gate in the magazine and feeder assembly. The
pensing (SPD) chaff, 150 units of single unit dis- dispenser has a dispensing rate of two packages per
pensing (SUD) chaff, and 75 units of delayed open- second with a velocity of approximately 30 feet per
ing chaff (DOC). Dispensers No. 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 8 second. As each package is ejected, a sleeve opener
are reserved for SPD chaff, dispenser No. 2 for in the magazine opens the package.
DOC, and dispenser No. 7 for SUD chaff. Maga-

1-103
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Selector Control Panel (C-4508/ALE-24) AUTO-OFF switch. The AUTO-OFF switch allows
the initiation of an SPD burst program by the AN/
The selector control panel (figure 1-34) contains the ALQ-153 Tail Warning System, this Section. The
controls necessary to select operating modes and PROGRAM indicator light will come on when the
types of chaff to be dispensed. Located on the unit burst program is in progress. Also contained on the
are the DOC, SUD, and SPD dispensing switches. unit are five rotary switches.
the DOC or SUD dispensing switches will initiate a
continuous mode program. these modes are inde- Master Expendables Control Panel
pendent of all other operating modes and can be
operated simultaneously with any other mode. The The circuitry in the master expendables control
SPD dispensing switch controls mode of operation panel (figure 1-34) related to SPD chaff dispensing
for the SPD chaff. In CONT position, a continuous is electrically connected to the selector and pro-
dispensing mode can be initiated; in BURST posi- grammer units. Only two of the controls on the unit
tion, a burst dispensing mode can be initiated. Also are used in conjunction with the SPD chaff dispens-
located on the unit are three subtractive counter ing system. The SPD CHAFF pushbutton indicator
units, one for each type of chaff, which indicate the is used to initiate a SPD burst program and the
number of chaff packages remaining in the dispens- SPD TERM pushbutton is used to terminate the
ers. Each counter dial can be reset by pushing in program. The remaining controls are used in con-
and rotating the reset control shaft projecting from junction with the ALE-20 flare ejection system.
under each counter. Eight DISP FAULT lights
located on the unit will light individually if the Gunner’s Chaff Deactivate Switch
associated dispenser fails to eject a package within
approximately 100ms after receiving a dispense A foot-operate momentary switch is located at the
command pulse. DISP FAULT lights will also light gunner’s station. This switch enables the gunner to
individually, indicating magazines are empty. terminate a chaff program in progress initiated by
the EW officer. When this switch is actuated, the
Programmer Control Panel (C-4507/ALE-24)
chaff program must be reinitiated by the EW officer
in order to resume chaff dispensing. The chaff deac-
The programmer control panel (figure 1-34) con- tivate switch receives TR power through a circuit
tains the necessary controls to program different breaker marked CHAFF DISP DEACTIVATE
modes of chaff dispensing. Located on this unit is located on the ECM circuit breaker panel.
the power switch for the dispensing set and an

1-104
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALE-24 Component Locations

Figure 1-33
1-105
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-24 Controls and Indicators

1 SPD CONTINUOUS UNITS PER MINUTE 5 POWER SWITCH


SELECTOR 6 AUTOMATIC DISPENSE SWITCH
2 PROGRAM IN PROGRESS INDICATOR 7 UNITS PER BURST SELECTOR
3 DOC-SUD MINUTES PER UNIT SELECTOR 8 BURST INTERVAL SELECTOR
4 BURSTS PER PROGRAM SELECTOR

Figure 1-34 (Sheet 1 of 5)

1-106 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

9 SPD DISPENSER FAULT INDICATOR


LIGHTS
10 SPD CHAFF COUNTER
11 SPD CHAFF COUNTER RESET
CONTROL
12 SUD CHAFF COUNTER
13 SUD CHAFF COUNTER RESET
CONTROL
14 SUD DISPENSER FAULT INDICATOR
LIGHT
15 SUD DISPENSE SWITCH
16 SPD DISPENSE SWITCH
17 DOC DISPENSE SWITCH
18 DOC DISPENSER FAULT INDICATOR
LIGHT
19 DOC CHAFF COUNTER RESET
CONTROL
20 DOC CHAFF COUNTER

B ALE-24 SELECTOR CONTROL PANEL

21 FLARE PROGRAM INITIATE SWITCH


22 SPD CHAFF PROGRAM IN
PROGRESS LIGHT
23 SPD CHAFF PROGRAM INITIATE
SWITCH
24 FLARE BURST INTERVAL SWITCH
25 ALE-20 BURST INTERVAL LIGHT
26 SPD CHAFF PROGRAM TERMINATE
SWITCH
27 FLARE BURST INTERVAL SELECTOR
28 MEP BURST INTERVAL LIGHT
29 SPD CHAFF STANDBY LIGHT
30 LAMP TEST BUTTON
31 FLARE STANDBY LIGHT
32 FLARE PROGRAM IN PROGRESS
LIGHT

C MASTER EXPENDABLES PANEL (MEP)

Figure 1-34 (Sheet 2 of 5)

Change 9 1-107
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-24 Controls and Indicators (Cont)


CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

A PROGRAMMER CONTROL PANEL

1 SPD Continuous Units-Per-Minute Used with continuous program mode of operation to dispense SPD chaff
Selector packages at rates of 60, 90, and 120 packages per minute. The continu-
ous mode, when initiated from the programmer and selector units, over-
rides the burst mode.

2 PROGRAM-in-Progress Indicator Light A green light indicates, when illuminated, that dispense pulses are being
provided for SPD programmed dispensing.

NOTE

In the event of an empty dispenser or a malfunction, the count-


ers may move without dispensing chaff.

3 DOC-SUD Minutes-Per-Unit Selector Controls the interval in minutes between dispense pulses provided to the
DOC or SUD dispense clutch, in position 2, pulses will be provided at a
random interval of 1 to 3 minutes. In position 3, pulses will be provided
at a random interval of 2 to 4 minutes. In position 4, pulses will be provided
at a random interval of 3 to 5 minutes.

4 Bursts-Per-Program Selector Controls the number of chaff bursts to be dispensed to complete a burst
program. A burst program is interrupted when a local continuous program
is initiated.

5 Power Switch PWR position energizes the SPD dispenser power relays, supplying ac
power to the SPD dispenser motors, and routes dc power through the
3-second time delay to the other parts of the dispenser. OFF position
removes all power from the dispenser system.

6 Automatic Dispense Switch The AUTO-OFF switch must be in AUTO position if automatic activation
of chaff dispensing by the ALQ-153 is desired.

7 Units-Per-Burst Selector Used with burst program mode of operation to control the number of chaff
packages dispensed simultaneously in quantities of two, four, or six pack-
ages.

8 BURST INTERVAL Selector Controls burst intervals from 1/2 second to 10 seconds.

B ALE-24 SELECTOR CONTROL PANEL

9 SPD Dispenser Fault Indicator Light Amber lights indicate when illuminated, that a dispense signal has not
been received at the malfunction circuit from that light’s respective dis-
penser.

10 SPD Chaff Counter Subtractive type counter indicates the number of chaff packages remain-
ing in their respective dispensers. A control is provided to adjust the
counter.

11 SPD Chaff Counter Reset Control The SPD chaff control counter can be reset by pressing and turning the
reset knob in either direction.

Figure 1-34 (Sheet 3 of 5)

1-108
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

B ALE-24 SELECTOR CONTROL PANEL (CONT)

12 SUD Chaff Counter Subtractive type counter indicates the number of chaff packages remain-
ing in their respective dispensers. A control is provided to adjust the
counter.

13 SUD Chaff Counter Reset Control The SUD chaff control counter can be reset by pressing and turning the
reset knob in either direction.

14 SUD Dispenser Fault Indicator Light Amber lights indicate when illuminated, that a dispense signal has not
been received at the malfunction circuit from that light’s respective dis-
penser.

15 SUD Dispense Switch In DISP position, the dispense pulses will be provided to the SUD dis-
penser at the continuous rate selected by the DOC-SUD minute-per-unit
selector. In OFF position, no pulses will be provided to the SUD dis-
penser.

16 SPD Dispense Switch In CONT position, the SPD continuous units-per-minute selector is in the
circuit and dispense pulses will be provided to the SPD dispensers at the
continuous rate selected. In BURST position, the burst interval, units-per-
burst, and bursts-per-program selectors are in the circuit and dispense
pulses will be provided to the SPD dispensers in bursts, for number of
bursts selected only. In OFF position, no dispense pulses will be provided
to the SPD dispensers.

17 DOC Dispense Switch In DISP position, dispense pulses will be provided to the DOC dispenser
at the continuous rate selected by the DOC-SUD minutes per unit selec-
tor. In OFF position, no pulses will be provided to the DOC dispenser.

18 DOC Dispenser Fault Indicator Light Amber lights indicate when illuminated, that a dispense signal has not
been received at the malfunction circuit from that light’s respective dis-
penser.

19 DOC Chaff Counter Reset Control The DOC chaff control counter can be reset by pressing and turning the
reset knob in either direction.

20 DOC Chaff Counter Subtractive type counter indicates the number of chaff packages remain-
ing in their respective dispensers. A control is provided to adjust the
counter.

C MASTER EXPENDABLES PANEL (MEP)

21 FLARE Program Initiate Switch When pressed, this switch will initiate a flare burst program as set on the
flare programming control panel. This switch performs the same function
as the release switch on the flare programming panel.

22 SPD Chaff Program In Progress Light When illuminated, this light indicates that an SPD chaff program is in
progress as selected by either the ALE-24 programmer or the MEP. A pro-
gram cannot be initiated by the MEP as long as this light is on.

Figure 1-34 (Sheet 4 of 5)

1-109
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-24 Controls and Indicators (Cont)


CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

C MASTER EXPENDABLES PANEL (MEP) (CONT)

23 SPD CHAFF Program Initiate Switch When pressed, this switch will initiate an SPD chaff burst program as set
on the programmer and selector control panels. This switch will not over-
ride a program initiated by the ALE-24 control panels.

24 Flare Burst Interval Switch Pressing this switch will select either the flare burst interval set on the flare
programming control panel or the flare burst interval set on the MEP.
Successive pressing of the switch will alternately select either ALE-20
panel setting or the MEP setting.

25 ALE 20 Burst Interval Light When illuminated, this light indicates that the burst interval setting on the
flare programming control panel is selected.

26 SPD Chaff Program Terminate When pressed, this switch will terminate any SPD chaff burst program in
progress. After the switch has been pressed, the SPD burst program can
be reinitiated either by the chaff programming panel or by the MEP. If the
SPD burst program is reinitiated, the program will start from the beginning
(of the program setup on the ALE-24 programmer) and will not resume
from the point at which the program was terminated. DOC, SUD, or SPD
continuous programs are not affected by this switch.

27 FLARE BURST INTERVAL Selector This selector selects the desired interval in seconds between pro-
grammed bursts.

28 MEP Burst Interval Light When illuminated, this light indicates that the burst interval setting on the
MEP is selected.

29 SPD Chaff Standby Light When illuminated, this light indicates the ALE-24 system is in standby and
a new SPD chaff program can be initiated.

30 LAMP TEST Button When pressed, all lights on the MEP should illuminate at full brilliance.

31 Flare Standby Light When illuminated, this light indicates the ALE-20 system is in standby and
a new flare program can be initiated.

32 Flare Program in Progress Light When illuminated, this light indicates that a flare burst program is in prog-
ress. A program cannot be initiated by the MEP as long as this light is on.

Figure 1-34 (Sheet 5 of 5)

1-110
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

NORMAL OPERATION (ALE-24) a program is in progress may result in chaff


being dispensed at an unknown rate and
1. SPD CONTINUOUS MODE. The system is duration or possible system malfunction.
designed to dispense SPD chaff in the continuous
mode at rates of 60, 90, or 120 packages per min- NOTE
ute. Packages are dispensed sequentially from each
SPD dispenser. To initiate continuous operation, When initiating a burst program, it is nec-
place SPD dispense switch to CONT position; the essary to firmly place the SPD dispense
counter should decrease steadily and at a rate switch to the BURST position and release
(determined by the setting of the SPD continuous the switch slowly. Erratic operation may
units-per-minute selector. To stop continuous opera- result if the SPD dispense switch is not pos-
tion, return SPD dispense switch to OFF (center itively activated. This situation has
position). occurred if the program light goes out prior
2. SPD BURST MODE. The burst mode is accom- to program completion. In this event, it will
plished by setting the package per burst control (2, be necessary to recycle the system before
4, or 6), the burst interval selector (1/2 thru 10), resuming the desired program. Merely reac-
and the bursts-per-program selector (1 thru 10) to tivating the SPD dispense switch will cause
the desired position. Packages are dispensed simul- the system to resume operation but will
taneously to provide the desired number of pack- result in an incomplete chaff dispense.
ages per burst. To initiate burst operation, firmly
move dispense switch to BURST position; the 3. To initiate DOC and/or SUD dispensing, lift
counter should decrease at intervals as determined guard(s) and place DOC and/or SUD dispense
by burst interval selector setting The program-in- switch(es) to DISP position. The counter(s) will
progress indicator will illuminate while an SPD decrease as determined by the DOC-SUD minutes-
burst program is in progress. The light will extin- per-unit selector setting. To stop DOC/SUD dispens-
guish and the counter will stop when the program ing, place dispense switch(es) OFF and close
is complete. To reinitiate another program, the SPD guard(s).
dispense switch must again be moved firmly to
BURST position.

During SPD burst operation, any change


made in programmer control settings while

1-111/(1-112 blank)
BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALE-20 FLARE EJECTOR SET

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Stepping Switch

The AN/ALE-20 flare ejector system is an airborne Twelve identical stepping switches, one mounted on
countermeasure system designed to deceive in- each flare ejector case (figure 1-35), are located in
frared guidance systems. Deception is accomplished the horizontal stabilizers, six on each side of the
by ejecting flares having an infrared energy compo- fuselage. Each stepping switch contains a motor-
nent large in comparison to the aircraft infrared driven stepping type switch which advances one
output so that the infrared guidance system will contact each time a pulse is received from the junc-
track to the flare instead of the aircraft. The system tion box.
consists of one flare programming control panel,
one junction box, and 12 identical stepping switches Flare Ejector Case
with their companion flare ejector cases. Equip-
ment locations are shown in figures 1-36. The AN/ One flare ejector case (figure 1-35) is used with
ALE-20 flare ejector system provides a means of se- each stepping switch. the flare ejector case provides
lecting the number of flares to be fired, timing the a case to hold the flare set and the stepping switch
interval between bursts, and igniting and firing the electrical connector which conducts the firing pulse
flares from the aircraft. The flare ejector system to each flare. In addition, a safety switch is
utilizes 12 AN/ALA-17 flare sets with 16 flares per installed in each flare case. in the event a flare set
set, and a maximum of 192 single flares per air- is installed in the case, the switch inhibits ground
craft. The flares may be programmed to fire in testing of the system.
bursts of one, two, or three flares at intervals of 2 to
20 seconds, between bursts. The flares may also be Master Expendables Panel (C9510/ALE)
salvoed at a rate of one flare every 65 milliseconds
by depressing the fast train switch. All flares may The master expendables panel located at the EW
be ejected from the aircraft in less than 20 seconds. officer’s station provides control for setting the
A C9510/ALE MA EXPEN control panel (master ex- burst interval and initiating flare ejecting programs
pendables control) provides the operator with an in addition to the same capabilities on the flare pro-
external control to set the burst interval time of the gramming control panel. See figure 1-34 for location
flares from 2 to 20 seconds in 1-second increments. of the controls on the master expendables control
The AN/ALQ-153(V)1 countermeasures set may fire panel.
flares as a counter to aircraft and missiles ap-
proaching the tail of the B-52 provided the flare Pilot’s Flare Ejector Set Power Switch
system is on and AUTO is selected on the flare con-
trol panel. This switch is an added safety device located on the
pilot side panel (figure 1-38) and allows the pilot to
A switch on the pilot side panel, a landing gear control application of power to the system.
squat switch, a door-actuated safety interlock
switch, a safety switch in each flare case, and a re- System Safety Interlocks
set power switch are provided to prevent firing of
the flares while the aircraft is on the ground. The system safety interlocks consist of a door-actu-
ated microswitch located on the bottom of the fuse-
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION lage aft of the section 47 entry door and the squat
switch relay located in the left relay panel in the
Flare Programming Control Panel forward wheel well. These two switches are in
series with the flare ejector power relay solenoid in
The primary function of the control panel is to pro- section 47 dc power box. The relay is actuated by dc
vide the ejector with dispense pulses at the desired bus voltage applied through the flare ejector set
rate and interval. It controls the selection of the power switch on the pilot side panel and the power
number of flares to be ejected in each burst, the switch on the flare programming control panel.
number of bursts per program, the timing of the When the aircraft is in flight, the door-actuated
interval between bursts, and the ignition and ejec- microswitch and the squat switch are normally
tion of the flares from the aircraft. The control closed and power can be applied to the system. On
panel contains a program pulse generator, program the ground, the squat switch relay is deenergized
pulse interval control circuits, pulse counting cir- and, for further safety, the door that actuates the
cuits and indicators, and lights to provide indica- microswitch is opened. For ground testing, this
tions of the existing status of the system. power is available through the ground test switch
and through closed contacts of all safety switches in
the flare ejector cases indicating that all flare sets

Change 1 1-113
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

have been removed. The reset power switch located SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCH
on the junction box mount must be held in the ON
position to provide power to reset the stepping A door-actuated safety switch located on the under-
switches. side of the fuselage just forward of the horizontal
stabilizer is used to interrupt dc power to the flare
GROUND TEST SWITCH ejectors.

A ground test switch located on the left side of the Power Distribution.
forward wheel well is used by ground maintenance
personnel to route dc power around the landing DC operating power is applied to the flare program-
gear safety switch. The switch is spring-loaded in ming control panel through the pilot flare ejector
the OFF position. set power switch. AC power is applied directly to
the flare programming control panel.

Stepping Switch and Flare Ejector Case

Figure 1-35

1-114
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-20 Component Locations

Figure 1-36

Change 9 1-115
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-20 Controls and Indicators

ALE-20 FLARE PROGRAMMING CONTROL PANEL

1 BURST REMAINING RESET CONTROL 8 RELEASE BUTTON


2 BURST REMAINING INDICATOR 9 POWER SWITCH
3 FAST TRAIN BUTTON 10 PROGRAM IN PROGRESS LIGHT
4 BURST COUNTER 11 INTERVAL SELECTOR THUMB WHEEL
5 BURST SELECTOR THUMB WHEEL 12 INTERVAL INDICATOR
6 RIGHT HAND BANK EMPTY LIGHT 13 TRANSFER SWITCH
7 AUTOMATIC RELEASE SWITCH 14 FLARES PER BURST SWITCH

Figure 1-37 (Sheet 1 of 3)

1-116 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Burst Remaining Reset Control A knurled knob used to reset the burst remaining indicate to any desired
number. Its purpose is to set in the number of flares loaded before flight.

2 BURSTS REMAINING Indicator Indicates the total number of bursts (total number of flares divided by
flares per bursts switch setting) remaining on board the aircraft. The indi-
cator subtractively counts the bursts. The indicator will not count bursts
dispensed by the fast train button.

3 FAST TRAIN Button A pushbutton switch used to initiate continuous dispensing. The fast train
button energizes the fast train relay forming a holding circuit, interrupting
any program already initiated, illuminate the program in progress light,
and start the fast train pulse generator which produces a dispense pulse
to the ejectors every 65 milliseconds. With this button depressed, all
flares will be ejected in less than 40 seconds. The fast-train relay will
remain energized until the power switch is moved to OFF position
momentarily.

4 Burst Counter Indicates the number of bursts selected for a program. When a program
has been initiated, the burst counter will count the pulse bursts and sub-
tractively indicate the number of bursts remaining in the program. After
a program has been completed, the counter will automatically reset to the
previously selected number of bursts.

5 Burst Selector Thumbwheel A knurled wheel used to select the desired number of bursts per program.

6 Right Hand Bank Empty Light An amber or red indicator light indicates, when illuminated, that the last
flare in the right hand bank has been ejected. The light will remain illumi-
nated until the power switch is moved to OFF position momentarily.

7 Automatic Release Switch The AUTO-OFF switch must be in AUTO position if automatic activation
of flare dispensing by the ALQ-153 is desired.

8 RELEASE Button A pushbutton switch used to initiate a flare dispense program. The
release button routes dc power to energize the release relay which will
remain energized until the burst relay is opened by the burst limit
switches.

9 POWER Switch Used to control application of ac and dc power to the system. In POWER
position, ac power is connected to the program pulse generator motor
and dc to the various control circuits.

10 PROGRAM IN PROGRESS Light An amber or red indicator light indicates, when illuminated, that the pro-
gram in progress relay is energized and a dispense program should be
in progress or the light will also illuminate when the fast train relay is ener-
gized.

Figure 1-37 (Sheet 2 of 3)

Change 10 1-117
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-20 Controls and Indicators (Cont)


CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

11 INTERVAL SELECTOR Thumbwheel A knurled wheel used to select the desired interval in seconds between
programmed bursts.

12 Interval Indicator Indicates the interval in seconds of programmed bursts. Interval range is
2 to 20 seconds.

13 TRANSFER Switch In TRANSFER position, the transfer relay in the junction box is energized
and all dispense pulses will be routed to the right bank of flares only. In
OFF position, the dispense pulses will be routed to the left bank, then to
the right bank through the normal transfer sequence. The switch must be
in OFF position before flares can be dispensed from the left bank with
either programmed or fast train dispensing.

14 Flares Per Burst Switch Determines number of flares to be dispensed per burst. Located on the
back side of the flare programming control unit. Will be preset by mainte-
nance personnel.

Figure 1-37 (Sheet 3 of 3)

1-118
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Pilot’s ALE-20 Flare Ejector Panel

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

Flare Ejector Set Power Switch Used to provide the pilot a means of assuring that flares will not be ejected
during critical periods of flight. The switch must be in ON position to pro-
vide dc operating power. Three position ON–OFF–ON switch is used.
The switch locks in the center or OFF position and must be pulled out
before it can be moved up to ON position. The lower ON position is dis-
connected and serves no function.

Figure 1-38

1-119
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

NORMAL OPERATION (ALE-20) the RH empty light. In the event a program is in


progress and power to the system is momentarily
NOTE interrupted (such as power switch moved to OFF
and then back to ON), the program-in-progress
Prior to any normal dispensing or emer- light will go out and ejection of flares will termi-
gency jettisoning of flares, the EW officer nate. The system should resume operation from the
will notify all crewmembers of his intended point in the program where power was lost; how-
action. During flare dispensing, ever, the program must be reinitiated by again
crewmembers can expect a bright white depressing the release button.
flash visible within the crew compartment
accompanied by a slight vibration of the air-
craft. These flashes will be most noticeable
at night, in the vicinity of cloud formations,
or during IFR flight conditions; however, Removing power from the system while a
the flashes are discernible even during day- program is in progress could result in the
time VFR flight conditions. clutch coil cam being stuck in the detent
1. To initiate a flare ejection program, momen- position, making program mode inopera-
tarily depress the release button; the program– tive.
progress light will illuminate and the flare(s) will
NOTE
be ejected immediately as evidenced by the burst
counter decreasing one increment and the burst
To terminate a flare program in progress
remaining indicator decreasing one increment.
rotate the burst selector thumbwheel
Bursts will continue to be ejected at the interval
upward until the program in progress light
selected by the interval selector until the burst
goes out. The program will have stopped
counter counts down to 1. At this time, the pro-
and the bursts per program may be reset.
gram-in-progress light will go out and the burst
counter will automatically reset to original setting. 2. If a programmed number of bursts is not
Additional programmed flare ejection can be desired, the system can be operated manually with
repeated by again depressing the release button. the burst selector set on 1 position. Using this
Flare programs can be repeated at will until all method, continuous burst releases can be obtained
flares are expended as evidenced by illumination of by holding the release switch depressed.

1-120 Change 1
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Normal Procedures section II

NOTE

• This section contains text and an amplified checklist. The text is divid-
ed into primary paragraphs which form the phases of a normal flight.
Most of these paragraphs are followed by an amplified checklist for the
particular phase of the flight. The amplified checklist is presented in
a chronological form that will enable the flightcrew to complete their
inspection, checks, and operation of the aircraft in an expedient yet
thorough manner. The amplified checklist describes in detail the steps
to be completed. Each major part has been assigned to be read by one
of crewmembers, and to be accomplished by others in the crew. Howev-
er, there are exceptions as some of the checklists will be read and com-
pleted silently. To show which crewmember will accomplish certain
steps, the normal crew coding will be used and the code letters will
appear after the response to each step. The terms ‘‘as required,’’ ‘‘as
desired,’’ ‘‘climatic,’’ and ‘‘cross-checked’’ as used in the checklist indi-
cate equipment operation or settings which may vary according to pre-
vailing conditions. In practice, the response to these items will be the
required switch or control position or actual indicator reading. The am-
plified checklist has also been designed to accommodate the production
of the abbreviated checklist to be used during aircraft operation.

• Some system control switches are provided with a guard. In practice,


when guarded switches are actuated, the desired toggle position will
be ascertained and then the guard positioned.

table of contents page

PREPARATION FOR FLIGHT 2-3

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES 2-5


BEFORE EXTERIOR INSPECTION – SAFETY CHECK 2-5
EXTERIOR INSPECTION 2-7
INTERIOR INSPECTION 2-8

PRETAKEOFF PROCEDURES 2-21


STARTING ENGINES 2-21
TAXIING AND BEFORE LINEUP CHECKLIST (COPILOT/EW READS) 2-22

Change 9 2-1
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

table of contents page

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES 2-23


AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB 2-23
EW CALIBRATION AND INTERFERENCE 2-25
EW EQUIPMENT SET 2-37

PRELANDING OPERATIONAL CHECK 2-41

AIR REFUELING PROCEDURES 2-42


RENDEZVOUS 2-42

CONTACT 2-43
POST AIR REFUELING 2-43

POSTFLIGHT PROCEDURES 2-44


AFTER LANDING 2-44
POSTFLIGHT 2-46

NUCLEAR ALERT PROCEDURES 2-47

2-2
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREPARATION FOR FLIGHT without a bomb, for alert posture, and for SIOP
missions which are launched from other than a
ENTRANCE ground alert posture. Ground alert checklist imple-
mentation and instructions are contained in
One main entrance door provides normal crew ALERT PROCEDURES, this section.
access into the aircraft. The door is located on the
lower centerline of the fuselage ahead of the for- NOTE
ward landing gear wheel well. A flush-type handle
is pulled out to unlatch the door. An entrance light When no bombs or missiles are loaded,
switch is located directly forward of the door at the safety wires and seals are not required on
head of the ladder. The entrance light operates on the associated monitor control and release
direct battery power. system controls.

CHECKLISTS

The flight manual checklists have been designed so


that they may be used for training missions with or

2-3
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ECM Equipment Operation Requirements


SYSTEM RESTRICTIONS EQUIPMENT COOLING

Restrictions to operation of any system will be governed by Critical cooling requirements of ECM equipment demand
existing regulations and/or directives. precautions during ground and inflight operations. Ground
cooling must be supplied to the applicable ram air inlet or
RADIATION RESTRICTIONS aircraft compartment when extended ground operation of
ECM equipment is required. During inflight operations or
ground operations with ground cooling connected, any re-
moved ECM equipment that was located within a cooling
shroud must be replaced with a dummy box or equivalent.
• When ECM transmitters are operating, radiation Failure to do so will result in the loss of cooling air; there-
fore, operation of any equipment within that shroud is pro-
hazardous to human life exists up to a 20-foot ra-
dius of the antennas. During periods of ground ra- hibited. Ground operation of ECM systems without cooling
air is authorized provided the time and temperature limita-
diation, ground crew will be notified of the above
tions listed in the following table are observed. The RWR
restrictions.
and SI have no time or temperature limitations.
• Ground operation of ECM or radar transmitters is
prohibited when the B-52 is within 200 feet of (1)
weapons which are not fully assembled, (2) weap-
ons to which continuity testers are connected, or
(3) weapons with open access doors. • Due to probable equipment damage, operation of
ECM equipment without complying with proper
• Do not operate the AN/ALQ-153(V) system on the cooling, time and/or temperature limitations is pro-
ground with chaff or flares loaded on the aircraft. hibited.

• The ALQ-153(V) and ALQ-172 systems will not be


operated on the ground unless ground cooling
equipment is used. Time, temperature, and cooling
requirements of T.O. 1B-52H-2-20 must be com-
Do not operate the AN/ALQ-155 system using for- plied with.
ward directional antennas for more than 5 minutes
on the ground since damage to radome can result.
A cooling period of 30 minutes must be observed
before this operation may be resumed.

MAXIMUM GROUND TIME AND TEMPERATURE


LIMITATIONS WITHOUT GROUND COOLING

GROUP SYSTEMS TIME OAT TEMP

A 1, 3, 5, 7, & 20 10 min 60°F 1

B 2, 4, 6, 8, & 21 10 min 60°F 1

C 9, 11 & 13 10 min 60°F 1

D 12 & 14 10 min 60°F 1

E ALQ-153 & ALQ-172 NOT ALLOWED


ALR-20A NO TIME LIMIT NO TEMPERATURE LIMIT
RWR NO TIME LIMIT NO TEMPERATURE LIMIT
SI NO TIME LIMIT NO TEMPERATURE LIMIT

Provided no more than one system per group is transmitting, a system may be operated in transmit for the
time and outside air temperature (OAT) depicted. After transmitting, ECM equipment must cool for at least
30 minutes before transmission can be resumed.
1 ECM systems may be operated AT OAT’S above 60°F provided requirements of T.O. 1B-52H-2-20 are met.

Figure 2-1

2-4 Change 10
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES

BEFORE EXTERIOR INSPECTION – SAFETY CHECK

Wearing the chemical defense aircrew ensemble, including plastic boots


and overcape, can cause a buildup of static electricity. For this reason,
aircrews will ground themselves on the aircraft grounding cable prior
to entering the aircraft when the aircrew ensemble is worn.

1. Form 781 – Checked

Check Form 781 for pertinent equipment writeups and chaff and flare loadings not specifically cov-
ered in the pilot’s review of the form. Ensure correct software versions of reprogrammable EC sys-
tems are loaded for your specific mission. Confirm with groundcrew that any missing component
receiving ram air cooling has been replaced by a dummy box to block ram air outlet. If any ECM
equipment that receives air from a common cooling duct is removed and not replaced with a dummy
box, none of the other equipment that receives cooling from that cooling duct can be operated since
cooling air will be lost through the open hole and adequate cooling will not be available for the
remaining equipment. If this is applicable, refer to AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS, Section V of T.O.
1B-52H-1.

2. EW Officer’s Station:

a. Arming Levers – Stowed, No. 1 safety pins installed and locked

If the arming lever(s) has been rotated on a stowed armrest, raising the
armrest will fire the arming initiator. If the arming lever(s) has been
rotated or the arming lever(s) safety pin is not installed, call mainte-
nance immediately and stay clear of the seat.

b. Ground Emergency Egress Handle – Stowed, No. 6 safety pin installed

If the ground emergency egress handle has been rotated or the No. 6
safety pin is not installed, call maintenance immediately and stay clear
of the seat.

c. ECM Equipment, Chaff & Flare Power Switches – OFF

NOTE

ALQ-122, ALQ-153, and ALQ-172 system status cannot be determined


until power is available to the system(s). Less DT An internal
self-protection circuit will ensure the ALQ-172 will remain off until the
POWER switch is activated, following the application of external power
to the aircraft. The ALQ-122 and the ALQ-153 must be checked after
external power is applied to aircraft to ensure the systems are off.

Change 12 2-5
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

d. Chaff, Flare & Rocket Circuit Breakers – Out

During this inspection, the EW officer will ensure that all systems are
completely deactivated to prevent inadvertent jamming or dispensing
of expendables with the application of ground power.

e. WARNING RCVR AC Circuit Breaker – Out

The WARNING RCVR AC circuit breaker on the ECM circuit breaker panel will be pulled to
assure deactivation of the warning receiver.

f. Less DT SYS 15 & SYS 16 IND CONT Circuit Breaker – Out

The SYS 15 AND 16 IND CONT circuit breaker will be pulled to assure deactivation of the
ALQ-172 system.

f. DT ALQ-172(V) CDU Circuit Breaker – Out

g. SI Control & Display Circuit Breakers – Out

3. Gunner’s Station:

a. Ejection Seat Arming Levers – Stowed, No. 1 safety pins installed and locked.

If the arming lever(s) has been rotated on a stowed armrest raising the
armrest will fire the arming initiator. If the arming lever(s) has been
rotated or the arming lever(s) safety pin is not installed, call mainte-
nance immediately and stay clear of the seat.

b. Ground Emergency Egress Handle – Stowed, No. 6 safety pin installed

If the ground emergency egress handle has been rotated or the No. 6
safety pin is not installed, call maintenance immediately and stay clear
of the seat.

c. Hot Cup – OFF

d. RWR Intensity Control – Minimum

2-6 Change 12
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

EXTERIOR INSPECTION

1. Forward/Center Exterior Antennas – Checked

Check protruding ECM antenna and antenna covers mounted on the fuselage for condition, security,
and cleanliness. The ALQ-155 antennas should not be painted.

The bomb door actuator struts will be disconnected before entering the
bomb bay if power is applied to the aircraft.

2. ALE-20 Ground Test Switch – OFF

Check that the ALE-20 ground test switch (in forward wheel well) has not been inadvertently left
propped in the ON position. (Switch is spring-loaded to OFF position.)

On aircraft carrying the AGM-86 missile, flight control surfaces may


inadvertently deploy without warning. Remain clear of missile flight
control deployment areas after safety restraints have been removed.

3. Left ALE-24 Wing Chaff Dispenser Ports – Checked

Visually check that exposed chaff packages conform with mission requirements. Ensure that no chaff
packages are engaged by the rollers.

4. Left Aft Exterior Antennas – Checked

Check protruding antennas and antenna covers mounted on fuselage for condition, security, and
cleanliness.

5. Left ALE-20 Flare Ejectors – Checked

Visually check that ejector covers are secure (if flares are not loaded) or that openings are unob-
structed (if flares are loaded).

6. Tail-Mounted Antennas – Checked

Check protruding ECM antennas and antenna covers mounted on the fuselage for condition, security,
and cleanliness. The ALQ-155 antennas and radar absorber panels should not be painted.

7. Right ALE-20 Flare Ejectors – Checked

Visually check that ejector covers are secure (if flares are not loaded) or that openings are unob-
structed (if flares are loaded).

Change 8 2-7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

8. ALE-20 Safety Interlock Switch Door – Check open, remove streamer, and close

Check that the ALE-20 flare ejector safety interlock switch door is open, then remove streamer and
close the door. If the door is found closed, check with maintenance personnel on the status of the
ALE-20 equipment. When the aircraft is on ground alert in a cocked configuration, the streamer will
be removed and the door closed.

9. Right Aft Exterior Antennas – Checked

Check protruding antennas and antenna covers mounted on fuselage for condition, security, and
cleanliness.

10. Right ALE-24 Wing Chaff Dispenser Ports – Checked

Visually check that exposed chaff packages conform with mission requirements. Ensure that no chaff
packages are engaged by the rollers.

INTERIOR INSPECTION

1. Equipment – Stowed

Ensure that no equipment is stowed on or near heating ducts, outlets,


electrical wiring, or electronic equipment.

2. Ejection Seat:

a. Hatch Link – Checked

Check link connecting escape hatch to catapult safety pin-pull initiator.

b. Maintenance Safety Pins No. 2, 3 & 5 – Checked removed

Ensure that no streamer has been torn from a maintenance safety pin,
thus inadvertently leaving the pin installed. If a maintenance safety
pin is installed, the status of the seat will be ascertained prior to re-
moval of the pin.

c. Catapult Initiator Safety Pin-Pull Cylinder – Pin in place

Catapult initiator safety pin should extend through the catapult initiator. If the pin is pulled
out, the initiator may have been fired; call maintenance immediately.

d. Manual Catapult Pin-Pull Lever – Checked

Lever latched, pin-pull cylinder secured.

2-8
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)


e. Initiator Tube Runs – Checked connected
Check tubes for condition, and for proper and secure connections.
f. Inertia Reel – Checked
Check inertia reel lock for proper functioning.
g. Shoulder Strap Attachment Fittings – Connected
3. Man-Seat Separator – Checked
Ensure that the nylon man-seat separator straps are placed on the bare seat. Survival kit is then
placed over man-seat separator straps. Ensure the Jack Shaft Cotter Pin is installed and the retain-
ing rod has no lateral movement.

Absence of the Jack Shaft Cotter Pin will result in lateral movement of
the man seat separator retaining rod, resulting in failure of the man
seat separator after ejection.
4. Parachute Preflight:
e. Inspection Record:
(1) Inspection & Repack Date – Checked
(2) Automatic Release Time & Altitude Setting – Checked
f. Personal Locator Beacon Lanyard – Snapped/Unsnapped (as required)
For peacetime operations, the personal locator beacon lanyard must be configured for automatic op-
eration. When mission requirements dictate the necessity to avoid detection and automatic actua-
tion of the beacon is not desired, the lanyard must be configured for nonautomatic (manual) opera-
tion.
g. Bailout Oxygen Bottle Pressure & Hose Connector – Checked
h. Parachute Arming Lanyard Anchor – Installed

Be certain that the parachute arming lanyard anchor is securely fas-


tened in the attachment fitting on the seat. Failure to attach the lan-
yard anchor to the seat will necessitate manual operation after ejec-
tion.
i. Parachute Straps – Adjusted (as required)
j. UWARS – Checked
Check security of fittings.
NOTE
UWARS BIT is a maintenance function. Do not perform UWARS BIT
since excessive BIT checks will degrade battery life.
5. Global Survival Kit:3.
a. Kit Installed & Plunger Depressed – Checked
b. Kit Release Handle – Checked down

Change 14 2-9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

c. Mode Selector Lever – AUTO

d. Kit Straps to Parachute – Checked and attached

Check that the attachment fittings are properly connected to the kit, the attachment straps
threaded through the safety belt, and the quick-disconnect fittings are properly attached to the
parachute (with release buttons on outside). Grasp each survival kit strap and perform a quick
jerk to ensure a positive link between the D-Ring and the survival kit straps.

Care will be taken to ensure that the survival kit attachment straps
are properly threaded through the safety belt.

6. Safety Belt Release Fittings – Connected

7. Circuit Breakers – Set

Check all circuit breakers set to IN position on the ECM circuit breaker panel except those for the
chaff dispenser, flare ejector, rocket pods, RWR warning receiver, and the ALQ-172 (Less DT SYS
15 & 16 IND CONT or DT CDU). Chaff dispenser and flare ejector circuit breakers will be left OUT
until ready to dispense chaff or flares and OUT after activity is completed. The Less DT ALQ-172
SYS 15 & 16 IND CONT, DT ALQ-172(V) CDU, and RWR WARNING RCVR circuit breakers will
be left OUT until required IN by the AFTER TAKEOFF – CLIMB checklist.

8. Air Outlet Knobs:4.

a. Upper – As desired

b. Lower – As desired

NOTE

These knob settings are approximate settings only. After the cabin tem-
perature has stabilized, knob adjustment may then be varied slightly
for crew comfort.

9. Interphone – Monitor

The EW officer will monitor the interphone at the station he is occupying.

10. PIHM Assembly – Connect (as required)5.

a. Blower – Attached and secure

Attach the blower to the blower mounting bracket. Ensure that the blower is fastened securely
in the mounting bracket.

Failure to configure the AERP System properly may result in injury or


death to aircrew member while operating in a contaminated environment.

2-10 Change 12
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

NOTE

• When seated, the crew member should configure the AERP System
with the blower hose connected to ventilation inlet, aircraft oxygen
hose connected to the chemical-biological canister and the crossover
valve in the vertical position.

• When not seated, the crew member should configure the AERP System
with aircraft oxygen hose disconnected, the blower hose connected to
the chemical-biological canister, and the crossover valve in the horizon-
tal position.

b. Blower Electrical Connector – Connected

Remove the dust cover from the blower electrical receptacle and connect the blower into the
electrical receptacle.

c. Oxygen Regulator – Set

While holding breath, position the supply lever to ON and the emergency oxygen toggle lever
to EMERGENCY.

Hold breath until steps d. and e. are complete. This will preclude the
inhaling of toxic chemicals during the changeover from blower air to
the aircraft oxygen system.

d. Blower Hose – Disconnect

Disconnect the blower hose from the quick disconnect (QD) pigtail adapter.

e. Aircraft Oxygen – Connected

Connect the aircraft oxygen hose to the quick disconnect (QD). Resume breathing.

If signs of hypoxia occur at high attitudes, ensure the oxygen system


quick disconnect (QD) fittings are properly connected and descend to a
safe altitude as required.

f. Blower Hose – Connected

Connect the blower hose to the ventilation inlet hose on the PIHM manifold.

Crewmembers using upward ejection seats will ensure that blower hose
is under seat armrest before hooking it up to the PIHM manifold.

g. Crossover Valve – Vertical

Rotate the valve to the vertical position and check that oxygen from the aircraft system is flowing
into the mask and that filtered ambient air from the blower is flowing through the defog tubes.

2-11
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

h. Oxygen Regulator Emergency Toggle Lever – NORMAL

i. Intercom Unit – Disconnect and stow

j. PIHM Communication Cord – Connect

Connect the PIHM communication cord to the aircraft communication cord.

k. PIHM Manifold – Connect

Connect the manifold to the CRU-60/P bracket located on the parachute harness.

l. Emergency Oxygen Hose – Connect

Connect the emergency oxygen hose to the fitting on the manifold.

11. Oxygen System – Checked6.

a. Regulator Diluter Lever – 100% OXYGEN

b. Shutoff Lever – OFF

c. Mask & Hose – Check disconnect, then reconnect mask and hose

Ensure that oxygen supply hose is under seat armrest before hookup
with oxygen mask hose.

d. Diluter Valve – Checked

Attempt to draw air through the oxygen mask. Ability to draw air indicates a defective diluter
valve, oxygen hose, and/or connections or mask.

e. Regulator Diluter Lever – NORMAL

Place the diluter valve to NORMAL position and draw air through the mask; if unable, this
indicates that only 100% oxygen is available.

When the oxygen supply shutoff lever is positioned OFF, on the


CRU-73/A, the regulator diluter lever should automatically move to
100% OXYGEN position or it may only move halfway between the
NORMAL and 100% OXYGEN positions. When the supply shutoff lever
is positioned OFF, do not force regulator diluter lever to NORMAL as
this will break the diluter lever.

2-12 Change 4
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

NOTE

• If the diluter valve is stuck in the 100% position, this will prohibit the
detection of smoke or fumes when use of normal oxygen is required.
• If the CRU-73A regulator is installed, the crewmember will not be able
to draw air through the system with the shutoff lever OFF. The diluter
lever may be moved to NORMAL with the shutoff lever OFF on some
CRU-73A regulators. The diluter valve will be in the 100% oxygen posi-
tion when the shutoff lever is OFF on all CRU-73A regulators.

f. Shutoff Lever – ON

g. Pressure – Checked
Pressure gage reads approximately 300 psi.

h. Emergency Toggle Lever – TEST MASK


With mask disconnected at one side of helmet, the flow indicator should indicate continuous flow.

i. Mask – Test
Attach mask to helmet and hold breath; indicator should indicate no flow.

NOTE

Flow condition may be indicated by a slight leak around the face form.
If light hand pressure against the mask does not stop the flow, the
mask is unacceptable.

j. Emergency Toggle Lever – NORMAL

k. Regulator Diluter Lever – NORMAL/100% (as required)

12. Portable Oxygen Bottle – Serviced and stowed

Pressure should read approximately 300 psi and altitude selector knob positioned to NORM.

Oxygen will rapidly accelerate any ignition source, such as a spark,


into a flash fire. Dirt, grease, and hand lotion all can act as a fuel to
the fire. Therefore, when recharging a portable oxygen bottle, crew-
members will wear Nomex flight gloves and the helmet with visor
down. These gloves should be free of oil and grease.

13. Lights – Checked7.

a. ALQ-122 Power Switch – OFF


Check all panel lights off.

b. ALQ-153(V) Control-Indicator Panel – Checked


Check all panel lights off.

c. ALQ-172 Waveguide Low Pressure Light – Press-to-test

Change 9 2-13
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

14. ECM Equipment Controls Preset:8.

a. DT ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel Switches:

(1) FWD System Power Switch – FWD

(2) AFT System Power Switch – AFT

(3) CDU Altitude Override Switch – CDU ALT

b. ALQ-172 Blanking Switch – HIGH

c. SI Control Panel Dimming & Audio Controls – Minimum

Rotate intensity and audio control knobs fully ccw.

NOTE

SI audio is obtained thru the SI mixer switch at the EW, gunner, or DI


station.

d. SI Power Switch – ON

e. MFD – Adjusted

Rotate the brightness and contrast knobs fully counterclockwise (ccw). Adjust the brightness
knob clockwise (cw) until MFD illumination is visible, then rotate it ccw until MFD illumination
just disappears. Adjust contrast knob until optimum presentation is obtained.

f. MFD Presentation – Checked

If, after adjusting brightness and contrast, the MFD has no presentation call maintenance.

g. SI Control Panel Dimming & Audio Control – Minimum

Rotate intensity and audio control knobs full counterclockwise.

h. SI SYSTEM Power Button-Indicator – Press and release, all panel lights and MFD off

i. SI Control & Display Circuit Breakers – OUT

j. RWR Intensity & Audio Controls – Minimum

k. Flare & Chaff Counters – Checked

Check all counters for correct loading (should agree with Form 781 entry).

15. Refuel Valve Emergency Control Lever – CENTER

16. Defense Instructor’s Station Oxygen System – OFF and 100%

2-14 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

17. IFF:

a. IFF Mode 4 Computer – Encoded

Load the cryptographic variables using an electronic fill device.

- - - - - - CYZ-10 Key Loading - - - - - -k.

For CYZ-10 key loading refer to the combat crew communications checklist.

- - - - - - KYK-13 Key Loading - - - - - -l.

(1) Mode Select Switch – OFF/CHECK

(2) Fill Cable – Connect

Remove the dust cover from the fill connector port of the KIT-1C and connect the KYK-13
to the KIT-1C using the fill cable.

NOTE

The KYK-13 may be connected directly to the KIT-1C fill port and keys
loaded without using the fill cable.

(3) Address Select Switch – Set

Set the address select switch to the position where the first key is stored.

(4) Mode Select Switch – ON

(5) Mode Select Switch – OFF/CHECK

(6) Address Select Switch – Set

Set the address select switch to the position where the second key is stored.

(7) Mode Select Switch – ON

Observe that the KIT-1C fill LED flashes once.

NOTE

If the fill LED doesn’t flash after both keys are loaded, the keys did not
load properly. Check the KYK-13 for serviceability and that correct key-
tapes have been loaded. Repeat steps (1) and (3) through (7).

(8) Mode Select Switch – OFF/CHECK

(9) Fill Cable – Disconnect

Disconnect the KYK-13 from the KIT-1C and replace the fill connector port dust cover.

Change 5 2-15
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

- - - - - - KOI-18 Key Loading - - - - - -

(1) Fill Cable – Connect

Remove the dust cover from the fill connector port of the KIT-1C and connect the KOI-18
to the KIT-1C using the fill cable.

(2) First Keytape – Load

Insert the first keytape and slowly pull it through the KOI-18.

NOTE

• Ensure the tape is correctly inserted with the guide holes in the tape
aligned with the dots on the flip-up cover of the KOI-18.

• Never pull the tape backwards through the KOI-18. Doing so could
cause damage to or distortion of the tape, causing the tape to be unus-
able.

(3) Fill Cable – Disconnect, then reconnect

NOTE

The fill cable must be disconnected then reconnected in order to suc-


cessfully load the second key.

(4) Second Keytape – Load

Insert the second keytape and slowly pull it through the KOI-18 while observing that the
fill LED flashes once.

NOTE

• Ensure the tape is correctly inserted with the guide holes in the tape
aligned with the dots on the flip-up cover of the KOI-18.

• Never pull the tape backwards through the KOI-18. Doing so could
cause damage to or distortion of the tape, causing the tape to be unus-
able.

• If the fill LED doesn’t flash after both keys are loaded, the keys did
not load properly. Check the KOI-18 for serviceability and that correct
keytapes are being used. Repeat steps (2) through (4).

(5) Fill Cable – Disconnect

Disconnect the KOI-18 from the KIT-1C and replace the fill connector port dust cover.

2-16
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

(6) Keytapes – Remove and stow

Return the keytapes to the appropriate storage location (Comm kit).

A keytape should not be left in the KOI-18 reader head for an extended
period of time. This will shorten fill battery life.

b. IFF Mode 2 – Set

Set to appropriate setting if required.

18. Bunk Oxygen System – OFF and 100%

19. Gunner’s Station Oxygen System – OFF and 100%

20. Upper Deck Fire Extinguisher – Checked and stowed

Ensure that appropriate safety device (safety wire seal or locking pin lever as applicable) is installed.
Check for fully serviced pressure.

21. Gunner’s Station Portable Oxygen Bottle – Serviced and stowed

Pressure should read approximately 300 psi and altitude selector knob positioned to NORM.

Oxygen will rapidly accelerate any ignition source, such as a spark,


into a flash fire. Dirt, grease, and hand lotion all can act as a fuel to
the fire. Therefore, when recharging a portable oxygen bottle, crew-
members will wear Nomex flight gloves and the helmet with visor
down. These gloves should be free of oil and grease.

22. Sextant Mount Port – Check closed

23. Upper Deck Sliding Hatch – Open and locked

The upper deck sliding hatch will be opened and locked prior to start-
ing engines, takeoff, air refueling, low level activity, planned unusual
maneuvers, penetration, and landings.

Change 9 2-17
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

24. Crew Report – Completed9.

a. Pilot actuates the emergency alarm switch to ABANDON, switches interphone to call position,
and announces, ‘‘Crew report.’’

b. The sequence for crew reporting is: N, G, EW, RN, CP, P, IN, DI, 10TH, IP.

c. All crewmembers will press call button and report ‘‘(crewmember’s) check complete’’ in sequence.
The check consists of abandon signal and call operation. The EW officer may report from the
DI position. On return to the seat, the interphone call button will be checked with the pilot.

25. Oxygen Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN (if leaving the aircraft for an extended period of time)

All data on pages 2-19 and 2-20 (Deleted)


2-18 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PRETAKEOFF PROCEDURES

STARTING ENGINES

Whenever contamination is suspected, 100% OXYGEN will be used


during ground operation and takeoff.

1. Interphone, UHF & V/UHF DJ Radios – Monitored

2. Stand By to Taxi – Report if not ready to taxi

3. Parachute & Safety Belt – Fastened

• Tighten the parachute-survival kit attachment straps as tightly as pos-


sible to prevent the safety belt from inflicting facial injuries during
ejection bailout.

• Ensure that the parachute arming lanyard is not entangled in the


parachute harness. Lanyard entanglement could cause failure in seat
separation and failure of the automatic features of the parachute.

NOTE

• If it becomes necessary to leave the seat, the crewmember should open


the safety belt and unbuckle the parachute harness, leaving the para-
chute and survival kit in the seat. If the parachute is worn when leav-
ing the seat, upon returning to the seat, it will be necessary to take
it off in order to reinstall the parachute and safety belt in the seat.

• Steps 3 thru 5 may be accomplished during taxi.

4. Oxygen Hose & Bailout Oxygen Bottle – Connected to mask

Ensure that oxygen supply hose is under the seat armrest before hook-
up with oxygen mask hose.

5. Oxygen Regulator – As required

NOTE

For formation takeoffs, the warning receiver and SI may be turned on


and checked early IAW normal procedures in the AFTER TAKEOFF/
CLIMB and EW CALIBRATION AND INTERFERENCE checklists.
This may be done any time after switching to aircraft power. After com-
pleting the warning receiver and SI check, the systems may then be
used as an aid to monitor the position of other aircraft.

Change 10 2-21
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PRETAKEOFF PROCEDURES (Cont)

TAXIING AND BEFORE LINEUP CHECKLIST (Copilot/EW reads)

Checklist appears in EW officer’s abbreviated checklist and will be read on request of the pilot.

2-22 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES

AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB

1. ECM Equipment:

a. WARNING RCVR AC Circuit Breaker – In

b. Less DT SYS 15 & SYS 16 IND CONT Circuit Breaker – In

The SYS 15 AND 16 IND CONT circuit breaker will be pushed in to assure activation of the
ALQ-172 system.

b. DT ALQ-172(V) CDU Circuit Breaker – In

The ALQ-172(V) CDU circuit breaker will be pushed in to assure activation of the ALQ-172 system.

c. SI Control & Display Circuit Breakers – In

d. All ECM equipment power switches (except ALQ-122, chaff, and flare) will be turned on during
climbout after flaps up. Care should be exercised that ECM transmitters are in standby except
when they are to be used.

To prevent accidental actuation of the transmitter switches, extreme


care will be exercised when leaving or returning to the seat.

NOTE

• Temporarily place one AN/ALQ-155 transmitter to STBY 1 to check the


software revision number in the threat engage windows. Then set all
transmitters to STBY 2.

• All RWR indicator control panel lights should illuminate momentarily


and one burst of Launch Audio may be heard when system is turned
on.

• The AN/ALQ-153(V) STBY/OPER pushbutton will be placed in the op-


erate position only when authorized by Air Force and MAJCOM direc-
tives.

• When AN/ALQ-153(V) POWER pushbutton is pressed, the POWER and


TEST/MALF lights come on for duration of warmup period (minimum
of 42 to a maximum of 130 seconds). Following warmup, the POWER
and TEST/MALF lights go off and the STBY/OPER light comes on (am-
ber).

• The AN/ALQ-172 is capable of interfering with precision approach ra-


dars. On training sorties, the Less DT STANDBY/OPERATE pushbut-
tons; DT MASTER STANDBY/OPERATE pushbutton will be placed in
the OPERATE position, only when authorized by Air Force and MAJ-
COM directives.

Change 12 2-23
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

2. Oxygen Check – Completed

a. During the climb, copilot requests an oxygen check at 12,000 feet. The sequence for oxygen report
is EW officer, radar navigator, pilot/copilot. The reporting crewmember will visually check other
crewmembers for alertness. He will report oxygen check for the compartment. Oxygen panel at
each occupied crew position will be checked on all oxygen checks for:

(1) Oxygen Supply Shutoff Lever – ON

(2) Regulator Diluter Lever – As required

(3) Pressure – 300 psi

(4) Flow Indicator – Functions normally

(5) Emergency Toggle Lever – NORMAL

b. EW officer, radar navigator, and pilot/copilot report ‘‘Oxygen panels checked.’’ In addition, pilot/
copilot reports ‘‘Cabin altitude ______________________ feet.’’

c. Copilot requests oxygen check at level-off and during cruise at 1-hour intervals when cabin alti-
tude is below 12,000 feet, at 30-minute intervals when cabin altitude is 12,000 to 25,000 feet,
and at no longer than 10-minute intervals when cabin altitude is above 25,000 feet.
Crewmembers will report when complete.

3. Level-Off Station Check – Accomplished

Crewmembers will accomplish station checks at level-off, at approximately 30 minute intervals dur-
ing cruise, and prior to leaving crew position during flight. A check for systems operation and proper
switch settings for prevailing conditions will be made during each station check. Station checks will
include circuit breakers and equipment stowage.

2-24
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

EW CALIBRATION AND INTERFERENCE

The calibration of ECM equipment and interference to and from other aircraft systems will be determined
as soon as practical after takeoff. The purpose of this check is to determine whether the equipment meets
the minimum requirements for dependable operation. If this abbreviated check reveals a malfunction or
failure and conditions permit, refer to the applicable portion of T.O. 1B-52H-1-13 and T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1
Malfunction, Analysis, and Emergency Operation Section. Each transmitter will be checked for normal effi-
ciency by comparing the output with like systems, taking the antenna position into consideration. Transmit-
ters will be momentarily activated in a clear band, consistent with clearance and operating restrictions. On
training missions only, when the mission profile precludes accomplishing the entire check prior to the HHCL/
HEW, only systems and frequency bands programmed for use will be checked. Deviations from checklist
sequence to comply with local area clearances are authorized. The entire crew must be alerted for coordina-
tion during this check. UHF guard frequency must be monitored throughout the check.

NOTE

• Receivers and appropriate transmitters may be checked during climb


commensurate with clearance and crew coordination.

• ALQ-155 transmitters will be placed in STBY 2 mode no more than 30


minutes prior to ECM activity and placed in STBY 1/warmup mode
after completion of ECM activity unless scheduled for activity within
30 minutes.

• Items that are circled will be repeated for each receiver band trace and
like transmitter.

1. Mixer Switches – As required

2. ALR-20A Less DS :

a. Sweep Width Controls (7) – Full CW

b. RF Level Controls (7) – Checked, adjust for optimum signal presentation

Check for a change in signal amplitude by varying each RF level control, then set to optimum
level.

NOTE

Use RF test if no signals are available.

c. Scale Illumination – Optimum

d. Scope Presentation – Checked

Check for presence of known signals and interference.

e. RF Test Button – Pressed, signals checked

f. Expansion Trace Selectors A & B – Checked

Set expansion A selector on the desired trace. Monitor expansion trace A for display of this trace.
RF test may be used. Repeat procedures for expansion trace B.

Change 5 2-25
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

g. Right & Left Mark Controls – Checked

Vary the mark control. Mark should move across both expansion traces. Repeat procedure for
left mark control.

h. Sweep Width Control – Checked, then full CCW

Rotate the sweep width control CCW from the full CW position to select a segment approximately
1/4 of the trace. Vary the manual frequency control and the segment should move across the
trace. Continue rotation of the sweep width control to the full CCW position (in detent).

i. Manual Frequency Control – Adjust to signal frequency

NOTE

Use RF test if no signals are present.

j. Volume Control – Adjusted

k. Sweep Width Control – Full CW

2. ALR-20A DS :

a. Sweep Width Controls (7) – Full CW

b. RF Level Controls (7) – Checked, adjust for optimum signal presentation

Check for a change in signal amplitude by varying each RF level control, then set to optimum
level.

NOTE

Use RF test if no signals are available.

c. Master Illumination – Optimum

d. Edge Illumination – Optimum

e. Scale Illumination – Optimum

f. Scope Presentation – Checked

Check for presence of known signals and interference.

g. Persistence – Checked and set

Check control of persistence levels P0 through P4 and set for optimum viewing of transmitter
operation and calibration.

h. RF Test Button – Pressed, signals checked

2-26 Change 5
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

i Expansion Trace Selectors A & B – Checked

Set expansion A selector on the desired trace. Monitor expansion trace A for display of this trace.
RF test may be used. Repeat procedures for expansion trace B.

j. Right & Left Mark Controls – Checked

Vary the mark control. Mark should move across both expansion traces. Repeat procedure for
left mark control.

k. Sweep Width Control – Checked, then full CCW

Rotate the sweep width control CCW from the full CW position to select a segment approximately
1/4 of the trace. Vary the manual frequency control and the segment should move across the
trace. Continue rotation of the sweep width control to the full CCW position (in detent).

l. Manual Frequency Control – Adjust to signal frequency

NOTE

Use RF test if no signals are present.

m. Volume Control – Adjusted

n. Sweep Width Control – Full CW

o. BIT Select Switch – BIT 1

BIT Status checked.

p. BIT Select Switch – OFF

3. RWR:

a. Warning Receiver Mixer Switch – Set

b. Audio & Intensity Controls – Optimum

Adjust intensity control clockwise until an optimum display of symbols is obtained on the RWR.
It may be necessary to activate the test function for symbol presentation.

c. Self-Test – Accomplished

Any panel light that does not illuminate should be pressed to verify it comes on. Verify correct
software version is loaded as annotated in Form 781.

d. CRT Indicator – Check for interference

NOTE

If interference is received, have radar navigator place the OAS radar in


STANDBY, as necessary, to isolate interference source.

Change 7 2-26A/(2-26B blank)


BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

4. ALQ-153(V):

a. ALQ-153 Mixer Switch – Set

b. LAMPS PUSH TO TEST Control – Pressed, brightness adjusted

All control indicator lights should come on and may be adjusted to desired brightness by rotating
the control knob. Range indicator reads 8.8.

c. TONE PUSH TO TEST Control – Pressed, volume adjusted

Missile warning tone should be audible (EW and G) for approximately 3 seconds. Adjust volume
as desired by rotating the control knob.

d. TTI ENAB/INHBT Pushbutton – INHBT

e. MIN RNG ENAB/INHBT – ENAB, set to fourth setting

f. TEST/MALF Pushbutton – Pressed, self-test accomplished


(1) TEST, MIN RNG ENAB, and 0-3 lights – ON
Lights remain on for duration of the test (approximately 15 seconds). Initial reading in the
range indicator should be approximately equal to the groundspeed readout (within 5%) of
the OAS ground speed.
(2) JAM Light – On
It should remain on for approximately 4 seconds.
(3) LMSL & RMSL Lights – On
After approximately 8 1/2 seconds these lights come on, the range indicator reads 1.0 and
a 3 second tone burst sounds.
(4) Range Indicator – Decreases in steps to 0.5
The CM TRIG light should come on at the time specified and remains on until 0.5.
(5) 0-3, LMSL, RMSL & TEST Lights – Off, system to STBY
After 15 seconds, these lights should go out and the range indicator is blank. STBY light
is on and the system is ready for normal operation.

g. STBY/OPER Pushbutton – OPER (if applicable)

Check receivers for presentation and interference. The MALF light will illuminate momentarily
while transitioning from standby to operate or operate to standby. Although the automatic BIT
occurs every 1.5 seconds, it may take from 15 to 70 seconds before a BIT failure is displayed
on the C/I.

NOTE

Before going back into the OPER mode after the test, the system
should remain in STBY for approximately 3 seconds, otherwise a bit er-
ror will occur.

h. STBY/OPER Pushbutton – STBY

Change 12 2-27
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

5. ALT-16A:

a. Channel Selector Buttons – Pressed as desired

b. Power Selector – TRANSMIT

c. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

d. Look-Thru Panel Controls – Checked

Check for proper operation of the Look-Thru buttons applicable to each transmitter.

e. Power Selector – STANDBY

6. ALQ-122 Power Switch – ON

NOTE

ALT-16A transmitters will not operate in the normal barrage mode


with the ALQ-122 system power turned on.

7. ALT-32:

a. Spot A & B Bandwidth Controls – CCW to minimum

b. Spot A & B Frequency Controls – Set to clear frequencies

c. Transmit Channel Selector – A

d. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

e. Spot A Bandwidth Control – Checked and CCW

f. Transmit Channel Selector – B

g. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

h. Spot B Bandwidth Control – Checked and CCW

i. Transmit Channel Selector – A & B

Check that both A & B signals are present.

j. Transmit Channel Selector – BARRAGE 1, 2, 3, and 4

k. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

l. Look-Thru Panel Controls – Checked

Check for operation of the Look-Thru Buttons applicable to each transmitter.

m. Transmit Channel Selector – STBY1.2.3.4.5.6.7.

2-28 Change 12
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)a.b.c.d.e.

8. ALQ-155 D/E Band:

a. Program Selector – BARR

b. Manual Rate Control – Full CW

c. RF Bandwidth Control – FM OFF

d. Center Frequency Control – Set to clear frequency

e. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed


Pressing the switch will ensure no ERR malfunction exists within the system.

f. Mode Selector – MAN

g. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

h. RF Bandwidth Control – Checked and FM OFF

Increasing RF bandwidth may cause the center frequency knob to


move. Do not use excessive force or damage to the geartrain will occur.
Instead, rotate the center frequency knob to allow free movement of the
RF bandwidth knob.

i. DES Switch – Pressed, signal checked


Check for clear band around system search width. The LOK light should not illuminate and the
center frequency control should operate normally.

j. ALR-20A Expansion Trace Selector – Set to required trace

k. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Set


Select approximately 1/4 of main trace. Position selected segment around transmitter signal.

l. Programmer – Checked

NOTE

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1, ALQ-155 Normal Operation/ECIC, steps 1


through 3 for steps (1) through (3) below.

(1) Program Selector – 6

(2) RF Bandwidth – Set as required


Check visually for modulation.

(3) RF Bandwidth – Set as required

(4) Program Selector – MAN, check for coincidence and modulation

(5) ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CCW


Tune to transmitter signal.

Change 12 2-29
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

(6) Manual Rate Control – Checked and full CW

Check for audible increase/decrease in pulse rate.

(7) Program Selector – A2

Check audible change in pulse rate.

(8) Program Selector – A1

Check audible change in pulse rate.

m. Program Selector – BARR

n. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CW

NOTE

Steps p and q must be accomplished within 30 seconds after initiating


step o.

o. Mode Selector – BIT, check for signal presence

Switch is spring-loaded to the AUTO position. If test is successful, all lights except FAU will come
on. If self-test is not successful, the ERR light will come on and the THREAT ENGAGED indica-
tor will display a character relating to the specific malfunction.

p. DES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal frequency and bandwidth should increase.

q. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal should disappear.

r. Mode Selector – Warmup mode

9. ALQ-155 E/F Band:

a. Program Selector – BARR

b. Manual Rate Control – Full CW

c. RF Bandwidth Control – FM OFF

d. Center Frequency Control – Set to clear frequency

e. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed

Pressing the switch will ensure no ERR malfunction exists within the system.

f. Mode Selector – MAN

g. Signal Presentation, Calibration, & Interference – Checked

2-30 Change 12
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

h. RF Bandwidth Control – Checked and FM OFF

Increasing RF bandwidth may cause the center frequency knob to


move. Do not use excessive force or damage to the geartrain will occur.
Instead, rotate the center frequency knob to allow free movement of the
RF bandwidth knob.

i. DES Switch – Pressed, signal checked; set signal to expected threat frequency

Check for clear band around system search width. The LOK light should not illuminate and the
center frequency control should operate normally. Set to an expected threat frequency for the
coincidence check.

j. ALR-20A Expansion Trace Selector – Set to required trace

k. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Set

Select approximately 1/4 of main trace. Position selected segment around transmitter signal.

l. (Deleted)

m. Programmer – Checked

NOTE

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1, ALQ-155 Normal Operation/ECIC, steps 1


through 3 for steps (1) through (3) below.

(1) Program Selector – 6

(2) RF Bandwidth – Set as required

Check visually for modulation.

(3) RF Bandwidth – Set as required

(4) Program Selector – MAN, check for coincidence and modulation

(5) ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CCW

Tune to transmitter signal.

(6) Manual Rate Control – Checked and full CW

Check for audible increase/decrease of pulse rate.

(7) Program Selector – 2

Check for audible change in pulse rate.

Change 10 2-31
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

(8) Program Selector – A2

Check for audible change in pulse rate.

(9) Program Selector – A1

Check for audible change in pulse rate.

n. Slave Function (Systems 5 & 8) – Checked

(1) Program Selector – Slave

(2) Master Program Selector – 2

Check visually for modulation.

o. Program Selector(s) – BARR

p. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CW

NOTE

Steps r and s must be accomplished within 30 seconds after initiating


step q.

q. Mode Selector – BIT, check for signal presence

Switch is spring-loaded to the AUTO position. If test is successful, all lights except FAU will come
on. If self-test is not successful, the ERR light will come on and the THREAT ENGAGED indica-
tor will display a character relating to the specific malfunction.

r. DES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal frequency and bandwidth should increase.

s. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal should disappear.

t. Mode Selector – Warmup mode

10. ALQ-155 G/H/I Band:

a. Antenna Selector – FWD (Systems 1 and 2)

b. Program Selector – BARR

c. Manual Rate Control – Full CW

d. RF Bandwidth Control – FM OFF

e. Center Frequency Control – Set to clear frequency

f. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed

Pressing the switch will ensure no ERR malfunction exists within the system.

2-32 Change 10
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)11.a.b.c.d.e.f.

g. Mode Switch:

(1) ALQ-172 FWD Waveguide Light (System 1 and 2) - Checked OFF

(2) Mode Selector Switch - MAN

h. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

NOTE

When the ALQ-155 systems 1 and/or 2 transmitters are transmitting


with the forward looking antenna selected, and the ALQ-172 FWD PD
is in OPER, system 1 and/or 2 will be blanked at a low duty cycle at
ALQ-155 frequencies above approximately 1.73 GHz below the maxi-
mum dial indication. This blanking also occurs with the ALQ-155 sys-
tem 1 and/or 2 omni-directional antenna selected, and either the
ALQ-172 FWD PD or AFT PD in OPER.

i. RF Bandwidth Control – Checked and FM OFF

Increasing RF bandwidth may cause the center frequency knob to


move. Do not use excessive force or damage to the geartrain will occur.
Instead, rotate the center frequency knob to allow free movement of the
RF bandwidth knob.

j. DES SWITCH – Pressed, signal checked; set signal to expected threat frequency

Check for clear band around system search width. The LOK light should not illuminate and the
center frequency control should operate normally. Set to an expected threat frequency for the
coincidence check.

k. ALR-20A Expansion Trace Selector – Set to required trace

l. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Set

Select approximately 1/4 of main trace. Position selected segment around transmitter signal.

m. Program Selector – MAN, check for coincidence and modulation

Adjustments of manual rate control and RF level may be necessary to properly display coinci-
dence of back and peak power levels. Check visually for modulation.

n. Programmer – Checked (G band)

(1) Programmer Selector – 2

Check visually for modulation.

(2) Program Selector (Systems 4 & 6) – Slave

(3) Master Program Selector – 2

Check visually for modulation.

Change 5 2-33
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

n. Programmer – Checked (H/I band)

(1) ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CCW

Tune to transmitter signal.

(2) Manual Rate Control – Checked and Full CW

Check for audible increase/decrease of pulse rate.

(3) ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Set

Select approximately 1/4 of main trace. Position selected segment around transmitter signal.

NOTE

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1, ALQ-155 Normal Operation/ECIC – H/I


for steps (4) thru (7).

(4) Program Selector – 6

(5) RF Bandwidth – Set as required

Check visually for modulation.

(6) RF Bandwidth – Set as required

(7) Program Selector – 4

Check visually for modulation.

o. Program Selector(s) – BARR

p. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CW

q. Antenna Selector – Checked (Systems 1 & 2)

(1) OMNI – Pressed

(2) Signal Presentation and Interference – Checked

r. Omni Antenna Monitor Switch – Pressed, signal presentation checked

NOTE

Steps t and u must be accomplished within 30 seconds after initiating


step s.

s. Mode Selector – BIT, check for signal presence

Switch is spring-loaded to the AUTO position. If test is successful, all lights except FAU will come
on. If self-test is not successful, the ERR light will come on and the THREAT ENGAGED indica-
tor will display a character relating to the specific malfunction.

2-34
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

t. DES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal frequency and bandwidth should increase.

u. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal should disappear.

v. Mode Selector – Warmup mode

11. ALQ-122:1.

a. Lamp Test – Accomplished

b. Mode Switch – XMIT

c. ALT-16A Power Selectors – TRANSMIT

d. Test-in-Progress Switch – Pressed, self-test accomplished

e. ALT-16A Power Selectors – STANDBY

f. Mode Switch – STBY

12. DT ALQ-172:2.

a. ALQ-172 Waveguide Low Pressure Warning Lights – Press to test, ensure off

b. MASTER STANDBY/OPERATE Indicator – Press, indicator displays OPER

c. CDU Status Page – Select

d. CDU Go Indicator – Press, fixed lights and indicators checked

e. FWD & AFT STANDBY/OPERATE Indicators – Press, until all systems are in operate

f. CDU TEST Switch – Press

Press to accomplish self-test. Verify the correct software versions are loaded for the ALQ-172
FWD, AFT, CDU, and HI/LO Symbol files. Verify LRU status.

g. FWD & AFT STANDBY/OPERATE Indicators – Press, until all systems are in standby

h. MASTER STANDBY/OPERATE Indicator – Press, indicator displays STBY

Change 12 2-35
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

12. Less DT ALQ-172:3.

a. Lamp Test Pushbutton – Pressed, indicators checked

Press to test ALQ-172 indicator control panel, monitor and waveguide low pressure indicator
lights.

b. Self-Test Selector – Pressed, self-test accomplished

Check for receiver interference during self-test cycle. Verify correct software version is loaded
for the ALQ-172 as annotated in AFTO Form 781.

NOTE

The ALQ-172 blanking switch will be in the high position to ensure a


valid self-test.

13. SI System: 4.

a. System Power – Check on

Check operational data and status appears on the SI MFD.

b. SI Mixer Switch – Set

c. Audio Controls – Optimum

d. System Test – Accomplished

Press and release SYS TEST button. Ensure missile launch tone is audible and verify initiated
BIT display. Set audio control to mid range. Press and release SYS TEST button again to return
to the operational data and status presentation.

e. BIT Status – Verified, note software version

Press and release BIT STATUS button and verify operational BIT status on the SI MFD. Note
software versions of respective sensors for optimum operational employment. Press and release
BIT STATUS button again to return to the operational data and status display.

2-36 Change 12
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

EW EQUIPMENT SET

Operational ECM equipment will be preset for use as soon as practical after completing the EQUIPMENT
CALIBRATION AND INTERFERENCE CHECK. Additionally, applicable portions of this checklist may be
used throughout penetration and withdrawal to verify equipment readiness and settings. On training mis-
sions, applicable portions of this checklist will be used prior to and after all ECM activity. (Successive runs
against a single site do not require reaccomplishment of this checklist.) Transmitters will not be reactivated.
Antenna locations, intelligence data, and the results of the calibration and interference check will be consid-
ered when presetting equipment.

NOTE

• ALQ-155 transmitters will be placed in STBY 2 mode no more than 30


minutes prior to ECM activity and placed in WARMUP mode after
completion of ECM activity unless scheduled for activity within 30 min-
utes.

• Items that are circled will be repeated for each receiver band trace and
like transmitter.

1. Mixer Switches – As required

2. ALR-20A:

a. Controls – Optimum

b. Expansion Traces – Set

Adjust the expansion traces to monitor a threat frequency band.

c. Persistence – Optimum DS

3. RWR:

a. Audio Control – Optimum

b. Dimming Control – Optimum

c. Mode Button – As required

d. Altitude Button – As required

e. Unknown Button – As required

f. Threat File – As required

Change 7 2-37
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

4. ALQ-122:

a. Program Switch – As required

b. Cover Switch – As required

c. Mode Switch – As required

d. ALT-16A Power Selector – As required

NOTE

For proper operation of the ALQ-122, both ALT-16A transmitters will


be in radiate and should be placed in standby when operation is no
longer required to conserve TWT life.

5. ALT-16A:

a. Channel Buttons – Pressed as required

6. ALT-32:

a. Frequency & Bandwidth Controls – As required

7. ALQ-155:

a. Transmitter Mode – As required

b. Ctr Freq & RF Bandwidth Controls – As required

Increasing RF bandwidth may cause the center frequency knob to


move. Do not use excessive force or damage to the geartrain will occur.
Instead, rotate the center frequency knob to allow free movement of the
RF bandwidth knob.

c. Program Selector – As required

d. Manual Rate Control – As required

e. G/H Antenna Selector – As required

8. ALE-24:

a. Power Switch – OFF

b. Programmer Selector Switches – As required

c. Dispense Switches – OFF

2-38
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

d. Circuit Breaker – In or as directed

NOTE

All chaff circuit breakers available to the EW officer will be pulled at


all times except when accomplishing this checklist in preparation for
actual dispensing of chaff. The proper positioning of circuit breakers
will then be governed by existing directives.

e. Power Switch – ON or as directed

f. Press-to-Test Lights – Tested

g. Auto Mode Switch – As required

9. ALE-20:

a. Power Switch – OFF

b. Flare Program – As required

c. Transfer Switch – Checked OFF

d. Pilot’s Flare Set Power Switch – ON or as directed

NOTE

The pilot’s ALE-20 flare set power switch will be in the OFF position
and flare circuit breakers pulled at all times except when accomplish-
ing this checklist in preparation for actual dispensing of flares or to dry
fire the system. (This check is only necessary for initial accomplish-
ment of this checklist unless flares are actually programmed to be dis-
pensed.) The proper positioning of appropriate ALE-20 switches during
preparation for actual dispensing will then be governed by existing di-
rectives.

e. Circuit Breakers – In or as directed

f. Power Switch – ON or as directed

Removing power from the system while a program is in progress can


result in the clutch coil cam being stuck in the detent position making
program mode inoperative.

g. Press-to-Test Lights – Tested

h. Auto Mode Switch – As required

i. Crew Notified – Accomplished

NOTE

Prior to any normal dispensing or emergency jettisoning of flares, the


EW officer will notify all crewmembers of his intended action.

2-39
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

10. DT ALQ-172:10.

a. Altitude – As required

b. FWD & AFT Systems Standby/Operate – As required

c. File Select – As required

NOTE

The ALQ-172 blanking switch will be in HIGH position at all times ex-
cept when excessive OAS interference is experienced.

10. Less DT ALQ-172:

d. Mode Selector – As required

e. Standby/Operate Function Selector – As required

f. Secure Switch – As required

NOTE

The ALQ-172 blanking switch will be in HIGH position at all times ex-
cept when excessive OAS interference is experienced.

11. ALQ-153(V):

a. TTI Control – As required

b. MIN RNG Control – As required

c. TTI & MIN RNG ENAB/INHBT Pushbutton – As required

d. HI/LO ALT Pushbutton – As required

e. STBY/OPER Pushbutton – As required

12. Master Expendables Control Panel:

a. Flare Burst Interval Selector – Set

b. Flare Interval Selector – As required

13. SI System Control Panel

a. Audio Control – Optimum

b. Dimming Control – Optimum

c. ALQ-155 MODE Button-Indicator – As required

d. Unknown Button – As required

2-40 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

PRELANDING OPERATIONAL CHECK

1. Periscopic Sextant – Stowed, port closed

2. Special Weapons Manual Lock Handle – Stowed, door closed

3. Prelanding Operational Check – Completed


All ECM equipment not used for ECM runs during the sortie or checked during the EW CALIBRA-
TION AND INTERFERENCE CHECK will be checked for operation prior to landing in accordance
with procedures for the condensed check as outlined in the EW CALIBRATION AND INTERFER-
ENCE checklist, consistent with clearance requirements and operating restrictions. Discrepancies
will be entered in the appropriate forms.
4. ECM Equipment:
a. ALQ-155 – WARMUP
b. ALQ-122 and ALT-16/32A – STANDBY
c. Chaff & Flare Power Switches – OFF
d. Chaff, Flare, and Rocket Circuit Breakers – Out
e. RWR Intensity Control – Minimum
f. RWR Power Button – Pressed, POWER light out
g. WARNING RCVR AC Circuit Breaker – Out
h. ALQ-153 Power Pushbutton – Pressed, all panel lights off
i. ALR-20A Power Switch – OFF
j. DT ALQ-172 CDU Power Pushbutton – Pressed, Go Indicator (FWD, AFT, CDU) OFF
k. DT ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel System Forward Power Pushbutton/Indicator – FWD OFF
l. DT ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel System AFT Power Pushbutton/Indicator – AFT OFF
m. DT ALQ-172(V) CDU Circuit Breaker – Out
The ALQ-172(V) CDU circuit breaker will be pulled to assure deactivation of the ALQ-172 system.
n. Less DT ALQ-172 Power Pushbutton – Pressed, all panel lights off
o. Less DT SYS 15 & 16 IND CONT Circuit Breaker – Out
The SYS 15 & 16 IND CONT circuit breaker will be pulled to assure deactivation of the ALQ-172
system.
p. SI Control Panel Intensity & Audio Controls – Minimum
q. SI SYSTEM POWER Button-Indicator – Press and release, all panel lights off
r. SI Control & Display Circuit Breakers – Out

If one or more generators are off the line, all electronic warfare equip-
ment not required for defense of the aircraft will be turned off prior to
descent for landing.

5. Safety Belt & Parachute Harness – Fastened

Change 12 2-41
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AIR REFUELING PROCEDURES

RENDEZVOUS

During air refueling, a possibility exists that fuel may enter the verti-
cal fin air scoop and form a combustible mixture in the aft equipment
compartments. Placing the ALT-16A, ALT-32A and ALQ-122 in
STANDBY, and ALQ-155s in WARMUP, 15 minutes prior to initial con-
tact until 15 minutes after termination of final contact will allow equip-
ment to cool prior to refueling and ensure dissipation of combustible
mixtures after refueling. This procedure is applicable to all refueling
contacts. Both forward and aft transmitters will be placed in STAND-
BY to preclude the inadvertent turning on of the aft transmitters.

NOTE

• Normally, the rendezvous checklist will be started at least 30 minutes


prior to the planned rendezvous control time.

• The EW officer should use all available ECM receivers to monitor the
position of the tanker throughout rendezvous. This is especially critical
during an overrun condition when the tanker is aft of the four – eight
o’clock position.

1. ALT-16A, ALT-32A & ALQ-122 – STANDBY

Not later than 15 minutes prior to the first contact.

2. ALQ-172 FWD & AFT Systems – Standby

3. ALQ-155s – WARMUP

Not later than 15 minutes prior to the first contact.

4. ALQ-153 – OFF

Not later than 15 minutes prior to the first contact.

Due to the high operating temperature of the ALQ-153 in the standby


mode, the ALQ-153 will be turned OFF 15 minutes prior to initial con-
tact until 15 minutes after termination of final contact. This will allow
the equipment to cool prior to refueling and ensure dissipation of com-
bustible mixtures after refueling. This procedure is applicable to all
contacts.

5. Periscopic Sextant – Stowed, port closed

2-42 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AIR REFUELING PROCEDURES (Cont)

6. Upper Deck Sliding Hatch – Open and locked

• Upper deck sliding hatch will be open and locked prior to air refueling.

• If the control cabin is not pressurized, all unnecessary electrical equip-


ment should be turned off.

CONTACT

1. Fuel & Hydraulic Lines – Check for leaks

Check visually from seat for evidence of fuel or hydraulic leaks. Report only if leaks occur.

Do not transmit on the HF radio when in contact with or when in close


proximity to the KC-10 air refueling boom. Transmitting on the HF
radio under these conditions may cause uncommanded movement of
the KC-10 air refueling boom, endangering the tanker or receiver air-
craft and crews.

POST AIR REFUELING

1. ALT-16A, ALT-32A & ALQ-122 – STANDBY

Allow ECM transmitters and ALQ-122 to remain in standby not less than 15 minutes after termina-
tion of final contact.

2. ALQ-172 FWD & AFT Systems – Standby

3. ALQ-155s – WARMUP

Allow ALQ-155 transmitters to remain in WARMUP not less than 15 minutes after termination of
final contact.

4. ALQ-153 – OFF

The ALQ-153 will remain off not less than 15 minutes after termination of final contact. After 15
minutes the ALQ-153 should be placed to the STANDBY mode.

Change 9 2-43
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

POSTFLIGHT PROCEDURES

AFTER LANDING

NOTE

The AFTER LANDING checklist will be performed in the event the


mission is ground aborted after preflight has been initiated and after
all alert exercises.

1. Arming Lever Safety Pins (No. 1) – Installed

2. Armrests – Stowed

3. ECM Power Switches – OFF

Aircraft electrical power must be maintained for 5 minutes after turn-


ing off ECM equipment to allow cooling systems to cycle-out thus pre-
venting damage to the systems.

NOTE

• If channel buttons on ALT-16A control-indicators are pressed and


power selector switch is in TRANSMIT, power can be radiated if
ALQ-122 system is turned off before ALT-16A system is turned off.

• Check all ECM power switches OFF and recheck all chaff and flare
power switches OFF prior to leaving position to prevent inadvertent
jamming or jettisoning of ECM expendables with the application of
ground power.

• If taxi-back landings are accomplished, the ECM equipment will be


turned OFF on the first landing.

4. Ejection Seat – Down and forward

5. PIHM Assembly – Disconnect (as required)

a. PIHM Manifold – Disconnect

Disconnect the manifold from the CRU-60/P bracket located on the parachute harness.

b. Emergency Oxygen Hose – Disconnect

Disconnect the emergency oxygen hose from the fitting on the manifold.

2-44 Change 1
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

POSTFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

c. Aircraft Oxygen Hose – Disconnect

While holding breath, disconnect the aircraft oxygen hose from the QD pigtail adapter.

Hold breath until steps d. and e. are complete. This will preclude the
inhaling of toxic chemicals during the changeover from blower air to
the aircraft oxygen system.

d. Blower Hose:

Disconnect blower hose from the ventilation inlet hose on the PIHM manifold, remove from
under right armrest and connect the QD on chemical-biological canister.

e. Crossover Valve – Horizontal

Rotate the valve to the horizontal position. Resume breathing.

f. Oxygen Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN

g. PIHM Communication Cord – Disconnect

Disconnect PIHM communication cord from the aircraft communication cord.

h. Intercom Unit – Connect

Connect the intercom unit to the PIHM communication cord.

i. Blower Electrical Connector – Disconnect

Disconnect the blower from the blower electrical receptacle and replace the receptacle dust cover.

j. Blower – Remove

Remove the blower from the aircraft mounting bracket.

6. Oxygen Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN

7. Gunner Station:

a. Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN

b. Supply Hose & Interphone Cord – Stowed

8. Bunk Station:

a. Oxygen Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN

b. Supply Hose and Interphone Cord – Stowed

9. DI Station:

a. Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN

b. Supply Hose & Interphone Cord – Stowed

Change 9 2-45
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

POSTFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

POSTFLIGHT

1. ALE-20 Safety Interlock Switch Door – Open, streamer installed

The EW officer will ensure that the ALE-20 flare ejector safety interlock switch door is open and
the streamer is installed.

NOTE

Aircraft accepted for alert status will have the streamer removed and
the ALE-20 safety interlock switch door closed.

2. Required Forms – Completed

3. Crew Debriefing – Completed

Forms, logs, and classified material turned in as briefed.

2-46 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALERT PROCEDURES (SIOP) AGM-86B EXTERIOR INSPECTION/AGM-129 EX-


TERIOR INSPECTION/EXTERIOR INSPECTION
The normal checklists in this section are designed (BOMB BAY INTERIOR) checklists (as applicable)
to permit use during alert. The additional check- may be deferred until after an alert force exercise
lists in this section are used in situations peculiar when engines are started.
only to the alert cycle. Any time bombs/missiles are
aboard, the normal two-man policy will be ob- INSTRUCTIONS
served. After maintenance has declared an aircraft
ready for alert and the bombs/missiles have been Thermal Curtains
loaded, the aircrew will conduct an initial accep-
tance check. When the aircrew declares the aircraft During initial acceptance for an alert aircraft or
ready for alert and the aircraft is on the alert line, prior to deploying to assume satellite alert, the pi-
it will be placed in a ‘‘cocked’’ configuration. The lots will ensure that all thermal curtains at trans-
daily alert preflight will be accomplished once each parent openings in the cockpit are installed,
24 hours, normally at a predesignated time. checked for proper fit, and positioned as required.
Curtains for cockpit windows No. 6L&R, and the pi-
A fully loaded CSRL mated to an aircraft does not lot/copilot escape hatches will remain closed while
provide the crew the ability to accomplish a com- the aircraft is on alert. Curtains for cockpit win-
plete weapons preflight. Timers, baro settings, and dows No. 1, 2L&R, 3L&R, 4L&R and 5L&R will be
other required preflight items are not readily acces- returned to the open/stowed position. The pilot/copi-
sible to the aircrew. As a result the following proce- lot flash divider curtains will be positioned on top of
dures will be used. The munitions maintenance the instrument panel cover with the lower tapes
load team will load the weapons loaded CSRL and fastened. For information regarding inspection ac-
complete all required checks up to and including ceptance criteria, see THERMAL CURTAINS, Sec-
the post load check. During the post load check, the tion I.
wing air weapons officer (must be certified), the al-
ternate wing air weapons officer or a designated
representative (must be certified by the air weap-
ons officer) will be called to the aircraft. These indi-
viduals will perform a weapons preflight, examine Thermal curtains will be kept free from
the general condition of the bomb bay, preflight the grease, oil, and mold as any discoloration
CSRL, its associated equipment and will verify the will seriously impair the value of the cur-
quantity of weapons and the launcher number. Af- tains. Oil or grease base material will ignite
ter completing checks and preflight, the individual upon exposure to thermal radiation. Use ex-
accomplishing the required checks will make the treme care when handling the curtains dur-
following entry into the AFTO Form 781: A com- ing installation. Dirty or cracked curtains
plete weapons preflight has been accomplished. will be replaced.
Weapons status and settings have been verified.
Upon arriving at the aircraft, the aircraft com- All thermal and flash divider curtains will be
mander will check the AFTO Form 781 to ensure placed in the open/stowed position or appropriate
the required entry is in the forms. The aircrew will storage containers when deploying to and from the
conduct a check of the general condition of the satellite alert base. When assuming initial satellite
bomb bay, preflight the CSRL and validate the alert, thermal/flash divider curtains need not be re-
launcher number, then validate the correct number checked; however, they will be positioned in accor-
and types of weapons. During engine runs, the ra- dance with the initial alert acceptance procedures.
dar navigator will monitor the status of the weap-
ons through Format 7. The command post will be When assuming alert duty, the pilot and copilot will
notified that the aircraft is ready to be ‘‘cocked’’ on check that the flash blindness goggle case seal is
alert. not broken and the cases positioned where they are
readily available. Monocular eyeshields for remain-
During crew changeover, the radar navigator’s and ing crewmembers will be positioned where they are
navigator’s BEFORE EXTERIOR (POWER OFF) readily available.
checklist will be accomplished by the new crew. The

Change 1 2-47
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Security NOTE

Entrance to the designated ‘‘No Lone Zone’’ of a If the aircraft has been towed for tire rota-
‘‘cocked’’ configured aircraft will be in accordance tion, etc, ensure that the ground locks and
with command directives. bypass keys are removed upon completion
of the towing operation.
Maintenance While On Alert
EW Officer Procedures
At any time while the aircraft is cocked, if a re-
quirement exists to refuel (except wing tanks), the 1. AIRCRAFT ACCEPTANCE
aircrew will uncock the aircraft using the UN- a. Before Exterior Inspection
COCKING checklist. Normal servicing require- b. Exterior Inspection
ments for oxygen, hydraulics, or pneumatics, which c. Interior Inspection
do not require access to the cockpit, may be accom-
plished on a cocked aircraft. Maintenance may be d. ECM equipment operational check, as re-
performed without uncocking provided force timing quired
is not degraded, power is not placed on the aircraft, e. After Landing
access to the cockpit or bomb bay area is not re- 2. SCRAMBLE
quired, and no electrical component is involved.
a. Starting Engines
When the aircraft is uncocked for maintenance/re-
fueling and the maintenance/refueling is complete, b. Read over interphone the TAXIING check-
the aircraft will be recocked by the alert crew using list and BEFORE LINEUP checklist.
the EXTERIOR INSPECTION checklist as applica- 3. DAILY ALERT PREFLIGHT. There are no spe-
ble, INTERIOR INSPECTION checklist, and BE- cific items that are to be accomplished by the EW
FORE STARTING ENGINES checklist. If other officer other than those called for by the copilot on
than the alert flightcrew personnel have had access his DAILY ALERT PREFLIGHT checklist.
to the bomb bay and/or missiles during the required 4. UNCOCKING. Items to be accomplished by
maintenance, the navigator’s BEFORE EXTERIOR the EW officer are on the pilot’s UNCOCKING
INSPECTION and the bomb preflight and/or mis- checklist and will be accomplished at his direction.
sile preflight inspections must also be completed.

2-48
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Defensive Systems Abnormal Operations


and Malfunction Analysis section III

table of contents page

DESCRIPTION 3-3

RECEIVER SYSTEMS 3-3

AN/ALR-20A ABNORMAL OPERATION 3-3

AN/ALR-20A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-4

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER ABNORMAL OPERATION 3-7

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-8

SENSOR INTEGRATION ABNORMAL OPERATION 3-11

SENSOR INTEGRATION BIT ADVISORY MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS 3-12

TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS 3-15

AN/ALT-16A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-15

AN/ALT-32A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-15

RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS 3-17

Less DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-17

DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-20D

AN/ALQ-122 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-21

AN/ALQ-153(V) MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-22

AN/ALQ-155 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-23

EXPENDABLE COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEMS 3-25

AN/ALE-24 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-25

AN/ALE-20 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-25

DEFENSIVE SYSTEMS CIRCUIT BREAKERS 3-27

Change 9 3-1/(3-2 blank)


BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DESCRIPTION Inflight corrective action for systems malfunctions


consists of the malfunction and analysis checklist
Abnormal procedures and malfunction analysis and procedures for abnormal operation of the
checklists are presented in this section categorized equipment. The malfunction and analysis checklist
in the same order as in section I. Additional classi- should be performed for all specific systems mal-
fied information for the systems is contained in T.O. functions. Emergency operation procedures should
1B-52H-1-13-1. be accomplished only when dictated by the tactical
situation.
The malfunction and analysis checklist should be
performed when the equipment is not functioning RECEIVER SYSTEMS
normally. Effort should be made while still airborne
to determine the nature of the malfunction to aid AN/ALR-20A ABNORMAL OPERATION
ground maintenance efforts; and in certain tactical
situations to investigate the possibility of emer- The only emergency operation with the ALR-20A
gency inflight use of equipment. In all malfunctions would be with adjustments to the indicator. If one
involving apparent loss of equipment power, or sig- or more traces jump halfway left or right of scope,
nal reception, accessible circuit breakers should be adjust the horizontal position control for the trace.
checked and reset. Additionally, accessible cabling If one or more traces are positioned into or down
should be checked for proper connection. into the next trace, adjust the vertical position con-
trol for the trace.

Due to the high voltages associated with


most ECM equipment, extreme care must Less DS Adjustments of the intensity, focus,
be used when accomplishing inflight correc- HP, V, AST, and width control should be
tive action to ensure that applicable ECM accomplished only by ground maintenance
equipment is placed to OFF before remov- personnel or during SIOP/contingency
ing and replacing the fuses. operations. The use of extreme care and an
insulated screwdriver is recommended due
to the fragile potentiometers and possible
contact with high voltages.

Emergency operation of ECM equipment


may result in damage to the equipment.

Change 10 3-3
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALR-20A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

The following conditions are caused by blown fuses. These conditions require checking fuses in the
power supply located behind and left of the pilot’s seat. Power supply can be reached by opening
the small panel with three spring latches. Blown fuses can be isolated by using the power indicator
and monitor switch located to the right of the indicator. The power selector must be ON when check-
ing power supply voltage readings.

NOTE

Use the appropriate type fuse. There are two types of fuses: 1) fast blow
fuses with single elements; and 2) slow blow fuses with glass envelopes
and wire wound thermistor devices resembling springs. The fuse suffix
will aid in determining the difference between a fast blow (FB) and a
slow blow (SB) fuse. A FB fuse has a suffix of “A” (eg. F02A). A SB fuse
has a suffix of “B” (eg. F02B).

1. No scale illumination and no traces.

a. Check three AC phase circuit breakers and one DC circuit breaker.

(1) Circuit Breakers Out – Reset

(2) Circuit Breakers In – Proceed to step (1.b.)

b. Check fuses F-1, F-2, and F-3.

(1) One or More Illuminated – Turn power off, replace illuminated fuse(s)

(2) None Illuminated – Proceed to step (1.c.)

NOTE

SB denotes SLOW BLOW FUSE, FB denotes FAST BLOW FUSE.


When replacing fuses turn off ALR-20A.

c. Check power supply voltage monitor meter readings.

Indication Replace Fuses

All fuses bad SB-4 (1A)


All fuses bad, except F-4, 7 SB-5 (10A)
All fuses bad, except F-4, 5, 7 SB-6 (5A)
All fuses good, except F-7 SB-7 (2A)
All fuses good, except F-12 SB-12 (2A)
All fuses good, except F-19 SB-19 (1/4A)

2. Have scale illumination, but no trace, no meter reading on F-10 only.


• Replace fuse FB-10 (2A).

3-4 Change 5
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALR-20A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

3. No video or test signals on . . .

Trace No. Check and Replace

1 FB-11 (1A)
2 SB-13 (1/2A)
3 SB-14 (1/2A)
4 SB-15 (1/2A)
5 SB-16 (1/2A)
6 SB-8 (1/2A)
7 SB-9 (1/2A)

4. No video or test signal on any trace, three strobes appear on right edge of trace 3.
• Check and replace SB-18 (1/2A).
5. No test signals on any trace.
• Check and replace SB-20 (1/4A).
6. Traces 1-3-5-7 disappear completely, traces 2-4-6 shrink to about 1/2 inch on right side of scope.
• Check and replace SB-17 (1A).
7. Loss of OAS blanking occurs for ALR-20A:

• Some trace 6 strobing and marker jittering is considered normal operation. The degree of
strobing and jitter requiring maintenance will be determined by the EW officer in coordination
with the maintenance technician.

• Check the BNS blanking amplifier circuit breaker is in.

• Check and replace fuse on front of BNS blanking amplifier.

Prior to removing fuse ensure that the BNS blanking amplifier circuit
breaker located on the auxiliary BNS circuit breaker panel is pulled.
• May possibly be eliminated for one piece of ECM equipment by switching cables on the blank-
ing amplifier. Interchange of cables will depend on the tactical situation.

J2 (ALQ-172 SYS No. 15 & No. 16)


J3 (RWR)
J4 (ALR-20A)

Change 7 3-5/(3-6 blank)


BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RADAR WARNING RECIEVER ABNORMAL


OPERATION

Inflight corrective action for systems malfunctions


consists of the malfunction and analysis checklist Abnormal operation of ECM equipment
and procedures for abnormal operation of the may result in damage to the equipment.
equipment. The malfunction and analysis checklist
should be performed for all specific systems mal- Should loss of video display occur with the EW offi-
functions. Abnormal operation procedures should cer’s indicator (scope), the gunner’s indicator may
be accomplished only when dictated by the tactical be used. The indicator may be removed by use of
situation. the four screws on the face. Pull the indicator out
and remove the cable attached at the rear. Replace
with gunner’s indicator.

Change 7 3-7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

Due to the high voltages associated with most ECM equipment,


extreme care must be used when accomplishing inflight corrective
action. Ensure that applicable ECM equipment is placed to OFF before
removing and replacing the fuses.

1. System power light fails to illuminate, no audio, or no CRT display when power button is depressed.
A 9 second delay occurs for the CRT display.

• Pull and reset WARNING RCVR AC on ECM circuit breaker panel.

• Change ac fuse on front panel of signal processor with spare.

2. Will not restart after momentary ac power fluctuation or loss.

• Recycle system power button manually.

3. Threshold bar flickering or missing.

• Check for presence of interference or known signals.

• Check that cable connectors are securely connected on processor front panel. This can be
checked by gently tugging on cannon plug.

Cannon plugs must not be forced on or pins will be bent causing the
system to be inoperative. Check that WARN RCVR circuit breaker is
out to prevent blowing fuse before moving connectors.

NOTE

If J1, J2, or J3 is found loose or disconnected, align cannon plug guide


marks (blue in color), hold the locking ring back, ensure pins are
aligned, and gently insert plug. After plug is inserted, push locking
ring full forward.

4. System will not self-test.

• Hold in test button for approximately 2 seconds.

• Recycle system power switch.

• Check gunner’s indicator during test, EW indicator may be defective.

3-8 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

5. Test quadrant dots present, but not on third ring.

• Processor or indicator alignment fault. System lethal range, defined by dots, must be consid-
ered when evaluating threats.

6. Test quadrant dot or band symbol missing.

• Repeat test checking gunner’s indicator.

• Dot missing indicates processor failure. All threats that should appear on that half of indicator
will now appear distorted or as flat lines on axis of missing dot.

• Symbol missing indicates amplifier-detector, test oscillator, or processor failure. Repeat self-
test three times. Check for presence of known band radars in quadrant.

7. Extra test band symbols present.

• If radars are in area, no malfunction.

• No radars in area, check for interference from onboard systems.

8. Test band symbols present – no audio.

• Check audio volume adjustment.

• Check WARNING RCVR interphone mixer switch position.

• Check for normal audio after self-test. Aircraft interphone or processor failure.

9. Flashing or missing version number in test.

• Processor memory failure, no inflight repair.

10. R appears on the CRT Less DZ

• Error in the processor ram memory has been detected.

11. M appears on the CRT Less DZ

• Error in the loader software exists. This error will not affect operation of the OFP but could
adversely affect the reprogramming process.

Change 7 3-9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

12. Selected indicator control (IC) button legends will not illuminate.

• Check dim knob for adjustment.

• Replace bulbs in buttons that do not light from known good buttons.

• Check for proper system operation controlled by button as function within processor may be
defective.

13. Loss of OAS blanking occurs for RWR:

• Check the BNS blanking amplifier circuit breaker is in.

• Check and replace fuse on front of BNS blanking amplifier.

Prior to removing fuse ensure that the BNS blanking amplifier circuit
breaker located on the auxiliary BNS circuit breaker panel is pulled.

• May possibly be eliminated for one piece of ECM equipment by switching cables on the blank-
ing amplifier. Interchange of cables will depend on the tactical situation.

J2 – (ALQ-172 SYS No. 15 & No. 16)


J3 – (RWR)
J4 – (ALR-20A)

3-10 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

SENSOR INTEGRATION ABNORMAL OPERATION panel SYS TEST and BIT button indicators. The
respective code of a failed LRU is displayed on the
A built-in-test (BIT) function is provided to check SI MFD initiated BIT display or the operational
any failure of the Line Replaceable Units (LRUs). BIT status display. LRU failure codes are shown in
The BIT is initiated by pressing the SI control figure 3-1.

3-11
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration BIT Advisory


Malfunction Analysis
FAULT INDICATION POSSIBLE CAUSES

SI BIT Error No.

01 – 03 (U) SP defective

04 OFP incorrectly loaded: SP defective

05 UDM incorrectly loaded: SP defective

06 – 19 SP defective

30 – 42 SP defective

50 – 52 SP defective: SP-to-MFD wiring defective

60 SP defective, ALR-46-to-SP wiring defective

ALR-46 BIT Error No.

01 – 03 RWR SP defective

99 RWR SP defective: RWR-to-SP wiring defective

ALQ-155 BIT Error No.

01 – 03 SP defective

04 OFP incorrectly loaded: SP defective

05 UDM incorrectly loaded: SP defective

06 – 19 SP defective

30 – 86 Associated R/T defective: SP defective

99 SP defective

Figure 3-1 (Sheet 1 of 2)

3-12 Change 7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

FAULT INDICATION POSSIBLE CAUSES

ALQ-172 BIT Error No. Forward and Aft

01 ALQ-172 LRU #1 defective; SP defective

02 ALQ-172 LRU #2 defective; SP defective

03 ALQ-172 LRU #3 defective; SP defective

04 ALQ-172 LRU #4 defective; SP defective

07 ALQ-172 LRU #7 defective; SP defective

8L ALQ-172 LRU #8L defective; SP defective

8R ALQ-172 LRU #8R defective; SP defective

09 ALQ-172 LRU #9 defective; SP defective

10 ALQ-172 LRU #10 defective; SP defective

12 ALQ-172 LRU # 12 defective; SP defective

99 SP defective; ALQ-172-to-SP wiring defective

0A SP defective; MIL-STD-1553 bus wiring defective

0B SP defective; MIL-STD-1553 bus wiring defective

Figure 3-1 (Sheet 2 of 2)

3-13/(3-14 blank)
BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS

AN/ALT-16A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fault light illuminates.


• Place power selector switch to OFF and return to original position.

AN/ALT-32A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fault light illuminates.

• Place power selector switch to OFF and return to original position.

3-15/(3-16 blank)
BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS

Less DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fail indicator light illuminates.

• Depress applicable STBY/OPER pushbutton. If the fault was temporary, the system will
return to the operate mode.

2. Hot indicator light illuminates.

• Allow applicable subset to cool until Hot indicator light goes out and then depress the applica-
ble STBY/OPER pushbutton. If the Hot indicator light has not gone out within 10 minutes,
turn the system off for the remainder of the flight.

• If immediate system operation is required, depress the HOT/OVRD pushbutton. This action
places the system back into operation for 60 seconds. This action may be repeated as required
with the understanding that it may cause damage to the system.

Forcing the system into operation with an overtemperature indication


may cause damage to the system. Normally this procedure will be con-
fined to tactical situations.

3. Cold indicator light illuminates.

• Allow applicable subset to warm up until cold indicator light goes out then press the applicable
STBY/OPER pushbutton.

4. Test status light illuminates.

• Light illuminates for 5 to 10 seconds, then goes off (Soft Fault) – associated subsystem has
fault which may cause degraded operation.

• Light illuminates and remains on until system power is removed or another self-test is initi-
ated (Hard Fault) – the associated subsystem is inoperative.

Change 9 3-17
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Less DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

5. Waveguide low pressure warning light(s) illuminated.

• Pull and reset associated pressure pump circuit breaker(s) located on the overhead A117
DECM CB panel.

• If light(s) remain on, leave the associated pressure pump circuit breaker in for the remainder
of the flight. Do not place affected ALQ-172 FWD/AFT subset(s) to operate unless use of the
system is required for a tactical situation. The unaffected system may be operated normally.

• If the forward ALQ-172 low pressure light remains on do not transmit with ALQ-155 Systems
1 and 2 unless barometric altitude is at or below 24,000 MSL (FL240), or use of the system
is required for a tactical situation.

• If the warning light(s) extinguish, the affected system may be operated normally.

• A continually lit low pressure warning light normally indicates a wave-


guide leak. The corresponding pressure pump is continually operating
and is not able to maintain waveguide pressure above the low pressure
switch setting. Allowing a waveguide pressurization pump to operate
continuously may cause damage to the pump.

• Operating ALQ-172 FWD or AFT transmitter subsystems with


unpressurized waveguides may cause damage to the transmitters. Op-
erating the ALQ-155 Systems 1 and 2 transmitter subsystems trans-
mitters with unpressurized waveguides at altitudes above 24,000 MSL
(FL240) may cause damage to the transmitters

NOTE

• ALQ-155 Systems 1 and 2 waveguides are connected and pressurized


on the same line as FWD ALQ-172 System 16.

• Moisture saturation within waveguides may result in a reduction of


effective radiated power for the associated transmitter subsystem. and
will hasten waveguide corrosion. The pressure pumps are left on with
the low pressure warning lights on to prevent water intrusion into the
waveguides.

• The warning light(s) may extinguish after descent into the low altitude
environment due to a decrease in the required pressure differential,
between the inside and outside of the waveguide. With a leaky
waveguide, the pressure pump may be able to maintain pressure at low
altitude but not at high altitudes. This condition does not necessarily
indicate that a pressurization malfunction has corrected itself. Mainte-
nance action should be taken.

3-18 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Less DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

6. Loss of OAS blanking occurs for ALQ-172.

• Check the BNS blanking amplifier circuit breaker in.

• Check and replace fuse on front of BNS blanking amplifier.

Prior to removing fuse, ensure that the BNS blanking amplifier circuit
breaker on the auxiliary BNS circuit breaker panel is pulled.

• May possibly be eliminated for one piece of ECM equipment by switching cables on the blank-
ing amplifier. Interchange of cables will depend on the tactical situation.

J2 (ALQ-172 System No. 15 & No. 16)


J3 (RWR)
J4 (ALR-20A)

Change 9 3-19
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-172(V) Autonomous Self-Test


Fault Indications
Less DT

FAILURE DESCRIPTION WEDGE VALUE LRU

PR FAILURES: HI MODE (NOTE A)

EAROM Failure 1 1
Bit and Comm Fail (any LRU-1 Proc.) 2 1
Receiver Chan 1 Failure 4 1
PR Receiver Chan 2 Failure 8 1
PR Receiver Chan 3 Failure 16 1
PR Receiver Chan 4 Failure 32 1
PR Receiver Overflow Failure 64 1, 2
IFM Calibration Failure 128 1, 10
Amplitude Calibration Failure 256 1, 10
PR ECM Failure 1 or 2 512 1, 2
PR ECM Failure 3 or 4 1024 1, 2
PR Overflow Jam Failure 2048 1, 2

PD FAILURES: LO MODE

EAROM Failure 1 10
PDSC Bit and Comm Fail 2 10
MRC Bit and Comm Fail 4 10
SRC Bit and Comm Fail 8 10
MRC Data Received Chan 1 Failed 16 10, 4
MRC Data Received Chan 2 Failed 32 10, 4
Short Path Calibration Path Failed 64 10, 4
Long Path Calibration Path Failed 128 10, 4
SRC Calibration Failure 256 10
Discriminator Failure 512 10
FS-1 Phase Lock Failure 1024 10
FS-2 Phase Lock Failure 2048 10

NOTE A: These failures may illuminate on the LRU-6 without a corresponding PR RX or PR TX light illumi-
nated on LRU-5 if a PD RX failure is reported.

NOTE B: If no self-test faults are detected, the LRU-6 C-11270/ALQ-172(V) control monitor will function as
normal and the LRU-5 C-11213/ALQ-172(V) control indicator TEST STATUS – FWD and/or AFT will not
flash.

Figure 3-2

3-20 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT AN/ALQ-172 FAULTS red, yellow or orange, then there is a fault in the corre-
sponding LRU. The user can then switch to the Status
ALQ-172 CDU Failure screen and see a pictorial diagram of the LRUs in the
systems and determine any faults based on the LRU
If the ALQ-172 fails, both FWD and AFT systems colors. For more information on the types of faults
default to the HIGH altitude mode. LOW altitude that occurred, the user can switch screens by pressing
mode can be selected for both systems by selecting the DETAILS button followed by the button for the
OVRD LO on the ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel CDU system the user wants to obtain information. This
Altitude Override Switch. will bring up the Details screen, which indicates what
faults have occurred by displaying an X in the ap-
[AMI] ALQ-172 Fault Status propriate area on the screen. The user then has the
ALQ-172 status is provided to the OAS via the Offen- option of switching to the number of the fault by
sive/Defensive Interface software and the 1553A data pressing the NUMBER/X button. This button will
bus. The OAS displays the ALQ-172 status and its change the X’s on the screen to their corresponding
bus B and D communication status on FRMT-6 on the numbers. If the user then wants to know specifically
Navigator’s and Radar Navigator’s MFDs (Refer to what LRU or boards within the LRU may be causing
the FRMT-6 display in T.O. 1B-52H-1-12). the fault, the user can press the ANALYZE button for
the currently selected system. This will bring up
ALQ-172 CDU Fault Display another screen that will describe to the user the type
of faults that have occurred along with the most likely
In order to determine if there are faults in the AN/ cause of the problems. This list is in order of most like-
ALQ-172 system there are many features built into ly fault to least likely. The user can scroll down this
the CDU. On the Situation page, in the SYSTEM list if it is longer then one page using the PAGE UP
STATUS box, the user can look under the active and PAGE DOWN buttons.
threat bars. If there are numbers here displayed in

CDU Fault Display


DT

Figure 3-2A (Sheet 1 of 3)

Change 13 3-20A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Fault Display (Cont)


DT

NO. FAULT TYPE FAULT DESCRIPTION RESULT

1 PR Processor Global
Fault
PR PR Supervisor Processor Failed PR Subsystem inoperative.
PD maybe inoperative.
AA Environment Processor Failed PR Subsystem partially inoperative.
PR will not identify complex pulse trains.
2 PD Processor Global PD (Supervisor) Processor Failed PD Subsystem inoperative.
Fault

SRC (Swept Receiver) Processor PD Subsystem inoperative.


Failed

MRC (Mod Recovery) Processor PD Subsystem inoperative.


Failed

3 EID FAULT PR or PD EID failed software con- PR Subsystem may be inoperative.


figuration. PD Subsystem may be inoperative.

4 PR Receiver Fault No frequency report over part or PR Subsystem inoperative.


all of PR frequency range.
No/wrong amplitude report over
part or all of PR frequency range.

5 1553 Comm Fault No 1553 Communications PR Subsystem inoperative.


CDU (LRU-21) inoperative

6 LRU # Indicates which LRU is reported LRU inoperative:


failed.
LRU-1, 2 PR Subsystem
LRU-4, 10 PD Subsystem
LRU-7, 8R, 8L, 9 Antenna Subsystem
LRU-12 PD Special Technique

7 BIT Type None Indicates whether self test was autono-


mous or operator initiated.

8 EID Version Indicates mission database ver-


sion loaded into system.

9 ECM CONFIG Fault Indicates if a software configura- PR subsystem and/or PD subsystem may
tion error has been detected. be partially or completely inoperative.

Figure 3-2A (Sheet 2 of 3)

3-20B Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

NO. FAULT TYPE FAULT DESCRIPTION RESULT

10 Configuration & Fault Indicates if a software configura- PR Subsystem may be partially or com-
tion error has been detected. pletely inoperative.
PD Subsystem may be partially or com-
pletely inoperative.

Also indicates mission database None


version loaded into the system.

11 PD Receiver Global No frequency report over part or PD Subsystem inoperative.


Fault all of PD frequency range.

12 PD Receiver & Trans- MRC, YIG, Long/Short indicates PD Subsystem partially inoperative (if
mitter Channelized no receive frequency or amplitude only one channel failed).
Fault report over part or all of PD fre- PD Subsystem inoperative if both chan-
quency range by channel. nels.
BRF FAIL indicates that the band PR Subsystem may be partially inopera-
reject filter(s) protecting the PR re- tive.
ceiver are not tuning.
LRU-4 JAM – PD Transmitter PD Subsystem partially inoperative (if
Fault only one channel failed).
PD Subsystem inoperative if both chan-
nels.
LRU-12 JAM – PD Special Trans- PD Special transmitter partially inopera-
mitter Fault tive (if only one channel).
PD Special transmitter inoperative if both
channels.
PD Fail – Digital Device Fault PD Subsystem partially inoperative some
ECM techniques inoperative.
13 PR Channelized Indicated channel will not receive, Indicated PR channel(s) inoperative.
Fault identify, track or jam a signal. PR subsystem inoperative if all channels.

14 PR Processor Chan- Indicated channel processor will Indicated PR channel(s) inoperative.


nelized Fault not receive, identify or track a sig- PR subsystem inoperative if all channels.
nal.

Figure 3-2A (Sheet 3 of 3)

Change 9 3-20C
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fail indicator light illuminates.

• Depress applicable STBY/OPER pushbutton. If the fault was temporary, the system will
return to the operate mode.

2. Hot indicator light illuminates.

• Allow applicable subset to cool until Hot indicator light goes out and then depress the applica-
ble STBY/OPER pushbutton. If the Hot indicator light has not gone out within 10 minutes,
turn the system off for the remainder of the flight.

• If immediate system operation is required, depress the HOT/OVRD pushbutton. This action
places the system back into operation for 60 seconds and can be reversed by pressing the
HOT/OVRD pushbutton again. This action may be repeated as required with the understand-
ing that it may cause damage to the system. The Override operation can be terminated at
any time during the 60 seconds by pressing the HOT/OVRD pushbutton.

Forcing the system into operation with an overtemperature indication


may cause damage to the system. Normally this procedure will be con-
fined to tactical situations.

3. Cold indicator light illuminates.

• Allow applicable subset to warm up until cold indicator light goes out then press the applicable
STBY/OPER pushbutton.

4. Test status light illuminates.

• Light/LRU number illuminates in yellow – associated subsystem has fault which may cause
degraded operation.

• Light/LRU number illuminates in red until system power is removed or another self-test is
initiated – the associated subsystem is inoperative.

• Light/LRU number illuminates in orange – a software configuration fault has been detected
in the LRU-1 and/or LRU-10. The associated subsystem and/or system may be degraded or
may be inoperative.

NOTE

Placing the Master STBY/OPER switch to OPER before all subsystems


have timed in to STBY as indicated on the display will cause erroneous
fail indications.

3-20D Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

5. Waveguide low pressure warning light(s) illuminated.

• Pull and reset associated pressure pump circuit breaker(s) located on the overhead A117
DECM CB panel.

• If light(s) remain on, leave the associated pressure pump circuit breaker in for the remainder
of the flight. Do not place affected ALQ-172 FWD/AFT subset(s) to operate unless use of the
system is required for a tactical situation. The unaffected system may be operated normally.

• If the forward ALQ-172 low pressure light remains on do not transmit with ALQ-155 Systems
1 and 2 unless barometric altitude is at or below 24,000 MSL (FL240), or use of the system
is required for a tactical situation.

• If the warning light(s) extinguish, the affected system may be operated normally.

• If the light illuminates and flashes continuously a software fault has been detected. The asso-
ciated subsystem or the entire ALQ-172 system may be degraded or inoperative depending
on the configuration error detected (orange light).

• A continually lit low pressure warning light normally indicates a wave-


guide leak. The corresponding pressure pump is continually operating
and is not able to maintain waveguide pressure above the low pressure
switch setting. Allowing a waveguide pressurization pump to operate
continuously may cause damage to the pump.

• Operating ALQ-172 FWD or AFT transmitter subsystems with


unpressurized waveguides may cause damage to the transmitters. Op-
erating the ALQ-155 Systems 1 and 2 transmitter subsystems trans-
mitters with unpressurized waveguides at altitudes above 24,000 MSL
(FL240) may cause damage to the transmitters

NOTE

• ALQ-155 Systems 1 and 2 waveguides are connected and pressurized


on the same line as FWD ALQ-172 System 16.

• Moisture saturation within waveguides may result in a reduction of


effective radiated power for the associated transmitter subsystem. and
will hasten waveguide corrosion. The pressure pumps are left on with
the low pressure warning lights illuminated to prevent water intrusion
into the waveguides.

• The warning light(s) may extinguish after descent into the low altitude
environment due to a decrease in the required pressure differential,
between the inside and outside of the waveguide. With a leaky
waveguide, the pressure pump may be able to maintain pressure at low
altitude but not at high altitudes. This condition does not necessarily
indicate that a pressurization malfunction has corrected itself. Mainte-
nance action should be taken.

Change 9 3-20E
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

6. Loss of OAS blanking occurs for ALQ-172.

• Check the BNS blanking amplifier circuit breaker in.

• Check and replace fuse on front of BNS blanking amplifier.

Prior to removing fuse, ensure that the BNS blanking amplifier circuit
breaker on the auxiliary BNS circuit breaker panel is pulled.

• May possibly be eliminated for one piece of ECM equipment by switching cables on the blank-
ing amplifier. Interchange of cables will depend on the tactical situation.

J2 (ALQ-172 System No. 15 & No. 16)


J3 (RWR)
J4 (ALR-20A)

7. Failure of ALQ-172 Control Display Unit.

• If the ALQ-172 fails, both FWD and AFT systems default to the HIGH altitude mode. If HIGH
altitude mode is desired check that OVRD LO has not been selected on the ALQ-172 Auxiliary
Panel CDU Altitude Override Switch.

• If LOW altitude mode is desired select OVRD LO on the ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel CDU Alti-
tude Override Switch.

3-20F Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-122 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fault light illuminates.

• Depress power switch off momentarily and then back on. The POWER switch can be depressed
for a period of approximately 2 seconds or less without reinitiating the 5 minute warmup
interval.

• If fault indicator light stays on, check AN/ALR-20A to determine whether system is radiating
power against threat(s). If no transmission is observed, turn off ALQ-122 system and use two
ALT-16As (if operative) in the normal barrage mode.

2. Malfunction indicated by BITE self-test.

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1.

3-21
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-153(V) MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. MALF light (white) with R/T, ADSP, or DSP light(s) (white) illuminates.

• Reset system by cycling OPER/STANDBY switch.

• If the MALF and LRU lights remain on, continued operation is possible by depressing the
OVRD pushbutton. System operation may be degraded.

2. HOT/POWER light (white) illuminates.

• Depress power switch off momentarily and then back on.

• If the HOT/POWER light remains on, continued operation is possible by depressing the OVRD
pushbutton. (Exception: DSP HOT light cannot be overridden).

Forcing the system into operation (OVRD MODE) with an overtemper-


ature indication may cause damage to the system. This procedure will
be confined to tactical situations.

• Depress power switch off for a short period of time.

3. Indicator light(s) fail to come on.

• Depress LAMPS PUSH TO TEST control to determine defective lamp(s).

• If lamp is defective, normal system operation can be expected.

4. Operator initiated BIT check is satisfactory except CM TRIG light (green) does not come on.

• Reposition the appropriate MIN RNG or TTI controls.

• It may be possible to inhibit a malfunctioning MIN RNG or TTI control to permit the other
control to be utilized.

3-22
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-155 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. TUN light illuminates but transmitter does not time out.

• Press JOG/RESET. “5” in THREAT ENGAGE and TUN lights will illuminate. TUN light
should extinguish after 5 minutes. System has modified heat exchanger.

2. TUN light illuminates in transmit mode and transmission stops.

• Coolant overtemperature condition. System will cool off and recycle automatically.

3. FAU and TUN lights illuminate in transmit mode and transmission stops.

• Transmitter overload condition. Press JOG/RESET. System should resume transmission


immediately. If FAU and TUN lights again illuminate, turn set off for remainder of flight.

4. FAU light in STBY 1 or STBY 2.

• FAU light remains on after pressing JOG/RESET. Turn set off for remainder of flight.

5. FAU light illuminates in transmit mode, transmission stops.

• Press JOG/RESET. If FAU light goes off and stays off, the malfunction was a phase fault.

6. FAU light remains on in transmit mode after JOG/RESET has been pressed.

• Phase fault is permanent and is in heat exchanger. Turn set off for remainder of flight.

7. FAU light goes out after pressing JOG/RESET but comes on again after set has recycled through
STBY 1 and STBY 2.

• Phase fault is permanent and is in the transmitter. Turn set off for remainder of flight.

8. FAU light remains on when mode switch is in MAN.

• No flow condition. Turn mode switch OFF until fault goes off (approximately 30 seconds), then
turn mode switch to STBY. If FAU light comes back on, the condition is permanent. Turn set
off for remainder of flight. If FAU light stays out, resume normal use after time delay.

9. FAU light remains on in transmit mode after JOG/RESET has been pressed (center frequency is in
lower or top quarter of frequency band).

• Move center frequency away from previous setting. Press JOG/RESET. If transmission
returns, use in MAN mode only. If no transmission, turn set off for remainder of night.

10. FAU light illuminates every 5 or 6 seconds in transmit mode and transmission stops while FAU is
on.

• Recycle Mode Switch to OFF for less than 2 seconds and see if FAU light remains off. If FAU
light and transmission return, use in MAN mode in tactical situations only.
• If not transmitting, turn off set for remainder of flight.

3-23
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-155 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

11. FAU light blinks in any position.

• Press JOG/RESET. If transmission is present, use in MAN mode in tactical situations only.

12. Sweeping Transmitters.

• If system sweeps only 8 times (a sweep is one cycle), perform BIT test. If “3” does not appear
in Threat Engage window, system is useable. If package sweeps more than 8 times, turn set
off for remainder of flight.

13. PROCESSOR FAULT

• Recycle power switch.

• If the fault still exists, turn off all power switches, then pull and reset circuit breakers simul-
taneously.

14. ERROR LIGHTS

• Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1.

15. BIT FAILURES – During BIT

If any of the below error codes are received, reattempt BIT. Refer to the usable modes column
for unsuccessful BIT.

Error Code Problem Usable Modes

0 Memory Failure (ROM or RAM) MAN

1 Party Line Failure MAN

2 Party Line Failure (Wrong Receiver Responded) MAN

3 PRI Filter Failure SEMI, MAN-DES, MAN

4 Automatic Frequency Control Failure MAN

5 Not Used for BIT (STBY) N/A

6 BIT Not Completed Within 30 Seconds NONE – Reaccomplish BIT

0, 1, 2, 4, 6 Reattempt BIT – If still unsuccessful, system usable only in manual mode.

3 Reattempt BIT – If still unsuccessful, all modes except AUTO are usable.

3-24
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

EXPENDABLE COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEMS

AN/ALE-24 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fault indicator light(s) illuminate during dispensing.

• Cycle power switch off and then back on to extinguish light(s). During subsequent dispensing,
note if same light(s) illuminate, indicating permanent malfunction.

2. All (SUD) (DOC) (SPD) fault indicator lights illuminate during programmed dispensing.

• Check counters for system affected to assure all chaff has not been dispensed.

• (SPD) If counters indicate chaff remaining, revert to “continuous” operation.

• (DOC or SUD) If lights continue to light, change from SUD to DOC or vice versa.

• Check if gunner has actuated chaff deactivate switch. If the gunner does not have the deacti-
vate switch depressed, pull the CHAFF DISP DEACTIVATE circuit breaker on the ECM cir-
cuit breaker panel. This will disable the chaff deactivate switch.

AN/ALE-20 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Firing program does not start when release button is depressed.

• Reset circuit breakers.

• Check with pilot to ensure flare ejector power switch on pilot’s auxiliary side panel is ON.

• Check fuses on flare programming control panel.

2. With an illuminated RH Empty light, the system is inoperative.

3-25/(3-26 blank)
BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Defensive Systems Circuit Protection and Location


CIRCUIT
BREAKER POWER
EQUIPMENT TITLE CB PANEL SOURCE

Blanking System SYS 15 & 16 HTR & BLKG CON- ECM Rt. TR
TROL
SYS 15 BLKG MDL ECM Left TR
SYS 16 BLKG MDL ECM Left TR
BLANKING AMP AUX BNS Left TR

ECM Systems Miscellaneous

Indicator Light Dimming Control ECM IND DIMMING ECM Left TR

Wave Guide Pressurization ECM PRESS PUMP ECM AC Bus 5


Compressor

ECM Test Receptacles

Nose Radome MISCELLANEOUS –


NOSE ECM TEST RECP – AC LLC AC Bus 3
NOSE ECM TEST RECP – DC LLC Left TR

Expendable Countermeasures
Systems

AN/ALE-20 Flare Ejector Set FLARE EJECTOR POWER ECM AC Bus 5


FLARE EJECTOR PROGRAM ECM Rt. TR
POWER
AN/ALE-25 Rocket Pod ROCKET POD – LH ECM Rt. TR
ROCKET POD – RH ECM Rt. TR

AN/ALE-24 Dispenser Set CHAFF DISP DEACTIVATE ECM Rt. TR


WING CHAFF CONT PWR ECM Rt. TR

Receiver Systems

AN/ALR-20A Search Receiver AN/ALR-20 AC  A ECM AC Bus 5


AN/ALR-20 AC  B ECM AC Bus 5
AN/ALR-20 AC  C ECM AC Bus 5
AN/ALR-20 DC ECM Rt. TR

Radar Warning Receiver (RWR) WARNING RCVR AC ECM AC Bus 5

Sensor Integration Systems SI CONTROL DC ECM Rt. TR


SI DISPLAY AC ECM AC Bus 5
SI DISPLAY DC ECM Rt. TR

Figure 3-3 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Change 7 3-27
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Defensive Systems Circuit Protection and Location


(Cont)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER POWER
EQUIPMENT TITLE CB PANEL SOURCE

Receiver-Transmitter Systems

AN/ALQ-153 Tail Warning RIGHT ESSENTIAL DC POWER –


System CM SET RLC Rt. TR

AN/ALQ-155(V) Power MEMORY LOAD VERIFIER ECM


Management System MEMORY LOAD VERIFIER ECM
MEMORY LOAD VERIFIER ECM
MISCELLANEOUS – ECM PMS  A RLC AC Bus 5
MISCELLANEOUS – ECM PMS  B RLC AC Bus 5
MISCELLANEOUS – ECM PMS  C RLC AC Bus 5

AN/ALQ-172 Countermeasures PRESS PUMP IND ECM Left TR


Set PRESSURE TEST ECM Left TR
Less DT SYS 15 & 16 IND CONT ECM Left TR
Less DT SYS 15 & 16 MON CONT ECM Left TR
DT ALQ-172(V) CDU ECM Left TR
SYS 15 & 16 HTR & BLKG ECM Rt. TR
CONTROL
SYS 15 PRESS PUMP ECM Left TR
SYS 16 PRESS PUMP ECM Left TR

AN/ALT-28(V) Jamming SYS NO.1 AN/ALT-28 ANT SELECT ECM Left TR


Transmitter SYS NO.2 ECM Left TR

ECM ECM CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL RLC RIGHT LOAD CENTRAL CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
LLC LEFT LOAD CENTRAL CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL AUX BNS AUXILIARY BNS CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

Figure 3-3 (Sheet 2 of 2)

3-28 Change 9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Glossary

AAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Aircraft Artillery GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Positioning System


AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternating Current HSAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heavy Stores Adapter Beam
ACU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avionics Control Unit ICSMS . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Conventional Stores
AFSATCOM . Air Force Satellite Communications Management System
AGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Gain Control INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inertial Navigation Set/System
AJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Jam IFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification Friend or Foe
ANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna IFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Flight Rules
AOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle-of-Attack LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liquid Crystal Display
BIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Built-In-Test LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Frequency
BITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Built-In-Test Equipment LMSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left Missile Light
BNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bomb Navigation System LNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Noise Amplifier
BWO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backward Wave Oscillation LRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Replaceable Unit
CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breaker MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction Display
CCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit card Assembly MRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miniature Receive Terminal
CDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Display Unit NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation, Navigator
CFAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant False Alarm Rate OAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offensive Avionics System
CMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Countermeasures Dispenser PD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Doppler
COMSEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Security PRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Recurrence Frequency
CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cathode Ray Tube PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Recurrence Interval
CSRL . . . . . . . . Common Strategic Rotary Launcher PROM . . . . . . . . Programmable Read-Only Memory
CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Wave RMSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Missile Light
DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current RTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar-Transmitter Modulator
ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Counter Measures RWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Warning Receiver
EEROM . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronically Erasable Read SAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface to Air Missile
Only Memory SI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Integration
EID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emitter Identification Data SIOP . . . . . . . . . . Single Integrated Operations Plan
EMCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emission Control STALO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stable Local Oscillator
EMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic Interference TRANSEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Security
EMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic Pulse TH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track While Scan
EW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Warfare TX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit
FDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Force Direction Message VLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Very Low Frequency
FPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front-Panel Programmable
Read-Only Memory

Change 10 Glossary-1/(Glossary-2 blank)


BLA
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

*DENOTES ILLUSTRATION

Page Page

Functional Description 1-63


A Keyboard Commands 1-74D
Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-17, 3-20D
Normal Operation 1-73
Abnormal Operation and Malfunction Waveguide Low Pressure Warning
Analysis 1-5, Section III and Blanking Panel 1-72G*
After Landing Checklist 2-44 AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A
After Takeoff/Climb Checklist 2-23 Countermeasures System 1-75
Aircraft, The 1-3 Built-In-Test Equipment
Coding v (BITE) Self-Test 1-76
Description 1-3 Component Description 1-75
Dimensions 1-4 Component Locations 1-77*
Special Features 1-3 Controls and Indicators 1-79*
Aircrew Emergency Procedures 1-5 Functional Description 1-75
Air Refueling Procedures 2-42 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-21
Contact 2-43 AN/ALQ-153(V) Tail Warning System 1-83
Post Air Refueling 2-43 Component Description 1-83
Rendezvous 2-42 Component Locations 1-85*
AN/ALE-20 Flare Ejector Set 1-113 Controls and Indicators 1-86*
Component Description 1-113 Functional Description 1-83
Component Locations 1-115* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-22
Controls and Indicators 1-116* Normal Operation 1-91
Functional Description 1-113 AN/ALQ-155(V) Power Management System 1-92
Malfunction Analysis Antenna Selector Panel 1-100*
Checklist 3-25 Component Description 1-92
Normal Operation 1-120 Component Locations 1-95*
Pilot’s ALE-20 Flare Ejector Panel 1-119* Control Indicator Programmer 1-99*
Stepping Switch and Flare Functional Description 1-92
Ejector Case 1-114* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-23
AN/ALE-24 Dispenser Set 1-103 Normal Operation 1-101
Component Description 1-103 Signal Processor 1-98*
Component Locations 1-105* AN/ALR-20A Search Receiver 1-13
Controls and Indicators 1-106* Abnormal Operation 3-3
Functional Description 1-103 Blanking Amplifier 1-22*
Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-25 Component Description 1-15
Normal Operation 1-111 Component Locations 1-17*
AN/ALQ-172 Countermeasures Set 1-63 Controls and Indicators 1-23*, 1-26*
Auxiliary Panel 1-72G, 1-72H* Functional Description 1-13
CDU Detailed Status Screen 1-72U* IP-1168B Bit 1 Screen 1-26D, 1-26D*
CDU Fault Display 3-20A* IP-1168B Bit 2 Screen 1-26F, 1-26F*
CDU Normal Operation 1-74 IP-1168B Indicator Align Screen 1-26G*
CDU Select Key Matrix 1-72Q* Look-Thru Panel 1-20*
CDU Situation Display 1-72K* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-4
CDU Status Display 1-72P* Power Supply 1-21*
CDU Symbol Set 1-72V* Receiver-Control, C-9449/ALR-20A 1-15, 1-19*
Component Block Diagram 1-66* RF Tuners 1-21*
Component Locations 1-67* AN/ALT-16A 1-57
Control Display Unit 1-65, 1-66A*,1-72B* AN/ALT-28(V) Jamming Transmitter 1-57
Control Display Unit Operation 1-72J AN/ALT-32A Jamming Transmitter 1-57
Controls and Indicators 1-72* Component Locations 1-58*
Control Monitor 1-72A* Controls and Indicators 1-60*
Faults 3-20A

Change 9 Index-1
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Page Page

B E
Before Exterior Inspection – Safety Check 2-5 ECM Antennas 1-5
Blanking Amplifier, ALR-20A 1-22* Antenna Locations 1-8*
Blanking System 1-55 Antenna Patterns 1-5
Equipment Locations 1-56* Transmitter Antenna Types 1-5, 1-10*
Functional Description 1-55 ECM Equipment Operation Requirements 2-4
Equipment Circuit Protection and System
C Data Flow Diagrams 1-4
EW Calibration and Interference Checklist 2-25
EW Equipment Set Checklist 2-37
C-9449/ALR-20A Receiver-Control, 1-15, 1-19* EW Officers Station 1-5, 1-6*
Contact, Air Refueling Procedures 2-43 Expendable Countermeasures Systems 1-103
Countermeasures Set, AN/ALQ-172 1-63 AN/ALE-20 Flare Ejector Set 1-113
Component Locations 1-65* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-25
Controls and Indicators 1-70* AN/ALE-24 Dispenser Set 1-103
Control Monitor 1-71* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-25
Functional Description 1-63 Exterior Inspection Checklist 2-7
Normal Operation 1-73
Waveguide Low Pressure Warning
and Blanking Panel 1-72G* F
Countermeasures System
AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A 1-75 Flare Ejector Set, AN/ALE-20 1-113
Built-In-Test Equipment Component Description 1-113
(BITE) Self-Test 1-76 Component Locations 1-115*
Component Description 1-75 Controls and Indicators 1-116*
Component Locations 1-77* Functional Description 1-113
Controls and Indicators 1-79* Normal Operation 1-120
Functional Description 1-75 Pilot’s ALE-20 Flare Ejector Panel 1-119*
Stepping Switch and Flare
D Ejector Case 1-114*

Defensive Systems 1-4 G


Circuit Breakers 3-27*
Dispenser Set AN/ALE-24 1-103 Ground Cooling 1-4
Component Description 1-103
Component Locations 1-105* H I
Controls and Indicators 1-106*
Functional Description 1-103
Normal Operation 1-111 Inflight Procedures 2-23
After Takeoff/Climb Checklist 2-23
EW Calibration and Interference
Checklist 2-25
EW Equipment Set Checklist 2-37
Prelanding Operational Check
Checklist 2-41
Interior Inspection Checklist 2-8

Index-2 Change 12
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Page Page

J K L Q R
Look-Thru Panel, ALR-20A 1-20* Radar Warning Receiver, (RWR) 1-27
Component Description 1-31
M N Component Locations 1-32*
Controls and Indicators 1-36*
Functional Description 1-27
Nuclear Alert Procedures 2-47 Gunner Station 1-31
Indications 1-42*
O P Normal Operation 1-42K
Operational Modes 1-28
Pilot’s ALE-20 Flare Ejector Panel 1-119* Signal Processor 1-34*
Post Air Refueling Procedures 2-43 Receiver-Control, C-9449/ALR-20A 1-15, 1-19*
Postflight Procedures 2-44 Receiver Systems 1-13
After Landing Checklist 2-44 AN/ALR-20A Search Receiver 1-13
Postflight Checklist 2-46 Abnormal Operation 3-3
Power Management System, Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-4
AN/ALQ-155(V) 1-92 Radar Warning Receiver 1-27
Antenna Selector Panel 1-100* Abnormal Operation 3-7
Component Description 1-92 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-8
Component Locations 1-95* Sensor Integration System 1-43
Control Indicator Programmer 1-99* Abnormal Operation 3-11
Functional Description 1-92 BIT Advisory Malfunction Analysis 3-12
Normal Operation 1-101 Receiver-Transmitter Systems 1-63
Signal Processor 1-98* AN/ALQ-172 (V) Countermeasures Set 1-63
Power Supply, ALR-20A 1-21* Autonomous Self-Test 1-73
Preflight and Operational Checks 1-5 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-17
Preflight Procedures 2-5 AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A
Before Exterior Inspection – Safety Check 2-5 Countermeasures System 1-75
Exterior Inspection Checklist 2-7 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-21
Interior Inspection Checklist 2-8 AN/ALQ-153(V) Tail Warning System 1-83
Prelanding Operational Check Checklist 2-41 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-22
Pretakeoff Procedures 2-21 AN/ALQ-155(V) Power Management
Starting Engines Checklist 2-21 System 1-92
Taxiing and Before Lineup Checklist 2-22 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-23
Preparation for Flight 2-3 Rendezvous, Air Refueling Procedures 2-42
Checklists 2-3 RF Tuners ALR-20A 1-21*
Entrance 2-3

Change 9 Index-3
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Page Page

S T
Search Receiver, AN/ALR-20A 1-13 Tail Warning System, AN/ALQ-153(V) 1-83
Abnormal Operation 3-3 Component Description 1-83
Blanking Amplifier 1-22* Component Locations 1-85*
Component Description 1-15 Controls and Indicators 1-86*
Component Locations 1-17* Functional Description 1-83
Controls and Indicators 1-23*, 1-26* Normal Operation 1-91
Functional Description 1-13 Taxiing and Before Lineup Checklist 2-22
IP-1168B Bit 1 Screen 1-26D, 1-26D* Transmitter Systems 1-57
IP-1168B Bit 2 Screen 1-26F, 1-26F* AN/ALT-16A 1-57
IP-1168B Indicator Align Screen 1-26G* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-15
Look-Thru Panel 1-20* AN/ALT-28(V) Jamming Transmitter 1-57
Power Supply 1-21* AN/ALT-32A Jamming Transmitter 1-57
Receiver-Control, C-9449/ALR-20A 1-15, 1-19* Component Locations 1-58*
RF Tuners 1-21* Controls and Indicators 1-60*
Sensor Integration System 1-43 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-15
Abnormal Operation 3-11 Transmitter Antenna Types 1-5, 1-10*
BIT Advisory Malfunction Analysis 3-12
BIT Displays 1-52* U V W
Component Description 1-43
Component Locations 1-45*
Controls and Indicators 1-46* Waveguide Low Pressure Warning and Blanking
Functional Description 1-43 Panel, ALQ-172 1-72*
Normal Operation 1-53
Signal Processor, ALQ-155 1-98* X YZ
Signal Processor, (RWR) 1-34*
Starting Engines Checklist 2-21
Stepping Switch and Flare
Ejector Case 1-114*

Index-4 Change 9